% VAX-11 Librarian V03-00%U@grэk*,,0 5ASKAUTOLOG AVATU BROADCAST CALCN6CMD CNVDCALXYT Control_FileP CRITICIZEyDAYVDCUeDEFDGTAPEfDTRWHIZh(FDIRlPFILDSPFile_SpecifiereFINDFILEmFINDUICEmFINDUICmFINDUICFINDUICLEmFINDUICFINDUICp FORGONDUICp FORGOCp FORGOFORTV4 F_DeallocateGETQUOTAvjGREPyHELP{ICEIFMOD_ JNLBACKUPKERMITMISCV?m1 ASK? ASK is a Foreign command to simulate the RSX11M .ASK directiveDfor the Indirect file processor. It allows one to read in a line ofGinput from SYS$INPUT in much the same way that INQUIRE does except thatBit allows additional switches and passes escape sequences, and ^Z.Command format:0 $ASK [/qualifiers] symbol-name "prompt-string"Set up the Foreign command as:! $ASK:=$SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]ASKCommand qualifiers:# /TIMEOUT=n ! time out in seconds= /DEFAULT=default-string ! default answer to use on timeout.) /GLOBAL ! Make symbol a global symbol& /UPPERCASE ! Force upper case inputG The /TIMEOUT switch is used if after a specified timeout count oneHwants the input answered automatically with the default answer string orJwith a null if no default answer is supplied. If the question times out, Ithe local symbol $TIMEOUT is set to be true. $TIMEOUT is set false, if notimeout occurs.Notes:I o Escape se quences are passed to the symbol and are three charactersJ long, followed by the two symbols. This assumes ANSI escape M sequences (VT100) are being sent so it won't work with VT52 terminals.K o If Control-Z is input to the prompt, a ^Z is returned to the symbol.2 o The symbol-name MUST be a valid DCL symbol.G o The double quotes surrounding the prompt-string MUST be present!? o The radix of the timeout count is assumed to be decimal.B o There may be NO double quotes surrounding the ALPHANUMERIC  default-string.wwa\ 1 AUTOLOGKAUTOLOG is a program used to logoff (time-out) terminal users who are idle.KAn idle user is one who uses none of the following three system parameters:HCPU_TIME, BUFFERED_IO, and DIRECT_IO. If all of these parameters remainLconstant over a period of 30 minutes (IDLE_TIME), then the user's process isElogged out (DELPRC). Prior to logging the user off, warning messages5are |RL1 DGTAPEHDGTAPE reads tapes written by the Data General RDOS or AOS Dump command Eand copy ASCII or binary files to disk on the VAX. Binary files are pHconverted from IBM format to Vax format but a format file of data types Fbyte by byte is required. At this time KMS does not know how to writeEthe required conversion files for dumping binary data so this utilitye!is limited to ASCII source files.T?DGTAPE is on SYS$UTILITY and may be invoked by the UTL command.T2 File s Input files:  Logical name File content$ ------------ ------------9 TAPE Tape written in D.General RDOS or AOS DUMP format.s- Disk files dumped to the tape can be ASCII / or binary data files; they cannot be entire  directories.E) If user selects a binary disk file fori' loading then CONVERT must include a 5 template name that matches the disk file, and the ! logical name of a format file.i% Files needed if want a binary file: 2 CONVERT free for mat ascii file where each line =1 template name(ie. -.ext or name.- or name.ext)t1 followed by the logical name of a format file. 0 ***Note. KMS has never used this feature and" ***does not know how to use it. (logicalo name from D7 CONVERT file) free format ascii file where each line =s1 data type followed by count of that data type,i/ (data type = 'BYTE','I*2','I*4','R*4','R*8',m 'L*2','BEG','END').8 This file gives in ascending byte order the format of) a bin ocedure.ww~#1 AVATU0 Amdohl-Vax Ascii Tape Utility (AVATU)9 The purpose of the Amdohl-Vax Ascii Tape Utility is:< 1. Allow a Vax system to read any IBM magtape which is< written only with the Ebcdic-Ascii character set< (ie. Ebcdic characters which have Ascii equiva-< lents) and copy the magtape's contents into a disk file.< 2. Allow a Vax system to write any Ascii only disk< file onto a magtape in the appropiate format (Ebcd-< ic) and content (labels,etc.) so that an IBM system< can read the magtape. The magtape produced on the< Vax system should not require any extra considera-< tion than one which is created on an IBM system* when it is read on an IBM system.< 3. Provide a general tape utility to read and write< any IBM (Ascii only) magtape on a Vax system. This< is accomplished by simulating the  algorithms the3 IBM system use to read and write magtapes.< 4. Provide a resonable bulk throughput when reading and writing magtapes.2 USING< Before using AVATU, mount the tape of interest /FOREIGNon the magtape drive. , $ MOUNT/FOREIGN/DENSITY=1600 MSA0: ANY_NAME < After the magtape is successfully mounted, the AVATU is!invoked by entering the commands.& $ AVATU:=$SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]AVATU $ AVATU  <AVATU will then prompt the use r for further input. AVATU's ,prompts adhere to the following conventions:< 1. Along with each prompt, a list of acceptable inputs< is clearly stated (if such a finite list exists).? 2. For each prompt which has a default (ie., if the user= just hit the for input), the default condition 6 is enclosed in square brackets within the prompt. 2 PROMPTS< AVATU will prompt the user several times before it ac-<tually starts to read/write the magtape. The inputs to the<prompts will allow the utility to finalize the run-time par-<ameters. The following sections will describe each prompt<and its acceptable inputs. Listed below is an abreviatedsummary of the prompts:  Reading a magtape:. 1. ENTER TRANSFER MODE: (READ)# 2. ENTER MAGTAPE UNIT NUMBER:- 3. ENTER ESTIMATED FILE SIZE IN BLOCKS:- 4. ENTER EXTENSION FILE SIZE IN BLOCKS:$ 5. ENTER VAX OUTPUT FILE NAME:  Writing a magtape: / 1. ENTER TRANSFER MODE: (WRITE)# 2. ENTER MAGTAPE UNIT NUMBER: 3. CREATE VOLUME LABEL?:: 4. ENTER VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER: (this prompt only if> YES to previous prompt) 5. ENTER DATASET ID:" 6. ENTER MAGTAPE BLOCK SIZE:# 7. ENTER VAX INPUT FILE NAME:< The first prompt upon a successful invoke of the AVATU<utility is the transfer mode prompt. The transfer mode<prompt establishes to the utility whether the user is read-<ing or writing a magtape. Two differnet set of prompts are;used depending on the transfer mode entered at this prompt.  ENTER TRANSFER MODE: The acceptable inputs are:5 1. 0 if the user wishes to read an IBM magtape.6 2. 1 if the user wishes to write an IBM magtape.3 3. ^Z if the user wishes to exit the utility.< The second prompt is always the magtape drive select<prompt. This prompt makes known to the utility which mag-<tape drive it is supposed to use. The magtape of interest<should be mounted foreign on the magtape drive before theutitly is invoked.  ENTER MAGTAPE UNIT NUMBER: <The acceptable inputs are any of the legal magtape drive=names (ie. MSA0, MMSA1, etc.) on the system. It should be<the same as the magtape drive name entered in the MOUNT com-mand.< Following the first two prompts above (which always ap-<pear irregardless of the transfer mode) come the transfer <mode dependent prompts. That is, a different set of prompts<is used depending if the magtape is being read from or being=written to. The remaining sections are divided into two,parts, each dealing with one set of prompts.<The magtape written on the Vax system for the IBM system.will always has the following characteristics:< 1. Volume serial number -- user specified or what is# originally on the magtape.& 2. Dataset id -- user specified.) 3. Dataset serial number -- 000000. 4. Creation date -- 00000." 5. Expiration date -- 98003.% 6. System code -- blank filled.1 7. Record format -- variable length format.( 8. Block length -- user specified.< 9. Record length -- largest record length in the disk file.0 10. Block attribute -- blocked and spanned.  CREATE VOLUME LABEL?: <This prompt is required due to the two types of magtape the%user can use to run with the utility.< 1. Magtape which already has a volume label already.< (ie. all IBM cataloged magtapes will have volume! labels already on them).< 2. Magtape which does not have a volume label. (ie. a brand new magtape).<The acceptable inputs to this prompt is either a YES or a<NO. If the user responds with a YES, then the following<prompts will appear, however, if a NO is entered, the nextprompt will not appear.  ENTER VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER: <The acce ptable inputs to this prompt is any 6-digit number<which serves as the serial number of the magtape. The<6-digit number will be written onto the magtape volume<label. The user is adviced to remember this number since he7or she may need it on the IBM side to read the magtape.  ENTER DATASET ID: <This prompt makes known to the utility the dataset name<which it is going to write to the magtape. The dataset name<is written onto magtape header label. It is pointed  out<that the dataset id does not necessarily have to be the same<as the input file name. The acceptable inputs to this<prompt is any alpha-numeric (up to 17 characters - null pad- ded) string.  ENTER MAGTAPE BLOCK SIZE: <The bigger the block size is written to the magtape, the<smaller the amount of magtape is used to write the same am-<ount of data. However, it is recommended the largest block<size to be used should be around 4000. Using any larger<block size may u se lesser amount of magtape, but may cause<system complications at run-time. The acceptable inputs to-this prompt is a number between 20 and 32768.  ENTER VAX INPUT FILE NAME: <This prompt makes known to the utility the Ascii disk file<that the user wishes to copy onto the magtape. The accept-<able inputs to this prompt is any legal filespec of the Vaxsystem.< After the input to the last prompt, the utility will<begin to copy the disk file onto the magtape. This  utility<is capable of handling multiple dataset, mutiple volume mag-<tape format. When the utility finishes processing the cur-<rent disk file, it will prompt again for the next disk file<to copy onto the magtape by prompting for the dataset id.<If the user has more disk file to copy onto the magtape, he<can follow the above sequence again. if the user has no<more files to copy onto the magtape, the user should enter<^Z to exit the utility (an end of volume label is written< onto the magtape in the exting process). Entering ^Z will<cause the utility to terminate and the DCL command level to<prompt. When the utility terminates, the magtape will auto-<matically rewind to its BOT point. The user should dismount*the magtape by using the DISMOUNT command.  $ DISMOUNT MSA0: <The IBM magtape being read should have the following charac-;teristics in order for the utility to perform successfully:8 1. Record format -- variable or fix length format.<  2. Block attribute -- blocked (spanned or not-spanned).<After the magtape drive select prompt, the utility will ac-<tually read the magtape lead labels and display its info on<the screen. The user after seeing the displayed info (vo-<lume serial number, dataset id, etc.) can either continue by<responding to further prompts or entering ^Z to exit the<utility (if the wrong magtape is mounted, ie.). The displa-<yed info allows the user to double check that he has thecorrect magtape. % ENTER ESTIMATED FILE SIZE IN BLOCKS: <This prompt is here due to the fact that it is much more ef-<ficient to allocate the storage for a file once than it is<to allocate it many times. So if the user knows the approx-<imate size of the file, he or she can enter the size at this<prompt to allocate this storage just once. The acceptable8inputs to this prompt is any number between 0 and 32768. % ENTER EXTENSION FILE SIZE IN BLOCKS: <For the sa me reson as above, that is, efficiency, it is de-<sirable to allocate extension file size in big enough chunks<so that the system does not has to extend the file many<times (if it has to be extended, due to under estimated file<size in the above prompt). The acceptable inputs to this)prompt is any number between 0 and 32768.  ENTER VAX OUTPUT FILE NAME: <This prompt makes known to the utility the file name of the<output file the utility should write into. The acceptable< inputs to this prompt is any legal filespec in the Vax sys-tem.< The utility supports multiple dataset, multiple volume<format. Therefore, if the IBM magtape has more than one da-<taset on it, then the utility, when it finishes processing<the first dataset, will again prompt for the estimated file<size, extension size, and the output file name for the next<dataset. The user can terminate the utility at any time by<entering ^Z as the reponse to a prompt. If the utility de-<tects an end of volume label, it will automatically termi-<nate. When the utility terminates, it will rewind the mag-<tape to its BOT point. The user should dismount the magtapeby using the DISMOUNT command.  $ DISMOUNT MSA0:ww %g 1 BROADCASTA BROADCAST is a task which allows any user to send a one line4notice to another user on the system. Its syntax is+ BROADCAST TTxx:message...message...messageor/ BROADCAST Username:message...message...messageFIfK`R1 PF (Process_Files)H PF will display the files which a given process currently has open. The syntax isg $ PF Process_NameTo use PF, first issue i $ SET COMMAND SYS$UTILITY:PFiww the graphics tabletH control box is on. The graphics tablet data is entered via aH cursor (push the button) control. The red LED marked 'DATA' willH light if data is transmitted and the 'PEN' LED will remain on forH as long as the cursor butto !Messages sent to DEC CRT terminals will erase the top 6 Elines of the screen and display the notice 2 lines down from the top.ww`wQg1 CALCD HELP on using CALC can be obtained using the following keywords& COMMANDS CALC commands(use in @files)3 EXAMPLES Examples of using CALC with command files( GUIDE Basic User's Guide to using CALC FEATURES Advanced CALC features5 FUNCTIONS Mathematical Functions supported by CALC..2 OCTAL Using CALC for Octal arithmetic.(also "HEX)1 PRECISION Obtaining ultra high precision results VARIABLES CALC variable types2 GUIDE F CALC is a calculator designed to evaluate arithmetic expressions.HIn its basic form, expression evaluation is similar to that used by ANSIFFORTRAN with calculations performed on INTEGER*4 and REAL*8 constants.BVariables may also be invoked but are limited to single alphabeticGcharacters. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with FORTRAN dataHtypes, constants, expression syntax, ope#rator precedence, and the syntaxEfor assigning values to variables. Additional features include octal,Ehexadecimal, and multiple precision arithmetic capabilities. CommonlyGused commands and expressions can be placed in a file and executed when convenient.6 To use CALC either define it as a foreign command CALC:==$DRA0:[SYSUTL]CALCDor invoke it via the UTL procedure. One line calculations are done by typing' CALC expression If a foreign commandor( UTL CALC expressi $on If invoked via UTLHand CALC files are run by typing CALC @filespec or UTL CALC @filespec.LA complete users guide can be printed by typing PRINT DRA1:[SYSUTL]CALC.MEM. @Try typing CALC 123+456 followed by a carriage return. CALC willHevaluate the expression and output the answer 579. Try other expressionssuch as I 12.0 - 99. (answer=-87.00000000000000)= -(-32767+(6-2)**8-(512/(409-401))) (answer=-32705)8 3*5/7 % (answer=2)8 3*(5/7) (answer=0) MMixed mode is legal, for example, 1977/50. is evaluated as 39.54000000000000./Reals may be expressed using D or E format. ForFexample, 1.2E10*2.D0**3-1.D-8 is evaluated as 0.95999999999999992D+11. 2 VARIABLESD Variables may also be used to retain values for later use. CALCCallows variables consisting of a single alphabetic character. As inGFORTRAN, variable A through H and O thru Z default to ty&pe real, I thruHN to type integer. To set I to a value use the usual FORTRAN syntax, forexample: I=2**10-1.D Try typing the single character 'I'. CALC will respond with itsAvalue. We can now use I in various expressions such as J=I-I/3*3.H % is a special variable that retains the value of the last expressionIevaluated. For example, to successively add up the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,and 6 we could enter  1 %+2 %+3 %+4 %+5 %+6BNote that you 'can examine the value of the variables by typing theCappropriate single character followed by a carriage return. Such an,examination does not change the value of %.  To exit from CALC, type  *E (or *EXIT) or *S (or *STOP)  2 FUNCTIONS ?CALC recognizes a variety of special functions. For example, toGcalculate the square root of 2, we can type SQRT(2.).CALC responds withHthe value 1.41421356237310. Each function may have an expression for itsJargument. For exampl (e, A=2.0*SQRT(ALOG(9.)+3.) sets A to 4.55948443459838..The following special functions are available: > FUNCTION NAME ARGUMENT TYPE FUNCTION VALUE DESCRIPTIONA ----------------------------------------------------------------? ABS REAL REAL absolute value? DABS REAL REAL absolute value? IABS INTEGER INTEGER absolute valueA IFIX REAL INTEGER REAL to INTEGER @) AINT REAL REAL REAL truncationA INT REAL INTEGER REAL to INTEGER A IDINT REAL INTEGER REAL to INTEGER 5 EXP REAL REAL e**X5 DEXP REAL REAL e**XB ALOG REAL REAL natural logarithmB DLOG REAL REAL natural logarithmB ALOG10 REAL REAL logarit *hm base 10B DLOG10 REAL REAL logarithm base 10< SQRT REAL REAL square root< DSQRT REAL REAL square rootC SIN REAL REAL trigonometric sineC DSIN REAL REAL trigonometric sineE COS REAL REAL trigonometric cosineE DCOS REAL REAL trigonometric cosineC TANH R +EAL REAL hyperbolic tangentC DTANH REAL REAL hyperbolic tangent< ATAN REAL REAL arc tangent< DATAN REAL REAL arc tangent 2 OCTAL  C You may change the base used to specify constants by using the*B command. Legal forms are + command action+ ------- ------> *B displays curren ,t default base> *B 8 changes default base to octal; *B 10 changes default base to 10; *B 16 changes default base to 16 A Suppose we have changed the default base to octal. Then addingA(7 + 1) we obtain the result 00000000010 (BASE 8). If the=default base is hexadecimal, we can enter 9 + 1 which isBevaluated as 0000000A (BASE 16). Suppose we have assigned A=1Fthen 1+A gives 2.00000000 -0000000 even when the default base 16.=If we wish to add the hexadecimal digit 'A' to 1, enter 1+0A.>We now obtain the desired 0000000B (BASE 16). This leading 0Eis only necessary when the first hexadecimal digit is greater than 9.I If constants are entered with digits that are not legal for the baseIbeing used, the entire number is converted using a more appropriate base.DFor example, if we have set the default base to octal and type 1+9.HThe 9 is not an octal number so it is co.nverted to base 10. If a base 162number is involved, the result will be in base 16.G You may temporarily change the base for a single integer constant bypreceeding it with  ^8 for octal ^10 for base 10 ^16 for base 16 ?For example, if the default base is 10, 100+^840 gives 132,Da base 10 integer. I=100+^1610 gives 116 also a base 10 integer. J Note that the '^' can only be used to specify the base of constants and+that express/ions such as ^16I are illegal. I To declare variables to be integers of a specific base, we can use thecommands  *INTEGER (base 10) *OCTAL (base 8) *HEX (base 16) for example, @ *INTEGER A declares variable A to be a base 10 integer. J *HEX B,Z,F declares variables B, Z, and F to be base 16 integers. I *DECIMAL lists all the variables that have been declared to be$ of type DECIMA 0L. J To summarize, there are three distinct ways of making base declarationsDwhen using CALC. The first is to use the *B command to designate theDbase default value. This is used to determine the base for constantsDwhen they occur in expressions. It does not in any way influence theHtype of any variables found in an expression. The only way to change the:type of a variable is with a specific CALC command such as  *INTEGER A,B = Suppose for example that the default ba1se is 10 and we enter  *OCTAL A A=100 2 then CALC responds with 00000000144 (BASE 8). BFinally, the last way to change a base is to use the explicit base&specifiers for a constant, for example ^10 123 ^8 777 ^16 AB 2 PRECISION2 -MULTIPLE PRECISION-H Normally integer arithmetic (base 8, 10, and 16) is done internallyHwith INTEGER*4 variables. To allow for larger numbers, CALC has multiple?precision 2capabilities that allow numbers up to 99 digits to beFmanipulated. Constants are converted to a multiple precision data typeGwhen the number of digits specified exceeds a certain value. This valueDdepends upon the specified base. Leading zeroes are included in this?count and can be used to force constants to be of type multiple precision. B base maximum number of digits before conversionB ---- ------------------------------------------ 8 3 10 10 9 16 7  K Suppose we type (with the default base of 10) the number 1234567890,2then CALC echoes with 1,234,567,890 (BASE 10). H The commas indicate that % now has type multiple precision base 10.FSimilarly, typing 1234ABCD results in 1234,ABCD (BASE 16). Notice thatBbase 16 multiple precision numbers are separated by commas every 41digits, octal and base 10 numbers every 3 digits.B You may perform th 4e usual operations of addition, subtraction,@multiplication, division, and exponentiation. As of version 1.0,>exponentiation of a multiple precision number may only be to aBnon-negative integral power. To declare variables of type multipleprecision, use 2 *M8 (multiple precision base 8)3 *M10 (multiple precision base 10)3 *M16 (multiple precision base 16) for example, @ *M8 A,B declares A and B to be multiple pre5cision' octal variables.MThen typing A=32768 results in CALC responding with 100,000 (BASE 8). 2 COMMANDS2 -ADDITIONAL COMMANDS-B All commands to CALC (as distinguished from expressions to beCevaluated) begin with an asterisk. To obtain a list of all possibleEcommands, type a question mark followed by a carriage return. Most ofHthe commands have already been described. The following section gives an&explanation of the 6 remaining commands.) COMMAND DESCRIPTION) ------- ----------- H *@filename Where filename is the name of a file of CALC commands.G CALC reads the file and executes the commands. Up to E 5 nested calls can be made. Recursive calls are notH allowed. CALC prompts with CALC before each commandA line is executed, where n is the calling level. J Yo7u may optionally follow the file name with a blankI followed by a single variable name (a single alphabeticH character or %). CALC will then execute the file untilJ the value of that variable is zero or negative. The testJ of this variable is made before the file is executed andJ not during execution of commands within the file. If theF variable's value is not positive when the command isH 8 initially encountered, the file will not be opened forI execution. See the section on command file examples for* ways to use this option. J *ASCII Declares a list of variables to be of type ASCII. UsefulH when decoding ASCII characters. For example, if we set4 A to be of type ASCII, then typing# A=77H results in the character 'M' being output. The inver 9seH operation is the single quote. It allows us to specifyB a single ASCII constant. For example, if we type 'ME then the character 'M' is echoed and indicates thatI % holds that character and has data type ASCII. SupposeH that the variable I has data type INTEGER. Then we canH output the base 10 code for the ASCII character 'M' by entering# : I='MG which results in 77 being output. Notice that you mayJ not be able to enter certain control characters that areH intercepted by your operating system. Characters whoseC value is less than 32. are output by printing theJ character '^' followed by the equivalent ASCII character6 of that number plus 32. For example, # A=10 ; results in ! ^* K being output since 42 is the ASCII code for the characterI '*'. See apendix A for a table of the characters outputE by CALC to represent such non-printable characters. I*C COMMENT line. The characters that follow are ignored byH CALC. This is useful when documenting files containing! CALC commands.   H*N < NOVIEW. Prevents CALC from outputting the value of theG expressions evaluated. This is especially useful whenJ executing files containing CALC commands that initializeA variables to special values. Equivalent to *V 1  9*V VIEW. Controls CALC's printing options: , command output class- ------------- --------------. *V 0 error messages . = *V 1 error messages= command lines read from files . *V 2 error messages> value of expressions evaluated . *V 3 error messages> command lines read from a file> value of expressions evaluated, *V same as *V 3  F The default setting is *V 3. N >otice that other legal+ forms are *VIEW 1 and *V2  J*R READ. Allows a single line to be read from the terminal.F Useful in files of CALC commands to allow additionalI commands to be entered (like *S to exit from that file)F or simply as a way to halt terminal output until the1 carriage return key is pressed.  K*REAL declares specified variables to be REAL*8. When the va ?lueK of such variables are output, FORTRAN's D format is used.  K*DECIMAL Declares specified variables to be REAL*8. When the valueK of such variables are output, FORTRAN's F format is used.@ Variables A-H and O-Z default to type DECIMAL. "*S STOP. Same as *E H*E EXIT. Terminates CALC session unless it is used withinH a file of CALC commands. In this case, CALC closes the; @ file and continues with the next command. I*Z ZERO. Zeroes all variables except %. Data types are not changed. 2 FEATURES2 -ADDITIONAL FEATURES-D CALC is similar to FORTRAN with respect to operator precedence.GBlanks may occur anywhere on a command line without effect except afterFa single quote mark used to specify a single ASCII character constant.?CALC extends the ANSI FORTRAN syntax by allowing the fAollowing:5 1. multiple assignments on one line, for example  I=J=K=812 4 2. Unary + and unary - are allowed, for example 2*-3 +2+-7 -2**4F are all legal. The last expression evaluates to 16 because the< unary - has a higher precedence than exponentiation. @ 3. exponentiation may be indicated by using ! as well as ** E If any of the declarations are entered (such as *INTEGER or *M8)Fand no argument to this Bcommand is given, then CALC will print out theFvariables that have been assigned that data type. Note that a variableEcan be assigned to different data types using such commands and stillEnot be assigned a value. If you attempt to output the value of such a'variable, an error message will result. 2 EXAMPLES3 -COMMAND FILE EXAMPLES  EXAMPLE 1:@ PROBLEM: be able to enter the coefficients of a second6 degree polynomial and have the rootsC output. ? Solution: create the following file and call it ROOT:  / *CALCULATES THE ROOTS OF A 2ND DEGREE EQUATION, *C YOU WILL BE ASKED TO ENTER THE VALUES OF *C A,B AND C WHERE *C *C 2 *C A X +B X + C = 0 *C *C *C ENTER THE VALUE OF A *R A=% *C ENTER THE VALUE OF B *R B=% *C ENTER THE VALUE OF C *R C=% *C THE ROOTS ARE: X=(-B+SQRT(B*B-4.*A*C))/2.*A Y=(-B-SQRT(B*B-4.*A*C))/2.*A *C *C AS YOU CAN SEE BECAUSE A*X*X+B*XD+C A*Y*Y+B*Y+C  < Then run the procedure by entering CALC and typing  *@ROOT   EXAMPLE 2: C PROBLEM: Suppose we are working on a problem that requiresC us to convert many decimal 16 bit word addresses toC octal byte address. We would like to be able toC simply enter the decimal word address and have CALC4 respond with the octal byte address.  C SOLUTION: CreatEe a file of the following commands and call it BYT:   *C *C *C *C *C ENTER DECIMAL WORDS *R A=%+% 4 Then we enter CALC and type the following: . *OCTAL A (to make A an octal variable)0 1 (to set % to a non-zero number)= *@BYT % (to execute the file of conversion commands)  ? We will then repeatedly execute the file BYT until we5 enter a zero as the number to be converted. EXAFMPLE 3:C Problem: We wish to set up a command file called SIGN thatA allows us to enter a number, and then execute theB files MINUS, ZERO, and PLUS according to the value entered. 6 Solution: Create the file SIGN consisting of:  3 *C ENTER THE NUMBER WHOSE SIGN IS TO BE DETERMINED *R I=J=% I=-I K=1& *C K STAYS AT 1 IF NUMBER IS NON-ZERO *@MINUS I *@PLUS J *@ZERO K  The file MINUS: *C THE GNUMBER IS NEGATIVE I=K=0 The file PLUS:  *C THE NUMBER IS POSITIVE J=K=0 and the file ZERO:   *C THE NUMBER IS ZERO K=0 F Notice that K is used to control the execution of the file ZEROGby initializing it to 1 and resetting it to zero if either of the filesPLUS or MINUS are executed. EXAMPLE 4:> PROBLEM: Enter the number N and calculate the numbers& 1!, 2!, 3!, 4!, ... N! where , N! ='H N*(N-1)*(N-2)*...*3*2*1  > SOLUTION: Since the numbers may grow very large, weA will use a multiple precision variable. Create' the following files:   MFACT: ) *C INPUT THE LIMIT OF THE FACTORIAL LIST *V 0 *R N=% *M10 A I=0 *@MF1 N6 *C SET VIEW AND TYPE FOR VARIABLE A AT DEFAULT VALUES *DECIMAL A *V   MF1:  A=1 N=N-1 I=I+1 J=I *@MF2 J *V2 A *V0  MF2:  A=A*J J=J-1 I We then enter CALC and type *@MFACT3 A typical run of this procedure would look like: CAL CALC>*@MFACT1 CALC<2>*C INPUT THE LIMIT OF THE FACTORIAL LIST CALC<2>*V 0 CALC<2>4 1 (BASE 10) 2 (BASE 10) 6 (BASE 10) 24 (BASE 10) CALC> EXAMPLE 5:H PROBLEM: we wish to specify a default base and successively add$ numbers into a sum.  ? SOLUTION: create the following files of CALC commands:  $J ADD:  *V *C ENTER DEFAULT BASE *R *C CHANGE DATA TYPE OF SUM, *C BY SPECIFYING THE DATA TYPE FOR I AND J *R* *C TO EXIT, TYPE 0 TO ZERO OUT, ADD -I *V0 I=0 1 *@ADD1 % *V   ADD1:  *V *R *V0 J=% I=I+% *V2 I *V0 %=IABS(J) A typical run follows: CALC>*@ADD CALC<2>*V CALC<2>*C ENTER DEFAULT BASE CALC<2>*R CALC<2>*B 8 DEFAULT BASE IS 8# CALC<2>*C CHANGE DATA TYPE OF SUM3 CALC<2>*C BY SKPECIFYING THE DATA TYPE FOR I AND J CALC<2>*R CALC<2>*OCTAL I,J1 CALC<2>*C TO EXIT, TYPE 0 TO ZERO OUT, ADD -I CALC<2>*V0 CALC<3>177 00000000177 (BASE 8) CALC<3>1 00000000200 (BASE 8) CALC<3>0 00000000200 (BASE 8)ww g1 CHGUIC> The CHGUIC command is no longer used for changing the UIC of Afiles. Instead use the SET FILE command. For information on the%SET FILE command, type HELP SET FILE. 2 OBSOLETE? The CHGUIC command is oLbsolete and is not to be used. For theIsake of documentation and so the program can be resurected if ever needed=the old information is kept in this section of the help file.A Changes the uic of a file (or files). If UIC is not specified, Lnothing happens. CHGUIC must be run from an account with /BYPASS privilege.2You can determine your UIC by typing SHOW PROCESS. & CHGUIC:==$SYS$SYSDISK:[SYSUTL]CHGUICFormat: CHGUIC/UIC:[xxx,yyy] file-spec *Parameters file-specG SpecifiMes the name of the file(s) to be changed. No default extension. *Qualifiers/UIC! Specifies the new uic, in octal.8 The directory is left unaltered but the uic is changed.- If UIC is not specified, nothing is changed.2 SOURCE_LOCATION4 Found on the DECUS:[DECUS.VAXF81.CHGUIC] directory.ww!g 1 CLEXTRACT5 EXTRACT COMMAND DEFINITION(S) FROM A CLI TABLES FILE > CLEXTRACT builds an output file suitable for input to the@ command language editor (CLEDITOR). WThis file contains theE specified verb or of all verbs in the file specified by /TABLES.  Format: CLEXTRACT 2 /ALL5 Extract all VERB definitions. Do not use with /VERB.2 /CLI8 Name of CLI type. Must be DCL or MCR. Default is DCL. 2 /OUTPUT1 Output file specification. Default is SYS$OUTPUT 2 /TABLES CLI tables file specification. 5 For DCL the default is SYS$LIBRARY:DCLTABLES.EXE5 For MCR the default is SYS$LIBRARY:MCRTABLES.EXE2 /VERB: Verb to extract O. /VERB must be specified if /ALL is not.ww!g1 CMDB We have a number of system wide command files of generalD utility. An easy way to activate them is with the CMD command.C For example to activate the Word Processor Menue, type CMD WP.= In general, to activate any command file or process type4 CMD cmdname optional-command stringF CMD activates only command files on SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSMGR.CMDFIL]. 4 General ut Pility command files include:/ CLOCK - Tick, Tock, a VMS Alarm Clock< DRAWTREE - Draw a diagram of your directory structure@ ERRORDSP - Convert an error number to a VMS error message7 FORGO - Compile and link simple Fortran tasks: IMGCMD - Activate the image processor interpreter- INCBACKUP - Incrementally backup a disk< JNLBACKUP - Backup a collection of user files to tape., LETTER - Letter creation and filing* MEMO - Memo Q creation and filing6 PAGE - Erase the screen on a video terminalI REPORT - Access an Acquisition System report(just like on 11/45)6 SPR - Generate an SPR (must be privileged)* WP - Word processor procedureww@0P 1 CRITICIZED The CRITICIZE command checks a file of English text for spelling@errors and common instances of bad writing style. Because of theBcomplexities and subtleties of English usage, the command will notEnecessarilRy flag all misspelled words. In some instances it may evenEflag correctly spelled words as incorrect. While such errors will notFusually occur, proper nouns, highly technical words, and abbreviationsDwill probably be flagged erroneously unless provided for in the word@file. English grammar is exceedingly complex, so any attempt to?automatically analyse it will have errors. The command may haveFtrouble in understanding the part of speech that some words represent.E To help, a series of wordS files are used to augment the vocabulary. #The simple form of the command is: $ CRITICIZE textfileEusing, in place of "textfile" the actual name given to the file to be?checked. The simple form of the command prints the text and any1messages pertaining to the text on the terminal. $The complete form of the command is:$ CRITICIZE textfile userfile 2 TEXTFILEF TEXTFILE refers to the actual file name of the file containing the?text. The default file type is TXT; that is, Tin the absence ofFspecifications to the contrary, the program expects a file type of TXTBappended to the first part of the file name. However, any correctEfile name (for example, MYFILE.WOW) can be used as long as file types)other than TXT are completely specified. 2 USERFILEE USERFILE refers to a file of words that would probably not appear?in a dictionary, such as proper nouns, places, technical words,Dabbreviations, nonstandard spellings, etc. If this parameter is notDspecified Uthen the program will assume a default file which containsBwords that would be classified in these categories. This is not arequired option.C To include the words in the default user word file in one's own@word file, merge the dictionary file ENGL:DEFAULT with one's own)dictionary file using the WORDS command. 3 CREATING= Creating a word file is relatively simple. First build aBdictionary file containing all of the words you wish to use. This)file must adhere to the following ruVles:  no lower case letters, no special characters except apostrophe (') one word per line no blank lines no spaces4The word file is created with the following command:$$ SET COMMAND SYS$VPWFILES:WORDS.CLD3$ WORDS dictionaryfile[,dictionaryfile...] wordfileCWhen multiple dictionary files are used (by separating the name ofEeach one with a comma) they will be be merged properly. However, onlyBone word file may be specified. For dictionary files, the default3file extensionW is DIC; for word files, it is WRD. wwM!g 1 DATEBOOK? DATEBOOK is a VAS/VMS command procedure which allows a user toJcreate and maintain a dated list of appointments, meetings, and deadlines.?Each entry in the users 'datebook' contains the following items<DATE The date of the meeting/appointment/deadlineETIME The time (00:00 to 23:59) of the meeting/.../deadlineEATTENDEE A 14 character string labeling the user for whom the D X meeting is, or anything else the user wants to lable entries with.CTOPIC A 40 character string of anything the user wants to) use describe the meeting.A The user using datebook has the following options: ADD, DELETE,HDISPLAY, HELP, REMOVE, and EXIT each of which is discussed as a seperate+HELP topic. If the user defines the symbol0 DATEBOOK:==@SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSMGR.CMDFIl]DATEBOOK*in their login command file, the command  DATEBOOK YTODAY Jwill display all meetings/appointments/deadlines that will occur that day.2 DATE; The date format is DD-MMM-YYYY. The years must be enteredFas four digits, ie 1982 not 82. The months are entered as, JAN...DEC.FThe "-" in the date is required syntax. Examples of date entries are: VALID INVALID 1-JAN-1982 1/JAN/1982 01-JAN-1982 1-JAN-82 25-FEB-1982 2/25/82 30-NOV-1982 30-NEV-1982HNormally, the days must correctly lie between 0...31, but if you specifyFtoo largZe a day on a certain month (ie 29 days in February) it will beFflagged with an error. At this time, the last day in February in LEAPyear will not work.2 TIME= Time is kept using a 24 hour clock. The day starts at 00:00Gand runs through 23:59. Morning hours are < 12:00. The format for theAentry is HH:MM. The ":" is required syntax. Valid time intriesinclude:8 00:01 One minute past midnight: 9:30 Nine thirty in the morning6 [ 09:30 " " " " "; 14:30 Two thirty in the afternoon 2 ATTENDEE; ATTENDEE may be used several way. If a secretary is usingAthe datebook to keep track of appointments for a number of users,Athis datebook entry field is used to specify which user the entryDis for. If a given user is using DATEBOOK for him or herself alone,?this entry can be used to specify the meeting attendees, or any=other convenient item of interest. When D\ATEBOOK prompts forDATTENDEE, you may enter up to a 14 character string to enter in this@field. If you are unsure what a 14 character string is, STRING,Dis an item you can request HELP on. Valid ATTENDEE entries might be J. Downward P. Vavra VAX Wrk Grpbut VAX Working Group is too long.2 TOPIC< Each meeting/appointment/deadline can have a TOPIC. For a Dmeeting the TOPIC entry might be the topic to be discussed. It also?might include the people asked to attend. For] a formal meetingFit might specify the meeting name and paper to be presented. AnythingFmay be entered for topic, as long as it is 40 characters or less long.Valid topics are: Discuss Vax maintance contract" DECUS, VAX to RSX Migration Paper<If more than 40 characters are input, and error is reported.2 STRING> A character string is a given number characters as typed fromDthe terminal keyboard. If you type "ABCD" at the terminal and it isAentered as a string, the string is 4 c^haracters long. Both upperFand lower case are allowed as string entries. Both TOPIC and ATTENDEEFare string entries. The data file will not hold more than the maximumEnumber of characters specified for a string entry. ie a 40 character@string for TOPIC means that input will be excepted for the TOPICCprompt for up to 40 characters. However, if more than 40 charactersFare typed in, and error will result and the data will not be stored in the file.2 ADD; When you enter ADD mode, DATE_BOOK starts prompting you forCinput. It asks you for DATE, TIME, ATTENDEE, and TOPIC. After youFhave entered all items, it displays what you have entered and asks youCif it is OK. If no mistakes were made, type Y or YES. If you typeEN, NO, or just hit carriage return (, RETurn), the entry will not@be made in the datebook. During the prompting for DATE and TIMEFa carriage return (, RETurn) entered at the prompt will return theuser to the main menue. 2 DISPLAY= The user ca`n display, DATEBOOK entries for a single specific@day, the current day, or all days. When the user types DISPLAY,?DATEBOOK prompts for the date to display. If the user hits theDcarriage return (, RETurn), any DATEBOOK entries for the currentCday are displayed. If the user types, ALL, all entries in the fileEare displayed. If the user enters a specific day (DD-MMM-YYYY), just'the entries for that day are displayed.? The user is given the option of displaying the date entries onDahis/her terminal, or printing the list to the line printer or letterBquality printer. When prompted for the output device, hitting theIreturn key (, RETurn) will direct the display to the user's terminal,Btyping LP will send output to the line printer, and typing LQ will.send the output to the letter quality printer.> Whether or not any entries occur in the file for a given day,Aa header will be displayed. If no entries occur, no entries willfollow the header.2 REMOVE; If you mabke a mistake and want to remove/delete a sepcificFentry on a given day, type REMove to menue prompt. DATEBOOK will thenJprompt you for what day to search for. Enter it as DD-MMM-YYYY. DATEBOOKKwill then read all the entries. Each entry for that date will be displayedHand DATEBOOK will ask you if you wish to remove that entry. If you typeEY or YES the entry will be deleted. Any other response and the entryIwill be saved and DATEBOOK will check to see if more entries on that dateFexist.c When it is done processing a given day, it will return to the Gprompt mode and request another date to be entered. If you do not wantIto remove any other datebook entries hit the terminal's return key (,RETurn).2 DELETE A DELETE is used if you want to delete all entries in the datebookCon a given day upto and including the date entries on a second day.HIf you hit the terminal key RETURN (, RETurn, type RETurn), DATEBOOKHwill return to the main menu. DATEBOOK will ask for thde starting date onHwhich to delete entries. If you enter a valid date (DD-MMM-YYYY) for theFfirst day, DATEBOOK will ask you for the ending date to delete. If theEsecond date entry is valid, DATEBOOK will print a message showing theCrange of dates which will be deleted. It will then ask if it shouldCproceed to delete the entries. If any answer but Y or YES is given,HDATEBOOK will return to the delete menu without deleting any entries. IfHa Y or a YES is entered, DATEBOOK will delete all thosqe entries and then<return to the delete menu to see if you have more to delete.wwH1 DEANZA: HELP in using/programing the DEANZA IP6400 Image Analysis$ System may be obtained by assigning9 ASSIGN SYS$SYSDEVICE:[DEANZA.HELP]DEANZA.HLB HLP$LIBRARY9 and then typing HELP @DEANZA topic (from DCL) or typing: IMGCMD and from within IMGCMD type HELP topic where topic is one of:6 COMMANDS The commands to control the image processor5 IMGCMD The Image Analysis Commandf Line dispatcher./ OVERLAY Documentation on the overlay channel3 REGISTERS The various registers used for control.7 SUBROUTINE How to use the various subroutines for it., TASK What various image analysis tasks do USE How to get a task to run.ww.>1 DEFA DEF is a foriegn command which allows one to change ones defaultE directory in a simpler fashion than using the SET DEFAULT command. I At the same time, if one has allowed privileges, and if SETUIC is on gtheJ system and defined as a foreign commmand, one's current UIC is changed toH the UIC of the target device/directory. To change ones directory type DEF directory_name6 Typing just DEF .sub_directory will switch you to ! [directory_name.sub_directory].K Typing just DEF [-] will back you up one level toward the root directory. = DEF takes a more general syntax in that it also will accept! both devices and directories. ie DEF DEV:DIRECTORYH If the device is hspecified, the ':' must seperate it from the directory7 with no intervening spaces. The [ and ] are optional. H DEF has two special symbols "." and "$". DEF $ will move you back toI your login directory while DEF . will move you to the last directory youJ were on. DEF maintains a symbol LAST_DEFAULT for each user which contains6 the last directory for which DEF was used to move to.K If you try to specify a directory or device which does not exist, DEF will5 issue a warning message aind not execute the command.ww}6g1 FDIRA FDIR is a fast Fortran program designed to make a list of all ofKthe directories and subdirectories on the system. To find the directories,JFDIR first makes sure that the file has a '.DIR' extension, and then looksEup the file header to make sure that the file is a real, true to lifeDdirectory. When finished with the directories, FDIR will sort them by name. COMMAND SYNTAX: If FDIR is located in* 1) [SYSEXE], defjine FDIR:==$FDIR.= 2) [SYSUTL], define FDIR:==$SYS$SYSDISK:[SYSUTL]FDIR3Then the following command can be used to use FDIR./ FDIR DEV DIRNAME OUTPUTFILE COMMAND_FILE_NAMEWhere:D DEV is the disk, just put the name of the disk you want a directoryJtree in this position here. This cannot be a logical name, it must be thephysical device name.B DIRNAME: is the directory to start the tree from. For example ifFyou gave it '000000', then you will get a directory tree for the k wholeIsystem. If you give it 'SYSEXE', then it will give you SYSEXE and all ofIit's subdirectories. Note that brackets around the dirname are optional.> OUTPUTFILE: is where the list of directories will be written.C COMMAND_FILE_NAME is the name of a command file which is generatedIwhich when executed will create all of the directories on the system withCthe correct owner UIC'S. This can be useful in the case of a totalIrebuild of the system from a total backup set. This file coulld be copiedJto the backup tape before backup is started. If you do not specify a name here, no file will be generated.JNOTE: If you do not have the FDIR:==$FDIR, then the command line will notGbe passed, and furthermore you must use run to get it going. FDIR will$ask for all of the input parameters. 2 EXAMPLECEXAMPLE: To list all of the directories on our system disk dra0, we would type:& FDIR DRA0 000000 DIRS.SXX CREDIR.COMH The list of directories will be in DIRS.SXX, and mthe create/directory"command file will be in CREDIR.COM2 AUTHOR AUTHOR: ERIC YOUNGDALE CARLETON COLLEGE NORTHFIELD, MN 55057 18-JAN-1980 FOR VAX/VMS V1.6 FILES: FILE DESCRIPTION FDIR.FOR SOURCE OF PROGRAM1 GETDCL.MAR STANDARD PROGRAM TO GET COMMAND LINE#Taken from [DECUS.VAXS80.FILETOOLS]ww[g1 FILDSP FILDSP< FILDSP is a program which may be used to display the useful: information contained in a file header. The display is in: english snentences rather than the octal numbers available; from the DUMP/HEADER command. To use, RUN [sysutl]FILDSP.: In addition, FILDSP calls a routine that may prove useful> in other programs. The routine is TRNLOG. TRNLOG is a routine= which may be called to convert a logical name to it's lowest5 form (i.e., all logical name translation that can be done, is).- FILDSP is found on [DECUS.VAXS80.FILETOOLS]. ww^jg 1 FINDUICF FINDUIC is a program to locate a oll files owned by a particularE UIC. The program asks for a Disk, UIC, and Output Device then opensH [0,0]INDEXF.SYS on the user-specified Disk. All files owned by the UICI are then entered into an alphabetically-ordered tree, together with theJ and Filesize. (The Filesize is obtained by opening the File by FILE ID. D If the File is locked, or otherwise protected against the caller, E **** will be returned for the File Size) FINDUIC should be defined  as a foreign command, i.e.( pFINDUIC:==$SYS$SYSDISK:[SYSUTL]FINDUIC and then is called by typing" FINDUIC Disk:[UIC]/OUTPUT:OutputI Any of the above parameters may be omitted, with the Disk defaulting toI the users default disk, [UIC] defaulting to the process UIC, and output defaulting to SYS$OUTPUT.2 MULTI_HEADER_FILESB FINDUIC does not recognize multi-header files and will generate aN listing for each header found. The total size at the end of the listing willM include block space required for heaqders and will agree with SHOW QUOTA for the UIC.2 SOURCE_CODE_LOCATION; Initial program obtained from [VAXF81.FINDUIC]FINDUIC.MAR; Current program obtained from [VAX82B.NRLSSD]FINDUIC.MAR5 Modified sources on SYS$SYSUSER0:[SYSUTL.FILETOOLS]ww RNg1 FORGOAFORGO is a command procedure which will compile, link and executeEyour fortran program in one step. It will also delete the .OBJ file,Cand all older versions of the .EXE files (if any); these files are@not rneeded and take up extra room on the disk. Please use FORGO?whenever you have a fortran program which need not be linked toany other programs.?Any FORTRAN compiler switches may be specified. The format for FORGO is: FORGO [/switches]BThe is the name of your source file. Note that if your@source file does NOT have the filetype ".FOR", then the completeBfile specification must be given (e.g., "MYPROG.TST" or "MYPROG.")ENOTE: The switch "/CHECK=ALL" is assumsed, unless overriden by another"/CHECK" switch.AFor a description of the valid switches, see "HELP FORTRAN QUAL".ANote that the "/OBJECT" and "/NOOBJECT" switches are not allowed.=Also if "/DEBUG" is specified, the "/DEBUG" is assumed in thelink and execute steps as well. *examples;For simple compile, link and run of program TEST.FOR, type: FORGO TEST/To get a list file (file type of ".LIS"), type: FORGO TEST/LISTDTo compile, link and run a program named "MYPROG.SRC", wtith D-lines,and list file, type: FORGO MYPROG.SRC/LIST/D_LINES)To debug a program named MYPROG.FOR, type) FORGO MYPROG/DEBUG/LIST=LPA0:/NOOPTIMIZECThis will cause the list file to be sent immediately to the printerHso you can have it ready for reference when the Debugger is initialized.@(The "/NOPTIMIZE" is recommended whenever you use the debugger.)wwM"g1 FORMK FORM is a mini-utility which is used to set the form characteristics forDthe DECwriter III LA120 termuinal. It outputs control codes to LP0:.It accepts commands of the form  FORM  'where can have the values 0-8. LTo change form type, line up the print head with top of form (TOF) and type FORM NN from another terminal.2 FOREIGN_COMMAND8 To use FORM as a foreign command enter the following;1 $ ASSIGN/SYSTEM LP0: TTA0: ! If using with TTA0:5 $ FORM:==$DRA0:[SYSUTL]FORM ! Create foreign command2 TYPEAllowed form types include:, TYPE Horiz. Pitchv Vert. Pitch Form LengthF 0 10.0 char/inch 6 lines/inch 66 lines No vert. margins, 1 10.0 char/inch 6 lines/inch 66 lines, 2 5.0 char/inch 4 lines/inch 44 lines, 3 6.0 char/inch 4 lines/inch 44 lines& 4 6.6 char/inch 4 lines/inch 44 lines& 5 8.3 char/inch 6 lines/inch 66 lines, 6 12.0 char/inch 8 lines/inch 88 lines, 7 13.2 char/inch 8 lines/inch 88 lines, 8 16.0 char/inch 8 lines/inch 88 linesHEach of these forms is designed to use and fill upw the standard computerEprintout form leaving about 1/2 inch margins at the top and bottom. wwg1 GREPI GREP will print out all files which have a specifec string contained in A them, and print the lines in the files which contain the string.1 GREP [ =] /SE:/CO:NNNH To use GREP define the symbol GREP:==$DRA0:[SYSUTL]GREP as part of you LOGIN.COM. 2 OUTFILEK May be any legal filename to which the output will be written. Dx If not specified, output will be written to the user's terminal.D If output is to other than a terminal (i.e., a file or LP:) the G output will preceded by the command line. Multiple commands to theG same output file (or LP:) will be delimited by a line of astericks. 2 FILESPECL May be any legal RSX11 filespec, and may have *-file names. If aF * is used, the version defaults to * automatically. For example,  X.MAC, TEST.*, *.PLI.2 STRING> May be| any string with the following restrictions:2 1) Embedded blanks and tabs will be ignored.C 2) The characters ',', '=', '[', ']', '/', ':' and ';' cannot@ be used in the string since they are treated as treated: as special characters by the command string interpreter. 2 WILDCARDS WILDCARDSF a) Any character '&' (ampersand) in the search will match exactly 9 1 character in the files regardless of what it is.@ b) Any character '\' (backslash) will match any ofz the above' characters in (2) but no others.6 c) Any character '_" will match exactly one space.2 /COJ The switch /CO:NNN will list the match line and NNN (decimal) lines afterI it in the source. Lines whose first character is form feed will however H terminate the /CO:NNN print scan. Default lists only the matching line.2 SOURCE_FILES? GREP is maintianed on the RSX system on [344,43] and on VMS on [SYSUTL.FILETOOLS].ww@g1 HELPKHelp on a non-DEC utilit {y can be obtained on a particular topic by typing :' HLP topic subtopic subsubtopic ...4 or HELP @SYSUTL topic subtopic subsubtopic ...'A topic can have the following format :B 1) an alphanumeric string (e.g. a command name, option, etc...); 2) same preceded by a "/" (=interpreted as a qualifier) 3) the match-all symbol "*"> 4) any of the above followed by "..." (on first topic only) Examples: HLP ASSIGN PARAMETERS HLP SET TERMINAL /LOWERCASE HLP SHOW..|.4Abbreviations result in all matches being displayed.(HLP must be defined as a global symbol 4 HLP:==HELP/LIBRARY=SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]SYSUTL.HLBwwu"g1 ICEKICE is a command line editor for the VAX family of computers running theKVMS operating system. It aids the interactive user in entering DCL4commands to the operating system. With ICE you can:< o Recall up to 22 previously issued DCL command lines+ o Edit any recalled DCL command lin}eD o Keep previously issued DCL commands from session to session>ICE will work on any compatible VT52 or VT100 series terminal. 2 Commands2The following commands are used in ICE for either: o DCL Command Retrieval4 o Command Editing (of retrieved DCL commands) o On-Line Help o STOPing ICE Command Function ------- --------+ [COMMAND RETRIEVAL]E - retrieve last DCL co~mmand or return to prompt< CTRL/A - retrieve next DCL command (forwards)= CTRL/B - retrieve next DCL command (backwards)6 CTRL/E - display all saved DCL commands) [COMMAND EDITING]/ - move cursor to the left0 CTRL/F - move cursor to the right: - delete character to left of cursor4 CTRL/D - delete character over cursor5 - delete word to left of cursor6 CTRL/W - delete word to right of cursor9 CTRL/G - delete from cursor to end of line6 CTRL/U - delete entire DCL command line9 CTRL/R - re-write current DCL command line' [MISCELLANEOUS]. ? - display this HELP text7 STOP - EXIT from ICE and return to DCL 2 ExampleKThe example session below illustrates the type of thing you can do usingICE:C Command Line Comment User ActionC ------------ ------- -----------D$ Type DRA1:[JONES]login.cm (User wants to type Press RETURN' a file)C%TYPE-W-OPENIN, file not found (User gets an error) Press C to retrieveD the command.C$ Type DRA1:[JONES]login.cm (Command is recalled) Command canG now be edited..F Press toF$ Type DRA1:[JONES]login.c (The "m" was deleted) delete the badB character.H$ Type DRA1:[JONES]login.com (Correct characters Now add the "om"F are now added) characters andF press H$ (The contents of login.com to re-submit theG are now typed.... command to DCL.D$ (User wants to see Press CTRL/E3 the saved commands)(screen cleared)#Saved DCL commands (currently at >)G> Type DRA1:[JONES]login.com (Saved commands are displayed. The ">"I directory/full shows the CURRENT command position on theG systat "STACK", i.e. that command that will be< recalled with the key.G The user can move up and down the stack8 with CTRL/A or CTRL/B toK select other previously issued DCL commands= for editing or re-submittal. AThe above was a SIMPLE example of an ICE recall and edit session.HNote that there are SEVERAL powerful editing commands that allow you to:E o MOVE the CURSOR to any position on the recalled command line (in either direction)F o DELETE CHARACTERS and WORDS in either the FORWARD or BACKWARD direction> o DELETE from the cursor to the END of the command LINE' o DELETE the ENTIRE command LINEI o RE-TYPE a command line if it becomes garbled (due to line noise, etc.)HThe character "?" (followed by ) at command level will display amenu of!ICE commands for quick reference.:*** An ICE users guide can be found in USR:ICEUSER.GDE ***;*** ICE release notes can be found in USR:ICEBEWARE.BWR ***ww.g 1 JNLBACKUPD JNLBACKUP is a VAX command procedure which is used to automaticallyEback up your files to tape and to keep a journal and log of the filesHbacked up and the tapes used for the backup. Complete documentation on Dhow to use JNLBACKUP is found in FE-2521 (see the Fusion Experiments<se cretary for a copy). To use JNLBACKUP type CMD JNLBACKUP.GJNLBACKUP can be used to backup any or all files in your directory(ies)Fwhich have been created since a certain date. The backup accuracy is @automatically verified. The backed up files are stored in a VMSDBACKUP container file which is automatically given a unique save-set@name. Multiple backups may be done to a given backup tape. TheCvarious times JNLBACKUP is used is logged to a file (JNLBACKUP.LOG)Ashowing the tape name and number, the dates, directories and the @files selected for backing up. This log file together with the ?journal file (JNLBACKUP.BJL) containing a list of all backed upAfiles, can be used to recover one or more files from the specificbackup set required.CFor more help using JNLBACKUP, get a copy of FE-2521, "JNLBACKUP --AFile Backup Procedure" from the Secretary for Fusion Experiments.ww~g1 NIPINIP (Network Information Program) displays the status of the DECnet PhaseKIII network. It is a logical replacement for the SHOW NETWORK DCL command,Jbut it displays more information. On screen terminals, it can be run in acontinuous update mode.INIP runs as a foreign command; to use it, you must define a global symbolvia the following command: NIP :== $NIPFormat NIP [nodespec]NNIP is a freebe from the DECnet group and is found on [DECUS.SPRING81.DECNET]. 2 ParametersnodespecJ Specifies a node name, node address, or line name about which information is to be displayed. Examples:, NIP * ! Displays all known nodes and lines2 NIP STAR ! Displays information about node STAR::6 NIP 168 ! Displays information about node number 168: NIP XMB0: ! Displays information about line XMB0: (DMC-1)J If the nodespec parameter is specified, NIP will write the information toE SYS$OUTPUT and exit. However, if the nodespec parameter is omitted,H SYS$OUTPUT is a screen terminal, and the terminal screen is at least 51H columns wide by 14 lines long, NIP operates in continuous display mode.1 Type HELP NIP DISPLAY_MODE for more information.2 Display_modeCNIP operates in continuous display mode on screen terminals when no@parameter is present. The initial update interval is 5 seconds.8The following single keystroke "commands" are available:1 1 through 9 Change display interval to n seconds0 B (or b) Ring the bell if something has changed5 C (or c) Clear the screen and re-display everything,2 remove unreachable nodes from the display, and reset bell dinging E (or e) Exit NIP CTRL/Z Exit NIPEAs new nodes become reachable they will enter the display. If a nodeAbecomes unreachable, it remains on the display with *Unreachable*Edisplayed beside it. If it becomes reachable again, its new link andBrouting information will return to the display. The C (for clear)B"command" may be used to purge unreachable nodes from the display.FOn VT100s, changed information is displayed in reverse video until thenext display cycle.wwg1 NOTICEJNOTICEL and NOTICE together make us a system for issuing system notices toFusers. System notices are created as one or more versions of the fileHSYS$MAIL:SYSMSG.TXT. NOTICEL, which is run in SYSLOGIN.COM and displaysIonly those notices which have been created since the user last logged in.MThis eliminates the nuisance factor of always seeing all outstanding notices.MThe date and time of notice creation is also displayed.  A file is maintainedLwhich contains the date/time of last login for each UIC. The NOTICE programEallows users to review outstanding notices. NOTICE displays the mostIrecent notice file version and prompts the user "More?". Each affirmative>reply displays the next earlier version of the notice files. 2 BUILD9NOTICE and NOTICEL were taken from [DECUS.VAXS80.SYSMGR].1 To use NOTICE and NOTICEL, simply assemble them: $MACRO NOTICEL $MACRO NOTICE $LINK NOTICEL $LINK NOTICE Written by: Gary L. Grebus Computer Center Battelle Columbus Labs 505 King Ave. Columbus, Ohio 43201ww`#g1 PAGEA PAGE is a foreign command which will erase the screen of a VT100K or a Tektronix graphics terminal if the terminal is properly known to the system.ww*g 1 PHONEBOOK; PhoneBook is a VMS procedure which will allow the user to @maintain and use a list phone numbers and addresses which can be@recalled on comman d. PhoneBook can either be used interactivelyGor it can be used as a VMS foreign command. To invoke it interactively:either type CMD PHONEBOOK or define the foreign commands4 PLIST:=="@SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSMGR.CMDFIL]PLIST NUMBER "7 ALIST:=="@SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSMGR.CMDFIL]PLIST ADDRESS " .GIf the foreign commands PLIST and ALIST are defined (for Phone_List and2Address_List) the following commands are available> PLIST Enter interactive mode with PhoneBook.> PLIST search_string Display all phone numbers belonging to? entries with the specified name_string.? ALIST search_string Display all phone numbers and addresses? belonging to entries with the specified$ name_string.2 ALIST4 If the symbol ALIST is defined as a foreign command the command  ALIST search_stringCwill produce the output (if the search string is found) of the form- Last_name ,First_name Phone # Extension Company Address City, State, Zip Comment,For example, ALIST DOWNWARD might display* Downward , James (313)-769-8500x362 KMS Fusion, Inc. 3941 Research Park Dr. Ann Arbor, Mi 48106 Resident DEC guru. 2 DATA_FILE= The data for PhoneBook is kept in SYS$LOGIN:PLIST.FIL. ThisGfile may be edited, BUT the locations of the various starting positionsFwithin each record MUST NOT BE CHANGED. If you edit the file, you do so at your own risk.2 PLIST4 If the symbol PLIST is defined as a foreign command the command  PLIST search_stringCwill produce the output (if the search string is found) of the form8 Last_name ,First_name Phone # Extension CommentCFor example, the command PLIST DOWNWARD might produce the output@ Downward ,James (313)-769-8500x 362 Resident DEC guru.FNote that the search string could also have been DEC or James and this8record (with possibly others would have been displayed).2 INTERACTIVE_USE= In its interactive mode, PhoneBook gives the user the optionto:' 1. Add new phone numbers to the list.; 2. Display phone numbers/addresses for a given last name.! 3. Delete phone number entries. 4. Exit.3 ADD2 When you enter ADD mode PhoneBook prompts for thefollowing information. Last name 15 characters max First name 10 characters max/ Phone number (xxx)-nnn-mmmm 14 characters max% Extension (xxxx) 4 charact ers max" Company name 20 characters max Address 30 characters max City 15 characters max State 2 characters max ZIP 5 characters max Comment 40 characters max@PhoneBook will reprompt if the length of th entered data exceeds=the maximum allowed for the entry. If a RETURN is entered in=response to the last name entry request, PhoneBook returns toBthe menu page. when an entry is completed, PhoneBook will display?the entry in its entirity and ask if it is c orrect. If a Y[es]<is answered, it will be entered in to the data file. A N[o].returns you to the 'Last Name:' input prompt. 3 DELETE8In delete mode, you are prompted for the last name of an<entry to delete. Each entry which matches the entered string7will be displayed together with a prompt asking if that:entry should be deleted. If a Y[es] is answered the entry:will be deleted. A ^Y during the delete process will wipe<out all deletions made. All deletions become permanent if a:RETU RN is entered in response to the 'Last Name:' prompt. 3 DISPLAYAIn display mode, the you enter a last name to display and choose ?whether or not to also display the addresses. The name string Aentered can be just the desired last name, part of the last name,>a unique search string (ie a company name) or some combination?of search strings each seperated by a "," from the other search strings. 3 EXITBIf numbers have been added to the phone book, PhoneBook will sort Dthe phone book list upon exiting. This takes a while, be patient. 5otherwise it will just close any open files and exit.2 SEARCH_STRINGS? When used to display phone numbers or addresses, PhoneBook>either accepts a search string as part of the command line or Bprompts for a last name. At this point, either a simple last name=(or part of one) or a complex search string may be entered. A>complex search string consists of multiple search strings (no Cspaces) seperated by ","s. For example if you know your phone bookBcontains entries for several people named Smith and that the SMITH=of interest works for KMS you might enter SMITH,KMS as the>search string. Only the data for the entry with the last nameASmith, and with the company KMS would be found. Likewise to listBall people working for the same company (you for got the person's 3name), enter the company name as the search string.ww`U1 PLOT10;PLOT10 is a set of FORTRAN CALLable subroutines designed to:cr `zܙ1 PLOT10;PLOT10 is a set of FORTRAN CALLable subroutines designed toa:create graphs on the TEKTRONIX series 4000 terminals. The:package is divided into three major sections. The sections9are ADVANCED GRAPHICS (AG), TERMINAL CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)Mand CHARACTER GENERATION (CG).2 Advanced_Graphics_Subroutines 93 PRIMER(PLOT10) - (1.1) Creating a Basic Graph.aATo create a graph initially, it is first necessary to prepare the >data which is to be plotted. Two data l ists will be necessary?one for the horizontal (X) values, and one for the vertical (Y)e?values. In the long data form used here, the list will includee>in the first position the number of data values to be plotted.-Subsequent positions contain the data values. C C EXAMPLE PROGRAMC C DIMENSION XDATA(7) ! X data array C DIMENSION YDATA(7) ! Y data array D DATA XDATA/6.,1.,2.,3.,4.,5.,6./ ! X data values D DATA YDATA/6.,211.,114.,306.,354.,291.,325./ ! Y data valuesC ? CALL INITT(960) ! Initialize TCS system > CALL BINITT ! Initialize AG system@ CALL CHECK(XDATA,YDATA) ! Auto-scale data values@ CALL DSPLAY(XDATA,YDATA) ! Display data on screen> CALL FINITT(0,700) ! Terminate task image ENDf:To generate a task image to demonstrate the above example,8type the following lines after you have created the fileBnamed EXAMPLE.FOR with your favorite editor. Remember, to compileyou programs /NOI4!! $ FORTRAN/NOI4 EXAMPLEI' $ LINK EXAMPLE,SYS$LIBRARY:PLOT125/LIBG $ RUN EXAMPLEH3 BINITT - (2.3.1) Advanced Graphing II Initialization CRoutine sets the initial values of the Advanced Graphing II COMMON.  Calling Sequence:h i CALL BINITT33 CHECK - (2.3.2) Table Checking sBRoutine assures that values have been specified for all necessary words in COMMON. aCalling Sequence: X CALL CHECK (XARRAY,YARRAY)  Parameters Entered:A i/ XARRAY is the data to be used for the X axis.n/ YARRAY is the data to be used for the Y axis.  eCRoutine does not display the graph, but only prepares all internal bCvalues necessary for display. If BINITT has not been called beforee:the user calls CHECK, CHECK will call it. This is not theErecommended calling sequence. An error message will result if BINITTKFhas not been called, and any modifying calls made before CHECK will be cancelled.13 DSPLAY - (2.3.3) Graph Displaye*Displays the complete graph on the screen.Calling Sequence: X CALL DSPLAY (XARRAY,YARRAY) hParameters Entered:  - XARRAY is the array of data for the X axis.i- YARRAY is the array of data for the Y axis.t SCSubroutines INITT, BINITT and CHEDK must be called prior to DSPLAY. 33 CPLOT - (2.3.4) Curve Plotting nARoutine plots a curve using data window location values currently Fin COMMON. It does not draw a grid or labels, or alter scale factors. aCalling Sequence: X CALL CPLOT (XARRAY,YARRAY)r .Parameters Entered:a o$ XARRAY is the name of the X array.$ YARRAY is the name of the Y array. oIRoutine is called by subroutine DSPLAY. For multiple curves on the same LEgraph, the user should call DSPLAY for the first curve and CPLOT for lall additional curves.13 DINITX - (2.5) Mutliple Curvesl@Reinitializes the label values of the X axis in the AG-II Table,Ballowing the drawing of an additional curve with new label values. hCalling Sequence:i z CALL DINITXAAll values labeling the X axis are reinitialized to zero, so thatiDnew values can be computed for the display of an additional display.13 DINITY - (2.5) Multiple Curvesl@Reinitializes the label values of the Y axis in the AG-II Table,Ballowing the drawing of an additional curve with new label values. Calling Sequence:i l CALL DINITY tAAll values labeling the Y axis are reinitialized to zero, so thatiDnew values can be computed for the display of an additional display.-3 HBARST, VBARST - (2.8) Bar Charts.AABar charts may be specified by using one of two routines - HBARSTn1for horizontal bars or VBARST for vertical bars.  Calling Sequences: ! CALL HBARST (ISHADE,IWBAR,IDBAR)  ord ! CALL VBARST (ISHADE,IWBAR,IDBAR)f eParameters Entered:i iH I SHADE is the integer value of the type of shading to fill in the bar.E IWBAR is the width of the bar in raster units. Width must be < 1,; but 0 will result in a default of 40 raster units.rC IDBAR is the distance between the shading lines in raster units.eD Distance must be < 2; however if a 0 is entered, a default . width of 20 raster units will result.43 FRAME - (2.13.1) Window Framing -This routine draws a frame around the window.O ECalling Sequence:n CALL FRAMEo93 HLABEL, HSTRIN, NOTATE - (2.13.2) Horizontal Labeling e@Routines HLABEL and HSTRIN print the label string on the screen.*Subroutine NOTATE moves the cursor itself.Calling Sequence: L CALL HLABEL (LENGTH,ISTRIN) Parameters Entered: T5 LENGTH is the length of the label character string.iD ISTRIN is the label character string in ASCII decimal equivalents.Calling Sequence:I i CALL HSTRIN (ISTRIN)rParameters Entered:v nA ISTRIN  is the array of characters in ASCII decimal equivalents.eA The first element in ISTRIN is the number of characters $ in the alphanumeric string. Calling Sequence:d " CALL NOTATE (IX,IY,LENCHR,ISTRIN) iParameters Entered:r J IX,IY designate the beginning point of the label in screen coordinates.C LENCHR is the length of the character string for the given label.1? ISTRIN is the string of characters in integers from 0 to 127.t@NOTATE checks for special characters, moves to correct location,*and displays the string by calling HLABEL.73 VLABEL, VSTRIN - (2.13.3) Vertical Labeling =These routines print a label string on the screen vertically.a eCalling Sequence: N CALL VLABEL (LENGTH,ISTRIN)Parameters Entered: T5 LENGTH is the length of the label character string..< ISTRIN is the label character string in ASCII equivalents.Calling Sequence:I i CALL VSTRIN (ISTRIN)nParameters Entered:  bD ISTRIN is the array including in the first position the number of E characters in the label (the length of the array minus one),nA followed by the characters in ASCII decimal equivalents.h93 JUSTER - (2.13.4) Label Justification h@This subroutine right, left, or center justifies labels or other&strings of characters to be displayed. LCalling Sequence:a3 CALL JUSTER (LENGTH,ISTRING,KEY,IFILL,LEN,IOFFSET)f eParameters Entered:cH LENGTH is the length of the character string, including fill  characters.aB ISTRING is the array of characters in ASCII equivalents.G KEY POSITION is an integer that designates if the string is to be nH right, left, or center justified. Values entered are:( + right justified) 0 center justified ' - left justifiedl? IFILL CHARACTER is the chatacter in ASCII code used as fillereEJUSTER deletes fill ch aracters occurring at the start of the ISTRING.aParameters Returned:C LEN is an output parameter giving the length of the < character string without fill characters.I IOFFSET is the distance in raster units between the reference fJ point from which the string is to be justified and the B actual starting point for the justified string.73 LINE - (3.1.1) Specifies Line Type HSpecifies the type of line to be drawn between data points on the graph.Calling Sequence:  CALL LINE (IVALUE) Parameters Entered:eC IVALUE is the coded integer value for the appropriate line style.yC3 SYMBL - (3.1.2) Data Point or Bar Chart SymbolsoDDesignates the symbols at data points, or the shading lines for bar charts.tCalling Sequence:  CALL SYMBL (IVALUE)Parameters Entered:eB IVALUE is the value representing the symbols or shading desired.AFor a scatter plot without a line through the data point, perform  CALL LINE (0) CALL SYMBL (IVALUE)53 STEPS - (3.1.3) Symbol Incrementsn4Designates the increment between data point symbols.Calling Sequence:  CALL STEPS (IVALUE)Parameters Entered: H IVALUE is an integer value which designates the frequency of the data  point symbols. L3 INFIN - (3.1.4) Machine Infinity CSets the value of the large floating point value accpetable to the Vhardware being used.Calling Sequence:s l CALL INFIN (VALUE)aParameters Entered:S3 VALUE is a large floating point value acceptable. M3 NPTS - (3.1.5) Number of Data Points dESets the number of data points to be plotted for a nonstandard array.tCalling Sequence:s CALL NPTS (IVALUE)iParameters Entered:a iHIVALUE is the integer value specifying the number of data points to be  plotted.F3 STEPL  - (3.1.6) Increment between Lines and PointsIEstablishes the increment between data points which will be connected by alines.Calling Sequence:i g CALL STEPL (IVALUE)Parameters Entered:sC IVALUE integer specifying the frequency of the data points to be b connected.z/3 SIZES - (3.1.8) Symbol SizepESets the size of the data point symbol if a symbol has been specifiedVwith subroutine SYMBL.Calling Sequence:t CALL SIZES (VALUE)fParameters Entered:zD VALUE is the real multiplicative factor specifying the size of theD data point symbols, or the distance in raster units between bar chart shading lines.:3 SIZEL - (3.1.9) Data Line Size (Width)DSpecifies the size of the line if a curve plot is being used, or the<distance between shading lines if bar charts are being used.Calling Sequence:a CALL SIZEL (VALUE) Parameters Entered:tE VALUE is a real value designating the width in raster units of the M bars. 23 XNEAT, YNEAT - (3.2.1) Neat Tic MarksDFull Word real variables containing the value "0" or "1" indicating Bwhether "NEAT" tic marks are desired. Sets the values of the neat tic mark variables in COMMON.LCalling Sequence:a  CALL XNEAT (IVALUE) CALL YNEAT (IVALUE)Parameters Entered:f@ IVALUE is an integer power desired for the neat tic mark flag.43 XZERO, YZERO - (3.2.2) Zero SuppressionDSet the 0 suppression flag for the X and Y tic mark values in AG-II COMMON.RCalling Sequence:e E CALL XZERO (IVALUE)  CALL YZERO (IVALUE)Parameters Entered:s C IVALUE is the integer value wished for the zero suppression flag.o13 XLOC, YLOC - (3.2.3) Axis LocationnKSet the locations of the X and Y axis, complete with labels and tic marks, =in relation to the left and lower edges of the screen window.(Calling Sequence:s CALL XLOC (IVALUE)i h CALL YLOC (IVALUE)aParameters Entered:lG IVALUE is the integer number of raster units the axes will be offset eF from the lower edge of the data window or from the left edge  of the data window.:3 XLOCTP, YLOCTP - (3.2.3) X and Y axis LocationsESets the locations of the X and Y axis, complete with labels and tic Lmarks.Calling Sequence:e CALL XLOCTP (IVALUE)i CALL YLOCTP (IVALUE)aParameters Entered:lG IVALUE is the integer number of raster units and axes will be offset B0  from the right edge of the data window.83 XLAB, YLAB - (3.2.4) Tic Mark Label Types;Set the X or Y axis tic mark label types in AG-II COMMON. (Calling Sequences: t CALL XLAB (IVALUE)  CALL YLAB (IVALUE)lParameters Entered:bF IVALUE is an arbitrary integer value which refers to a label type as& described in the table below.43 XDEN, YDEN - (3.2.5) Tic Mark Density6Set the values of the density factors in AG-II COMMON.Calling Sequence:E CALL XDEN (IVALUE)i CALL YDEN (IVALUE)tParameters Entered:  dB IVALUE is the integer value of the density factor to be used in 0 determining the frequency of tic marks.<3 XTICS, YTICS - (3.2.6) Major Tic Mark IntervalsHSets the values of the number of tic mark intervals on the X and Y axes.Calling Sequence:E CALL XTICS (IVALUE) CALL YTICS (IVALUE)Parameters Entered:eD XDMIN or is a real value at which the data minimum for the X or Y 9 YDMIN axis, respectively, to be set in AG-II COMMON.tK XDMAX or is the real value at which the data maximum for the X or Y axis,M6 YDMAX respectively, is to be set in AG-II COMMON.43 SLIMX, SLIMY - (3.2.12) Screen LocationISets the screen minimum and maximum for the X and Y axis in AG-II COMMON.LCalling Sequence: CALL SLIMX (ISMIN, ISMAX) CALL SLIMY (ISMIN, ISMAX)Parameters Entered:iJ ISMIN is the integer minimum screen location in raster units (the value +  to be entered in CXSMIN or CYSMIN). H ISMAX is the integer screen location in raster units (the value to be % entered in CXSMAX or CYSMAX).e43 PLACE - (3.2.12) Screen LocationFSets the values of the screen minimums and maximums in COMMON to place?the screen window at a predefined location on the display area.rCalling Sequence:l CALL PLACE (LIT)eParameters Entered:t wD LIT is a literal string of three characters specifying the window  location desired.TA3 XTYPE, YTYPE - (3.2.13) Data and Transformation Type FIndicates the types of data that are in the X and Y arrays or the typeof transformation to be used.ICalling Sequence:E CALL XTYPE (IVALUE) CALL YTYPE (IVALUE)Parameters Entered: G IVALUE is a coded integer value defining the type of data or the type & of transformation to be used.93 XWDTH, YWDTH - (3.2.15) Tic Mark Label WidthoJSpecifies the maximum label width usable for tic mark labels on the X and Y axes.ICalling Sequence:E CALL XWDTH (IVALUE) CALL YWDTH (IVALUE)Parameters Entered:tH IVALUE is the maximum number of characters allowable for the tic mark  labels.93 XETYP, YETYP - (3.2.19) Remote Exponent Type JSpecifies the type of remote exponent label to be used on the appropriate axis.ICalling Sequence:E CALL XETYP (IVALUE) CALL YETYP (IVALUE)Parameters Entered: F IVALUE is the integer code value which specifies the form of remote  exponent to be used.e73 MNMX - (4.1.1) Setting Data Limits9Determins the minimum and maximum values of a data array.a eCalling Sequence:R CALL MNMX (ARRAY,AMIN,AMAX)Parameters Entered: F ARRAY is the data array for which the minimum and maximum are to be  found.Parameters Returned: r" AMIN is the minimum array value." AMAX is the maximum array value.GMNMX is used internally to determine data limits, and may be useful in nGsetting the minimum and maximum values for multiple overlapping curves. JIt is first necessary to set AMIN to an extremely large value and AMAM to Ian extreme negative value. MNMX must be called once for each data array.lHEach time, AMIN is set to be the smaller of the new and the old values, Eand AMAX to be the larger of the new and old values. After MNMX has eIchecked each data curve DLIMX or DLIMY must be called with the new AMIN, (AMAX values to set the limits in COMMON.73 SAVCOM - (4.1.2) COMMON Table Savingu.Saves the COMMON table as it currently exists.Calling Sequence:s e CALL SAVCOM (ARRAY)Parameters Entered:MF ARRAY is the name assigned to the array of values from COMMON. This* array should be dimensioned to 80.HSAVCOM allows COMMON table to be saved, so that additional curves may beplotted using the same graph.s43 RESCOM - (4.1.3) COMMON Restoring8Restores COMMON values which have previously been saved.Calling Sequence:s CALL RESCOM (ARRY)lParameters Enetered: C ARRAY is the array of COMMON values previously saved with SAVCOM.s/ This array should be dimensioned to 80.iHRESCOM restores COMMON to the values saved with SAVCOM. This eliminatesGthe steps involved in checking the table each time a new graph is to beg displayed.23 BSYMS - (4.1.4) Symbol Drawing1This draws symbols for data points when required.e ECalling Sequence:a CALL BSYMS (X,Y,ISYM) eParameters Entered:aC X, Y are virtual coordinates for the data point at which a symbol  is to be drawn. h' ISYM is the value of the symbol type.  CBSYMS obtains the data point location and the symbol type and drawsu the symbol.s13 SYMOUT - (4.1.4) Symbol Outputa7Produces standard symbols at the current beam location.eCalling Sequence:  CALL SYMOUT (ISYM,FACTOR)Parameters Entered:h) ISYM is the value of the symbol type.e@ FACTOR is the scaling factor of the symbol type (exclusive of . hardware generated ASCII characters)./3 BAR - (4.1.4) Bar DrawingDraws the bars for a bar chart.sCalling Sequence:  CALL BAR (X,Y,LINE)Parameters Entered: B X,Y are the screen coordinated to which the bar is to be drawn.9 LINE is the direction is which the line is to be drawn.23 0 draws a bar similar to the last one drawn.= 2 draws vertical bars and accesses COMMON for shading.g? 3 draws horizontal bars and accesses COMMON for shading.hFBAR obtains all the information necessary for drawing and shading the bars for a bar chart.s53 FILBOX - (4.1.5) Bar Chart ShadingC"Shades in the bars of a bar chart.Calling Sequence:e/ CALL FILBOX (MINX,MINY,MAXX,MAXY,ISYMB,LSPACE)uParmaeters Entered: 1 MINX is the X axis screen minimum of the bar. 1 MINY is the Y axis screen minimum of the bar. 1 MAXX is the X axis screen maximum of the bar.B1 MAXY is the Y axis screen maximum of the bar. 6 ISYMB is the integer symbol code from 0 through 15.6 It indicates the type of line shading to fill the box.; LSPACE is the distance in raster units between the lines a shading the bar.w?FILBOX fills each bar of the chart with the specified grid workb for shading.53 LABEL - (4.1.6) Tic Mark Labelinge*Displays the tic mark labels on the graph.Calling Sequence:t CALL LABEL (NBASE)xParameters Entered:t? NBASE is the axis pointer, or Y axis, whichever is indicated.hGLABEL obtains the appropriate axis values from COMMON for the number of,Etic marks, tic mark length and form, data minimum and maximum, screenoBminimum and maximum, type and width of labels, and remote exponentH(if any), frequency of labels and whether staggered. It then calculatesHthe labels, converts then to alphanumerics, justifies and displays them.03 GRID  - (4.1.7) Grid Drawing0Draws the axis lines, tic marks, and grid lines.Calling Sequence:, CALL GRIDEGRID obtains the screen minimums and maximums, the axis location and hCtic mark form and number. It then draws the axis lines and the ticdmark and grid lines.23 SETWIN - (4.1.8) Window SettingATransfers the window location from virtual to screen coordinates.aCalling Sequence:f CALL SETWINDSETWIN is a transformal routine which transfers the window size and @location from virtual space to screen space. DSPLY calls SETWINbefore drawing the graph.a/3 WIDTH - (4.1.9) Label WidthlECalculates and stores in COMMON the width of the longest label on the given axis.tCalling Sequence:t CALL WIDTH (NBASE) Parameters Entered:hH NBASE is the axis pointer, or the location in COMMON of the first itemB referring to the X or Y axis, whichever is here indicated.HThis routine checks the data minimum and maximum for the given axis, theGposition of the least significant digit, and the type of the label; it nIthen calculates the number of characters necessary for the longest label dIon the axis. The number of characters computed is then stored in COMMON 1variable CXWDTH or CYWDTH.53 OPTIM - (4.1.10) Optimum Tic MarkaJUses the data from COMMON and produces results necessary for appropriatelyspaced and labeled tic marks.tCalling Sequence:t CALL OPTIM (NBASE)lParameters Entered:eG NBASE is the axis pointer to the location of the first item in COMMON / which refers to the X or to the Y axis.e53 NUMSET - (4.2.1) Subroutine NUMSETnGChanges floating point numbers into character string which can later be displayed as tic mark labels.RCalling Sequence:e0 CALL NUMSET (FNUMBER,IWIDTH,NBASE,IARRAY,IFILL)Parameters Entered:7 FNUMBER is the floating point number to be converted.f@ IWIDTH is the length of the resulting string, including fill  characters. C NBASE is the axis pointer, i.e., the location in COMMON of the i@ first item referring to the X or Y axis, whichever is  indicated.F IFILL is the character to be used as filler in any extra spaces toI the left of the of the array (all numbers are right justified).rParameters Returned:@ IARRAY is the string of characters returned in ASCII decimal  equivalents.43 EFORM - (4.2.2) Subroutine EFORM;Converts a real value into an exponential character string.ICalling Sequence:e2 CALL EFORM (FNUMBER,IWIDTH,IDECIMAL,IARRAY,IFILL)Parameters Entered:8 FNUMBER is the floating point number to be converted.A IWIDTH is the length of the resulting string, including fill t characters.? IDECIMAL is the number of digits to follow the decimal point.rG IFILL is the character to be used as filler in any extra spaces tooE the left of the array. N ormally a fill character of blank  is used.eParameters Returned:A IARRAY is the string to chatacters returned in ASCII decimal t equivalents.iHEFORM utilizes subroutine ESPLIT to divide the real number into multipleDand exponent, based on the width designated and the number of digitsEfollowing the decimal point. The multiplier is then converted into acIcharacter string and IFORM converts the exponent into a character string.s43 FFORM - (4.2.3) Subroutine FFORMCConverts a real value into a character string which provides eithereCa floating point number or a number with a decimal point, dependingn,on which form will best fit the given width.Calling Sequence:e2 CALL FFORM (FNUMBER,IWIDTH,IDECIMAL,IARRAY,IFILL)Parameters Entered:8 FNUMBER is the floating point number to be converted.A IWIDTH is the length of the resulting string, including fill t characters.? IDECIMAL is the number of digits to follow the decimal point.rG IFILL is the character to be used as filler in any extra spaces to= the left of the qrray. Normally IFILL is a blank.eParameters Returned:A IARRAY is the string of characters returned in ASCII decimal w equivalents.oHIf the number will fit the given width, it is converted into a characterFstring with a decimal. If it will not fit the given width, control istransfered to EFORM.43 IFORM - (4.2.4) Subroutine IFORMHConverts a floating point number to a character string without a decimalpoint.Calling Sequence:n) CALL IFORM (FNUMBER,IWIDTH,IARRAY,IFILL)bParmatertes Entered:7 FNUMBER is the floating point number to be converted.f@ IWIDTH is the length of the resulting string, including fill  characters.aF IFILL is the character to be used as filler in any extra spaces toG the left of the array. Normally a FILL character is a blank.rParameters Returned:@ IARRAY is the string of characters returned in ASCII decimal  equivalents.HIf the integer is negative, a sign is placed in the position immediatelypreceding the number.r53 EXPOUT - (4.2.5) Subroutine EXPOUTaFConstructs remote scale factors in various set forms or the labels forlogarithmic tic marks.Calling Sequence:s- CALL EXPOUT (NBASE,IEXP,IARRAY,LENGTH,IFILL)aParameters Entered:iD NBASE is the axis key or the location of COMMON of the first itemC  referring to the X or Y axis, whichever is here indicated. F IEXP is the integer value that defines to what power 10 is raised.C This is necessary for either scale factors or logarithmic  tic marks.f, LENGTH is the integer length of the array.G IFILL defines the character used to fill in the blanks. ASCII valuee1 32 representing a blank is usually used.lParameters Returned:F IARRAY is the array in which the label is returned in ASCII decimal  equivalents.nJEXPOUT takes the integer supplied to it and translates it into a characterFstring which can be justified. The results are one character per wordin a right justified array.<3 IUBGC - (4.3.1) Conversion to UBGC ValueGUsed for converting the year and day into a Universal Business GraphingRCalander value. aCalling Sequence: CALL IUBGC (IYEAR,IDAYS,IUBGCX)Parameters Entered:eE IYEAR a four digit integer value year representing the year to be r converted.fF IDAYS a three digit integer value representing the day of the year.Parameters Returned:E IUBGCX an integer value returned by the subroutine representing theG4 Universal Business Graphing Calander value.>3 OUBGC - (4.3.2) Conversion from UBGC ValueJUsed to convert from the Universal Business Graphing Calendar date to the appropriate year and day.aCalling Sequence: CALL OUBGC (IYEAR,IDAYS,IUBGCX)Parameters Entered: E IUBGCX represents the integer Universal Business Graphing Calendar e value.tParameters Returned:H IYEAR is an integer variable, containing the year in which the entery  date lies.@ IDAYS is an integer variable representing the day of the year.73 YDYMD - (4.3.3) Year Day Conversion,IConverts dates from year, day format (YYYYDDD) to year, month, day formatS (YYYYMMDD).,Calling Sequence:E+ CALL YDYMD (IYEAR,IDAYS,IYEAR2,MONTH,IDAY)IParameters Entered:  IYEAR is a four digit year.0 IDAYS is a three digit day of the year value.Parameters Required: IYEAR2 is the year.f" MONTH is the month of the year.! IDAY is the day of the month.eIIf IDAYS is outside the domain of 1 to 366, IYEAR will differ from IYEAR.=3 YMDYD - (4.3.4) Year Month Day Conversion EConverts dates from the year, month, day format (YYYYMMDD) to a year,Iday format (YYYYDDD).DCalling Sequence:t* CALL YMDYD (IYEAR2,MONTH,IDY,IYEAR,IDAYS)Parameters Entered:i. IYEAR2 is a four digit year to be converted., MONTH is the month passed to the routine.! IDAY is the day of the month. Parameters Returned: IYEAR is the year.h IDAYS is the day of the year.IIf MONTH is outside the domain of 1 to 12, IYEAR2 will differ from IYEAR.;3 COMSET - (4.4.2) General COMMON Setting gGSets the value of any item in COMMON. Its two arguments designate the eElocation of the item in COMMON to be changed and the new value to be assigned.eCalling Sequence:  CALL COMSET (ITEM,VALUE)MParameters Entered:d= ITEM is the number of word in COMMON to be set or changed. - VALUE is the real value to be stored there.:3 COMGET - (4.4.3) COMMON Access Function?Provides the user with the value assigned to an item in COMMON.Calling Sequence:b COMGET (ITEM)Parameters Entered:oF ITEM is the number of the word COMMON for which we want to know the value.cIIn this function VALUE=COMGET(ITEM). It is necessary to include a WRITE (statement to obtain a value with COMGET.B3 IBASEC - (4.4.4) General COMMON Section PointerIUsed to find the location of any item in COMMON pertaining to the type of'line and data point symbols to be used.dCalling Sequence:i IBASEC (IWORD)gParameters Entered:eE IWORD is the integer used to designate the item in this section of C COMMON.nA3 IBASEX - (4.4.5) X Axis COMMON Section PointerhGUsed to find the location of a particular item in COMMON which pertainsato the X axis.Calling Sequence:i IBASEX (IWORD)gParameters Entered:aH IWORD is the integer used to designate the item in the X axis section  of COMMON.A3 IBASEY - (4.4.6) Y Axis COMMON Section PointerxAUsed to designate an item in COMMON which pertains to the Y axis.dCalling Sequence:i IBASEY (IWORD)gParameters Entered:aH IWORD is the integer used to designate the item in the Y axis section  of COMMON. 2 TCS_SubroutineszD3 INITT - (2.1) Initialization of Terminal and Terminal Status Area@Initialization of the terminal and the Terminal Status Area must@be accomplished as the first step in the use of Terminal Control6System routines. Initializing INITT accomplishes this.Calling Sequence: CALL INITT (IBAUD)IParameter Entered:: IBAUD - Transmission (baud) rate in characters per secondI3 FINITT - (2.2) Terminates program and outputs contents of buffer aBTerminates a user's program which uses the Terminal Control SystemEand outputs the contents of the buffer. FINITT should be used either <in conjunction with or in place of a FORTRAN STOP statement.Calling Sequence: CALL FINITT (IX,IY)Parameters Entered:aC IX - Screen x-coordinate of the position the beam is moved beforen program termination.a< IY - Screen y-coordinate of the beam termination position.?3 MOVABS - (2.4) Pair of coordinates of point a move is desiredcEArguments is the pair of coordinates of the point a move is desired. uDOutput starts at stored current beam position. Position is updated .after every line draw or other output command.Calling Sequence:  CALL MOVABS (IX,IY)H3 DRWABS - (2.5) Generates vector and updates variables CDRWABS generates a bright vector from the current beam position to Hthe coordinates given and updates the appropriate variables in Terminal Status Area.Calling Sequence:  CALL DRWABS (IX,IY)H3 PNTABS - (2.6) Moves to coordinates in arguments JSimilarly moves to the coordinates given as arguments and displays a pointthere.Calling Sequence:  CALL PNTABS (IX,IY)H3 VWINDO - (3.3) Subroutine to define virtual window IThe Terminal Control System uses one of two subroutines to define virtualDwindow. The first is VWINDO.Calling Sequence:G& CALL VWINDO (XMIN,XRANGE,YMIN,YRANGE)Parameters Entered:o- XMIN - Minimum horizontal user coordinate.t- XRANGE - Horizontal extent of the rectangle.c* YMIN - Minimum vertical user coordinate+ YRANGE - Vertical extent of the rectangle.eH3 DWINDO - (3.4) Second method of defining a virtual window C This subroutine uses a calling sequence similar to that of VWINDO.CCalling Sequence:," CALL DWINDO (XMIN,XMAX,YMIN,YMAX)Parameters Entered:t* XMIN - Minimum horizontal user coordinate l* XMAX - Maximum horizontal user coordinate( YMIN - Minimum vertical user coordinate( YMAX - Maximum vertical user coordinateH3 SWINDO - (3.7.1) Display area of any rectangular area of screen 6Any rectangular portion of the screen can be used as a&display area by using this subroutine.Calling Sequence:," CALL SWINDO (MINX,LENX,MINY,LENY)Parameters Entered:t, MINX - Minimum horizontal screen coordinate* LENX - Horizontal extent of the rectangle* MINY - Minimum vertical screen coordinate( LENY - Vertical extent of the rectangleH3 TWINDO - (3.7.2) Display area of any rectangular area of screen CThis subroutine is used to display area of any rectangular portion i=of the screen. It stands in the same relation as does DWINDO.CCalling Sequence:," CALL TWINDO (MINX,MAXX,MINY,MAXY)Parameters Entered:t, MINX - Minimum horizontal screen coordinate, MAXX - Maximum horizontal screen coordinate* MINY - Minimum vert ical screen coordinate* MAXY - Maximum vertical screen coordinateA3 ANMODE - (4.2) Outputs alphanumeric data other than through TCShEThis subroutine is used when user wishes to output alphanumeric data rFother than through the Terminal Control System. It is then the user's >responsibility to insure that the terminal is in A/N mode. NotInecessary to call ANMODE when using the Terminal Control System routines,aGsince they will automatically call it whenever necessary. ANMODE can beuused to dump the output buffer.CCalling Sequence: CALL ANMODEG3 ANCHO - (4.3) Monitors non-control alphanumeric characters cENon-control alphanumeric characters are monitored when output throughnIANCHO. A/N mode will be entered if necessary and the Terminal Status AreaeGrepresentation of the screen beam position is updated as characters arenoutput.Calling Sequence: a CALL ANCHO (ICHAR)IParameter Entered:H ICHAR - An integer representing a 7-bit ASCII character, right adjusted! Not a control character.sJ3 ANSTR - (4.3.1) Outputs alphanumeric string instead of single characterHThis subroutine functions like ANCHO, except it allows user to output an2alphanumeric string instead of a single character.Calling Sequence:) CALL ANSTR (NCHAR,NADE)Parameters Entered:a* NCHAR - Number of characters to be outputI NADE - Array of ASCII decimal integer equivalents for characters outputs:3 NEWLIN - (4.4) Generates a line feed and carriage returnHThis routine is one of several character handling routines. It generates a line feed and carriage return. Calling Sequence: CALL NEWLIN'3 LINEF - (4.4 ) Generates a line feed &This subroutine generates a line feed.Calling Sequence:- CALL LINEFs,3 CARTN - (4.4) Generates a carriage return,This subroutine generates a carriage return.Calling Sequence:- CALL CARTNr<3 HOME - (4.4) Moves cursor to upper left corner of screenJHOME moves the alphanumeric cursor to the upper Calling Sequence: CALL HOME&3 BAKSP - (4.4) Generates a backspaceBAKSP generates a backspace.Calling Sequence: CALL BAKSPH3 NEWPAG - (4.4) Erases terminal screen, returns cursor to HOME positionENEWPAG erases the terminal screen and returns the alphanumeric cursorto the HOME position.Calling Sequence: CALL NEWPAGH3 SCURSR - (4.5) Using the screen cursor FThe graphic cursor may be used to specify screen coordinates directly.CThis subleft corner of the screen.Calling Sequence:i CALL HOME&3 BAKSP - (4.4) Generates a backspaceBAKSP generates a backspace.Calling Sequence: CALL BAKSP H3 NEWPAG - (4.4) Erases terminal screen, returns cursor to HOME positionENEWPAG erases the terminal screen and returns the alphanumeric cursorRto the HOME position.,Calling Sequence:j CALL NEWPAGH3 SCURSR - (4.5) Using the screen cursor FThe graphic cursor may be used to specify screen coordinates directly.CThis subroutine will activate the graphic cursor, allowing user to g?position it. The cursor position is transmitted when a keyboardiDcharacter is struck. This character along with the input position is returned as arguments by SCURSR.Calling Sequence: CALL SCURSR (ICHAR,IX,IY)Parameters Returned:9 ICHAR - A keyboard character, 7-bit ASCII right-adjusted . IX - Screen x-coordinate of graphic cursor. IY - Screen y-coordinate of graphic cursor;3 DCURSR - (4.5.1) Using the screen cursor (same as SCURSR)GDCURSR accomplishes same function of SCURSR above. Its calling sequencen and arguments are also the same.H3 VCURSR - (4.6) Using the virtual cursor FVCURSR allows user to enable graphic cursor. It is often useful to be Dable to retrieve virtual rather than screen coordinates with graphicDcursor. After cursor has been positioned, its screen coordinates mayCbe transmitted by striking a keyboard character. VCURSR transforms Cinput data into virtual coordinates according to the current windowa=definition. Virtual cursor does not affect the beam position.Calling Sequence:: CALL VCURSR (ICHAR,X,Y)Parameters Returned:: ICHAR - A keyboard character, 7-bit ASCII, right-adjusted/ X - Virtual x-coordinate of graphic cursorn/ Y - Virtual y-coordinate of graphic cursoryQ3 SVSTAT - (4.7.1 ) Saves current status of terminal LGThe current status of the terminal may be saved by providing the statusaFsaving routine with a 60-word real array in which Terminal Status Areamay be stored.Calling Sequence:  CALL SVSTAT (RARRAY)nParameter Entered: RARRAY - A 60-word real arrayaB3 RESTAT - (4.7.2) Restores terminal to any previously saved stateETerminal may be restored to any previously saved state at any time by(Dusing RESTAT with the 60-word real array in which previous Terminal Status Area was stored.dCalling Sequence:. CALL RESTAT (RARRAY)tParameter Entered:D RARRAY - 60-word array containing previously stored terminal stateH3 RSCALE - (4.8) Rescaling a graphic output GA graphic figure drawn with relative coordinates may be rescaled by any Dvirtual, relative factor which is compatible with the virtual window$definition by using this subroutine.Calling Sequence:h CALL RSCALE (FACTOR)aParameter Entered:D FACTOR - Rescaling factor relative to original size of the displayH3 RROTAT - (4.9) Rotating graphic output GA graphic figure drawn with relative coordinates may be rotated at any t0angle relative to its original display position.Calling Sequence:h CALL RROTAT (DEG)Parameter Entered:A DEG - Angle of rotation relative to position of original displayEI3 RESET - (4.10) Initializes Terminal Status Area; doesn't call new page GThis routine accomplishes same function as INIT, but it does not call dfor a new page.rCallin g Sequence:i CALL RESET I3 RECOVR - (4.11) Updates terminal hardware to match Terminal Status AreamGRECOVER updates the terminal hardware to match the Terminal Status AreadIvariables. It is useful following output to the terminal which is outside Athe realm of the Terminal Control System (e.g., a FORTRAN WRITE).sCalling Sequence:i CALL RECOVRH3 HDCOPY - (4.12) Generates a hardcopy of the screen contents KUser working on a TEKTRONIX unit may have the computer generate a hard copy nJof the screen contents at any time. This may be accomplished while in any Emode and does not affect Terminal Control System status. System will rDprevent generation of additional output until hardcopy is completed.Calling Sequence:G CALL HDCOPYF3 ERASE - (4.12) Erases screen without changing mode or beam positionDThe terminal screen may be erased without changing the mode or beam Aposition. The Terminal Control System will prevent generation of /additional output until the erase is completed.NCalling Sequence: CALL ERASErE3 BELL - (4.12) Bell to call user's attention to a particular event FAn audible tone may be output at any time to call user's attention to Ea particular event. Bell may be sounded while in any mode except GIN u:(Graphic Input) mode and has no affect on Terminal status.Calling Sequence:c CALL BELLK3 SEETW - (4.12) Returns current values of screen window X=This routine returns the current values of the screen window.tCalling Sequence:! CALL SEETW (MINX,MAXX,MINY,MAXY)iParameters Returned:, MINX - Minimum horizontal screen coordinate, MAXX - Maximum horizontal screen coordinate* MINY - Minimum vertical screen coordinate* MAXY - Maximum vertical screen coordinateK3 SEEDW - (4.12) Returns current values of virtual window limits EThis routine returns the current values of the virtual window limits.tCalling Sequence:s! CALL SEEDW (XMIN,XMAX,YMIN,YMAX)-Parameters Returned:* XMIN - Minimum horizontal user coordinate* XMAX - Maximum horizontal user coordinate( YMIN - Minimum vertical user coordinate( YMAX - Maximum vertical user coordinateO3 SEEREL - (4.12) Returns values of common variables (?SEEREL returns values of common variables used by the relative -virtual routines to scale and rotate vectors.iCalling Sequence:i CALL SEEREL (RCOS,RSIN,SCALE)Parameters Returned:% RCOS - Cosine of the rotation angle # RSIN - Sine of the rotation angleo$ SCALE - Multiplier used for scalingO3 SEETRN - (4.12) Returns value of common variables CSEETRN returns value of the common variables set by the window and transformation routines.Calling Sequence: CALL SEETRN (XFAC,YFAC,KEY)Parameters Returned: XFAC - X scale factor YFAC - Y scale factor KEY - Transformation key 1 = line 2 = loge 3 = polareH3 KIN - (4.13) Converts inches to screen units GKIN transforms inches to screen units. It provides the number of raster(units in (RI) inches.WCalling Sequence:t Variable = KIN (RI)Parameter Entered: RI - Number of inchesParameter Returned:c, KIN - Number of raster units in (RI) inchesH3 KCM - (4.14) Converts centimeters to screen units EKCM transforms centimeters to screen units. It provides the number ofa!raster units in (RC) centimeters.oCalling Sequence:  Variable = KCM (RC)Parameter Entered: RC - Number of centimetersParameter Returned:r1 KCM - Number of raster units in (RC) centimeters H3 LINWDT - (4.15) Measures the width of characters GLINWDT provides the width in raster units as an accurate measure of the Hhorizontal size of a given number of adjacent characters. Context is the!current screen coordinate system.nCalling Sequence:n Variable = LINWDT (NUMCHR) Parameter Entered:J NUMCHR - Number of adjacent characters for which width in raster units is desirednParameter Returned: J LINWDT - Width in raster units of NUMCHR characters in current character  sizeH3 LINHGT - (4.16) Measures the height of lines GLINHGT provides the accurate measure of the height of a given number ofnlines in raster units.Calling Sequence:a Variable = LINHGT (NUMLIN)Parameter Entered:F NUMLIN - Integer number of lines for which height in raster units is  desirednParameter Returned:sJ LINHGT - Height in raster units of NUMLIN lines in current character size! (see CHRSIZ, Sec. 5.3).hH3 TTBLSZ - (4.17.1) Setting the tab table JTab settings for both horizontal and vertical tabs are kept in two 10-wordGinteger arrays. Settings are ordered with ascending screen coordinates.e5Horizontal and vertical arrays must be equal in size.Calling Sequence:i CALL TTBLSZ (ITBLSZ)iParameter Entered:E ITBLSZ - Size of tab table (horizontal and vertical) expressed as an  integer from 1 to 10H3 SETTAB - (4.17.2) Sets tab setting and inserts it into given tab tableIThis routine takes a given tab setting in screen coordinates and inserts Kit into the given tab table. If tab is full, maximum setting will be lost e3in order that a lesser tab setting may be inserted.lCalling Sequence:l CALL SETTAB (ITAB,ITBTBL)Parameters Entered:e1 ITAB - Tab setting in either X or Y coordinatesa7 ITBTBL - Horizontal or vertical tab table (array name)bH3 RSTTAB - (4.17.3) Removes a tab selectively BThis subroutine removes a tab selectively, its position in screen Ccoordinates (ITAB) must be entered along with the proper tab table.rDNon-zero values which do not correspond to a current tab setting areIignored. If value of tab position is 0, entire tab table will be removed. Calling Sequence:o CALL RSTTAB (ITAB,ITBTBL)Para meters Entered: J ITAB - The X or Y screen coordinate of tab to be removed. If number is > 0, all tabs in tab table designated will be removed.8 ITBTBL - Horizontal or vertical tab table (array name).H3 TABHOR - (4.17.4) Sets the horizontal tab HThis routine causes the alphanumeric cursor to be moved with a constant DY-value to the position specified by the first non-zero entry in theFhorizontal tab table. If horizontal tab table is empty, no action willEoccur. If tab table is not empty and no entry exists which is greater Bthan current screen x-coordinate of cursor or beam position, or ifEfirst non-zero entry greater than screen x-coordinate is also greater8than right margin setting, a new line will be generated. eCalling Sequence:b CALL TABHOR (ITBTBL).Parameter Entered:" ITBTBL - Name of horizontal table)3 TABVER - (4.17.5) Sets the vertical tabtFVertical tabbing will cause the alphanumeric cursor to be moved with aIconstant X-value to the position specified by the last non-zero entry in Jthe vertical tab table which is less than the current Y-coordinate of the Ecursor or beam position. If no such entry exists, no action is taken.tCalling Sequence:a CALL TABVER (ITBTBL)cParameter Entered:> ITBTBL - Name of vertical tab table (see SETTAB, Sec. 4.17.2)H3 SETMRG - (4.17.6) Sets the margins JThis routine sets the left and right margins to be used by Carriage Return)(CARTN), HOME, and NEWPAG (See Sec. 4.4).1Calling Sequence:  CALL SETMRG (MLEFT,MRIGHT) Parameters Entered:hJ MLEFT - Screen coordinate at which a line of alphanumeric output starts.J Its value should always be greater than 0 and less than maximum A screen coordinate (1023 or 4095) or right margin value. I MRIGHT - Screen coordinate at which a line of A/N output ends. Its valuefK should always be greater then MLEFT and less than maximum screen L$ coordinate (1023 or 4095).I3 TERM - (5.1) Identifies the 4014/15 terminal ,HThis subroutine allows user to specify his terminal of extra features ofHthe TEKTRONIX 4014/15 terminal by informing the Terminal Control System.EIf he does not use TERM before calling 4014/15 routines, the TerminalhGControl System will treat his terminal as a 4010 or a 4012/13 terminal.cETERM needs to be called only once, however, after each initializationt(i.e., call to INITT).Calling Sequence:o CALL TERM (ITERM,ISCAL)Parameters Entered:i# ITERM - Integer from 1 to 3 where:a( 1 - indicates 4006,4010,4012/13 2 - indicates 4014/15< 3 - indicates 4014/15 with enhanced graphics moduleF ISCAL - Either 1024 (addressable points) or 4096 (addressable points)H3 CZAXIS - (5.2) Modifies Z-axis of the 4014/15 Terminal JVectors on the 4014 or 4015 terminal cannot only vary in X and Y position;Fbut also vary in brightness and storage properties. This third type ofHvariation is called the Z-axis capability. The 4014/15 terminal has fourZ-axis capabilities.Calling Sequence:t CALL CZAXIS (ICODE)Parameter Entered:7 ICODE - Integer from 0 through 3 calls the Z-axis moden 0 - normal Z-axis 1 - defocused Z-axisa' 2 - enabled write-through modefI3 CHRSIZ - (5.3) Changing character size on the 4014/15 terminal gGThe 4014/15 terminal has four different available character sizes whichdGrange from a very small 133 characters per line size to a very large 74yHcharacters per line size. CHRSIZ changes both the current character sizeEand the variables associated with the change. Default size is size 1.gCalling Sequence:e CALL CHRSIZ (ICHAR)Parameter Entered:G ICHAR - Integer which has one of the following values representing theaA number of characters per line (c.p.l.) of selected size.23 CSIZE - (5.4) Measuring the size of a characterD CSIZE provides current character height and width in raster units. H Characters are measured in the screen coordinate system in use, either F 1024 or 4096. This is useful for imposing alphanumeric characters on 5 graphic displays, primarily in the case of labeling.eCalling Sequence:  CALL CSIZE (IHORZ,IVERT)lParameters Returned:I IHORZ - Horizontal character dimension, including inter-character space;a1 horizontal distance between two periods. B IVERT - Vertical distance, as above, including interline spacing.H3 INCPLT - (5.5) Incremental plotting EINCPLT is used to perform incremental plotting. Each incremental ploteIwill move the beam one raster unit in the given direction. User specifies Fthe direction, whether it is to be visible or invisible and whether heEwishes this plot character to be output. A 4014 or 4015 terminal withmIthe Enhanced Graphics Module must be used, and have a specified 4096 grid(in his call to TERM (Sec. 5.1).RCalling Sequence:  CALL INCPLT (IONOFF,IDIR,NO)IParameters Entered: IONOFF - 0=Beam off (invisible) 1=Beam on (visible)  IDIR - Direction Code: NO - Number of times plot character is to be repeatedH3 SEEMOD - (5.6) Checks terminal modes FSEEMOD returns value of common variables indicating status of hardwareIdashed line type, Z-axis mode and terminal mode (See Secs. 3.12 and 5.2.)1Calling Sequence:u CALL SEEMOD (LINE,IZAXIS,MODE)MParameters Returned:& LINE - Hardware line type in effect IZAXIS - Hardware Z-axis mode MODE - Software mode: 0 = alphanumeric 1 = vector 2 = point plot 3 = incremental plot 4 = dashB3 SEETRM - (5.7) Checks terminal speed, type, character size, etc.DThis subroutine returns the common variables which identify terminalCspeed, type, character size and maximum range of addressable pointsc(4096 or 1024).iCalling Sequence:l' CALL SEETRM (ISPEED,ITERM,ISIZE,MAXSR)oParameters Returned:@ ISPEED - Baud rate in characters per second (which has been set in INITT (Sec. 2.1)e . ITERM - Terminal type set in TERM (Sec. 5.1)1 ICSIZE - Character size set in CHRSIZ (Sec. 5.3)o5 MAXSR - Screen address range set in TERM (Sec. 5.1)iH3 LINTRN - (6.1) Linear Transformation ELINTRN returns a user from either a logarithmic or a polar window andeHsets linear scaling. A linear window is assumed for all Terminal ControlGSystem routines until log or polar definitions are requested. It is nota5necessary to call LINTRN upon initializing a program. Calling Sequence:i CALL LINTRNH3 LOGTRN - (6.2) Logarithmic transformation IThis subroutine defines either the X or Y axis or both as logarithmically Escaled to fit the user's screen window. The extent of the logarithmicn.definition is determined by the parameter KEY.Calling Sequence:t CALL LOGTRN (KEY)Parameter Entered: KEY - l - X-axis logarithmici Y-axis linear 2 - X-axis linear Y-axis logarithmic  3 - X-axis logarithmici Y-axis logarithmicnH3 POLTRN - (6.3) Polar transformation FPOLTRN allows user to define his virtual graphic data to the Terminal GControl System in polar coordinates. These are specified by radius and aangle.Calling Sequence:v# CALL POLTRN (ANGMIN,ANGMAX,RSUPRS)hParameters Entered:oI ANGMIN - Minimum angle relative to the horizontal from which the display # will appear on the screennI ANGMAX - Maximum angle relative to the horizontal from which the displayi# will appear on the screen " RSUPRS - Radius suppresion factorG3 DRAWSA - (6.4) Drawing segments using polar transformation JA call to DRAWSA is used to construct a grid. DRAWSA is analogous to DRAW,Iexcept that it enables the user to draw the curved line segments that are1Jnecessary when a polar transformation is in effect. DRAWSR is analogous toADRAWR (Sec.3.6), but again it is used for a polar transformation.iCalling Sequence:w CALL DRAWSA (X,Y)I where X and Y are the virtual coordinates to which the line segment is drawn CALL DRAWSR (X,Y)G where X and Y are the virtual coordinates relative to the currentr beam positiontH3 DASHSA - (6.5) Drawing dashed line segments using polar transformation@DASHSA a nd DASHSR are analogous to DASHA and DASHR (Sec. 3.11), ;respectively. They too are used for a polar transformation.tCalling Sequence:p CALL DASHSA (X,Y,L)H where X and Y are the virtual coordinates to which the dashed lineG segment is to be drawn. L is the dashed line type (see Sec. 3.12)o CALL DASHSR (X,Y,L)H where X and Y are the virtual coordinates to which the dashed lineJ is drawn relative to the current beam position. L is the dashed line type. (Sec. 3.12)uH3 TOUTST - (7.1) Outputs an array of integer characters FTOUTST outputs an array of integer characters. It does not update the Fgraphic beam position within the Terminal Control System, nor does it Fput the terminal in alphanumeric mode. TOUTST should be used only whenDoutputting control characters which are not otherwise handled by theTerminal Control System. aCalling Sequence:e CALL TOUTST(NCHAR,IARRAY)Parameters Entered:lC NCHAR - Length of IARRAY, i.e. , number of characters to be output-6 IARRAY - Array containing ADE characters to be outputH3 TOUTPT - (7.2) Outputs a single integer character IThis routine outputs a single ADE (integer character). It does not updateeIthe graphic beam position within the Terminal Control System, nor does it Hput the terminal into alphanumeric mode. TOUTPT should be used only whenDoutputting a control character which is not otherwise handled by theTerminal Control System.Calling Sequence:n CALL TOUTPT(ICHAR)NParameter Entered:& ICHAR - An ADE character to be outputH3 ANCHO - (7.3) Outputs a single ADE character IANCHO outputs a single ADE character, places the terminal in alphanumericCJmode, outputs the character and then updates the position of the beam. For-a complete description of ANCHO see Sec. 4.3.ACalling Sequence:E CALL ANCHO(ICHAR)Parameter Entered:/ ICHAR - Non-control ADE character to be outputcG3 ANSTR - (7.4) Same as ANCHO; outputs array of non-control charactersUIANSTR accomplishes the same function as ANCHO, except it outputs an arrayrJof non-control ADE characters. It also places the terminal in alphanumericFmode and updates the graphic beam position within the Terminal ControlFSystem. For more information regarding ANSTR see Secs. 4.3 and 4.3.1).Calling Sequence:r CALL ANSTR(NCHAR,IARRAY)AParameters Entered:e+ NCHAR - Number of characters to be outputAA IARRAY - Array containing A SCII decimal integer equivalents for f" characters to be output.I3 A1OUT - (7.5) Outputs an array of A1 FORTRAN format characters sJThis routine outputs an array of A1 FORTRAN format characters. It puts theFterminal in alphanumeric mode and updates the graphic beam position inthe Terminal Control System.Calling Sequence:n CALL A1OUT(NCHAR,IARRAY)NParameters Entered:e= NCHAR - Length of IARRAY; number of characters to be outputm< IARRAY - Array of A1 FORTRAN fo rmat characters to be outputH3 AOUTST - (7.6) Outputs an array of Am format characters BAOUTST outputs an array of Am format characters. In this format m Drepresents the number of alphanumeric characters in one word. AOUTSTFalso updates the graphic beam position in the Terminal Control System.5graphic beam position in the Terminal Control System.cCalling Sequence:  CALL AOUTST(NCHAR,IARRAY)Parameters Entered:nG NCHAR - Number of characters to be output, m times the l ength (numberv of words) of IARRAY.J IARRAY - Array of Am format characters to be output. If IARRAY is shorter/ than NCHAR, it is padded with blanks.uH3 TINSTR - (7.7) Accepts input from Terminal and puts into an ADE array.CTINSTR takes input from terminal and puts into an ADE array. These Echaracters in a form ready to be output by ANCHO (Secs. 4.3) or ANSTRl (Sec. 4.3.1).Calling Sequence: CALL TINSTR(LEN,IARRAY)Parameter Entered:F LEN - Number of charact ers expected. If fewer than LEN are received, I IARRAY is padded with blanks; if more than LEN are received, the a< next call to TINSTR will input the excess characters.Parameter Returned:y? IARRAY - ADE array into which the input characters are placed.tH3 TINPUT - (7.8) Accepts one ADE character from the terminal 9This routine accepts one ADE character from the terminal. Calling Sequence:  CALL TINPUT(ICHAR) Parameter Returned: F ICHAR - ADE character  received from the terminal. Since TINPUT calls B TINSTR, a null record (entering only a carriage return atE the terminal) becomes a blank, while more than one character C entered is stored for later access by any call to TINSTR. F3 A1IN - (7.9) Accepts an array of characters in integer A1 FORTRAN Hformat A1IN accepts an array of characters from the terminal in integer EA1 FORTRAN format. The array is in the correct format to be output by A1OUT (Sec. 7.5).mCalling Sequence:  CALL A1IN(NCHAR,IARRAY)Parameter Entered:G NCHAR - Number of characters expected from terminal. Since A1IN calls G TINSTR (Sec. 7.7) if fewer than NCHAR characters are received,uD IARRAY is padded with blanks; if more characters than NCHARC are received, they are stored for later access by any call  to TINSTR.)Parameter Returned:h= IARRAY - Array in which the A1 format characters are placed. E3 AINST - (7.10) Accepts an array of characters from terminal in Am cGformat. This routine accepts an array of characters from the terminal nAin Am format. This array can then be output by AOUTST (Sec. 7.6).e2 his array can then be output by AOUTST (Sec.7.6).Calling Sequence:n CALL AINST (NCHAR,IARRAY)Parameter Entered:H NCHAR - Number of characters expected from terminal. Since AINST calls I TINSTR (Sec.7.7), if fewer than NCHAR characters are received, .H IARRAY is padded with blanks, if more than N CHAR are received,A they are stored for later access by any call to TINSTR.pParameters Received:= IARRAY - Array in which the Am format characters are placed.hQ3 SETBUF - (7.11.1) Sets the output buffer format KGSETBUF is one of several utility I/O routines which aid the user of theeFTerminal Control System in outputting or inputting data. However, theyFshould be used carefully and in most cases will not need to be called.ESETBUF must be used along with TERM when changing from a 4010 or 4012 Hterminal to a 4014 terminal or when transferring to a different computerFsystem. Output format must be changed in these cases in order to avoid8interline character problems (see Implementation Notes).Calling Sequence:t CALL SETBUF(KFORM)eParameter Entered:C KFORM - Format of the output buffer, after the the following code:aH (a) Wish to mix Terminal Control System output with other types' of output (e.g., FORTRAN).hC (b) Wish to run programs on different computer systems, orrG (c) Wish to change terminal types (e.g., from a 4012 to a 4014t terminal).sH3 SEEBUF - (7.11.2) Examines the output format JSEEBUF allows user to examine the format of his output buffer (see SETBUF,)Sec.7.11.1 and the Implementation Notes).eCalling Sequence:b CALL SEEBUF(JFORM)fParameter Returned:rC KFORM - Output buffer format presently in use. For a 4010 or 4012 aE terminal KFORM should return either 1 (for systems which do sE not allow interline characters to be suppressed, 3 or 4 (foraC systems where interline characters may be suppressed). For:9 a 4014 terminal KFORM should return 2, 3, or 4. aH3 LEFTIO - (7.11.3) Examines useable space in the input or output bufferFLEFTIO returns the number of characters remaining in the input buffer Eor the amount of space (in characters) remaining in output buffer. InnCcases where the amount of input is variable, e.g., user may wish tolBsee how many characters need to be processed before a given input.Calling Sequence:  K=LEFTIO(BUFF)tParameter Entered:2 IBUFF - Indicates which buffer is to be examined: 1 Input buffer) 2 Output bufferParameter Returned:d< K - Number of characters left in buffer indicated by IBUFF.I3 SEELOC - (7.11.4) Locating the position of the graphic beam NDSEELOC allows user to locate on the screen the last position of the Egraphic beam if he has generated output outside the Terminal Control =System (e.g., a FORTRAN READ or WRITE or a call to TOUTSTR ordATOUTPT( Secs. 7.1 and 7.2, respectively). Thus, he may update the beam position himself.Calling Sequence:. CALL SEELOC (IX,IY)Parameters Returned:% IX - Screen X-coordinate of the beamn% IY - Screen Y-coordinate of the beamaH3 TSEND - (7.12) Dumping the output buffer BTSEND dumps the output buf fer constructed by the Terminal Control BSystem output routines. When the output buffer becomes full, it isBsent, but TSEND may be called any time the user wishes to have allBstored output displayed. It is useful to call ANMODE, as TSEND mayCleave the terminal in graphics mode. (See Sec. 7.11.1 for details.)oCalling Sequence: 2 CALL TSENDo2 VAX_ImplementationFUse of VAX PLOT10/Advanced Graphics requires linking programs /NOI4 orEinsuring that integer variables used by the subroutines are INTEGER*2e?variables. This has been done to insure that graph data can be4(transfered between the PDP-11 and VAX. ?If one wishes some degree of terminal independence, one should oFlink to PLOT125.OLB. If this is done, it is possible to run programs Ctransparently either on Tektronix 4014 terminals, VT125 terminals, Eor VT240/1 terminals. Moreover, it is possible to run in batch mode iHcreating a data file which can later be graphed on the appropriate real Hterminal. It is also possaracter slant (see SLETS).: ROT is the temporary rotation angle (0 = horizontal,; 90 = vertical bottom up). The original orientation is restored upon return.ww`XG%g 1 REMINDER9 REMINDER is used to leave your self (or some other user)Ba reminder of something which must be done. REMINDER will ask youBwho the reminder is for. The name must be a valid VMS login name.BIf you type , the reminder will be sent to you. Next it asks Dfor the date and tim e to remind the user. Finally, it asks you for Creminder message. HELP using reminder is available on any input bypressing the HELP key.2 NAME= The name you input to REMINDER is not always the user's lastFname. Each user on the VAX must have a unique login name. It is thisBname that REMINDER uses to track down the user. If you request a Clist of valid names to be displayed, the VAX system account file is:scanned and all valid names are displayed in table format.2 TIME@ The VAX  uses a 24 hour clock. Time entries must be of the formDHH:MM where HH is the hour to remind the user (0 - 23) and MM is theBminute of the hour (0 - 59) to send the reminder. Since a 24 hour6clock is used, 2:00 is 2:00 AM while 14:00 is 2:00 PM.2 DATE? The VAX likes to use dates entered with the format DD-MMM-YYYYHwhere DD is the day of the month, MMM is the month (JAN, FEB, ..., DEC),Gand YYYY is the year (1982, 1983... etc.). Note that the year, must beCentered as a 4 digit number. REMINDER only allows years to be usedDwhich are either the current year or one year in the future. Due toFthe nature of the VAX, reminders scheduled too far in advance, are nota good idea and can get lost. 2 MESSAGE= The message text should be limited to about 65 characters ifDyou want all of the text displayed if the reminder is sent to a userIusing a 80 column video terminal. Upper and lower case text may be used.DThe reminder message will be displayed as entered. ^Y will terminate'text entry with no reminder being sent.ww(8 1 RESEQUENCEH Resequence labels, by program unit, of VAX-11 compatible FORTRAN code.H All program units (e.g., subroutines), contained in a single file will be resequenced separately. Format: RESEQUENCE [file-spec] 2 Parameters file-specH Specifies name of FORTRAN source file to be resequenced. ResequencedH code is written to a new version under the same file name(s). DefaultD file type is "FOR".@ĸ 1 NDACP4FInvokes one of the ND Analyzer Communications facilities. The analyzerFis assumed to be an ND66, ND65, or ND62 using the NDACP communicationsEprotocol. For detailed information on NDACP, see the VAX NDACP User'sManual. Format:D NDACP terminal_device_spec) Examples:i NDACP TTA5: NDACP/SIX TT2:m NDACP/NDCMP TTB1: 2 Parametersterminal_device_spec>Specifies the terminal port to be used to communicate with the>analyzer. You must have privilege to read and write the port. 2 Qualifiers/SIXGSpecifies that the external analyzer is an ND SIX or a cassette reader.aFND SIX spectral files are not compatible with standard spectral files;BCNVSIX will convert ND SIX spectral files to the standard format. 4By default, the analyzer is an ND66, ND65, or ND62. /NDCMPFSpecifies that the external analyzer is using the NDCMP communications+protocol (rather than the NDACP protocol). owwte variables in other sections of code may need t2767 source code statements may be in any one file RESEQUENCE'd.B 4. Comments nested within continued executable FORTRAN statementsB will produce unpredictable results. Non-executing FORTRAN (e.g.,B FORMAT, DATA, EQUIVALENCE) may be commented without reprecussion.2 Use1To use RESEQUENCE, make the following assignment:1 RES*EQUENCE:==$SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]:RESFOR.EXE 2 Location* RESFOR was taken from [DECUS.VAX83A.BALL]ww9{%g1 RUNOFFHInvokes DSR, the DIG ITAL Standard Runoff text formatter, to format oneHor more ASCII files. See the VAX-11 DIGITAL Standard Runoff (DSR) User's@Guide for complete instructions on the use of the DSR formatter.Format: RUNOFF file-spec[,...] 2 Parameters file-spec[,...]I Specifies one or more ASCII files (containing text and DSR commands) toI be formatted into an output file. If you omit the file type, DSR: assumes a file type of RNO. No wild-cards are supported.I For a list of inpu !t file types and their resultant output file types,< see the VAX-11 DIGITAL Standard Runoff (DSR) User's Guide. 2 QualifiersH You can specify most DSR qualifiers as either command or file quali-H fiers (except those listed below). If you give a file qualifier with anH input file specification, it applies only to that input file. If youH give a command qualifier with the RUNOFF command, it applies to allE input files (except any that have their own, overriding qualifiers).H The" following qualifiers are global -- that is, they apply to all inputH files, whether given on the RUNOFF command or on an input file specifi- cation:- /FORM_SIZE=n /PAUSE /SIMULATE /[NO]LOG /BACKSPACEH Controls whether DSR uses the ASCII backspace character to performH character-by-character overprinting. By default, DSR performs line-by- line overprinting./BOLD /BOLD[=n] (D) /NOBOLDH Controls whether flagged characters are boldfaced by overprinting theH # text a specified number of times. If you specify /BOLD without specify-H ing a number, the flagged text is overprinted once. If you specify the; number 0, or specify /NOBOLD, the text is not overprinted. The default is /BOLD=1. /CHANGE_BARS /CHANGE_BARS[="c"] (D) /NOCHANGE_BARSH Controls whether DSR outputs change bars in the left margin of the out-H put pages as indicated in the input file by the .BEGIN BAR and .END BARH commands. You can also specify a replacement for th$e default change bar character, vertical bar (|).H If you omit the /CHANGE_BARS qualifier, the default is that change barsH are allowed within the document, under control of the .ENABLE BARS andH .DISABLE BARS commands. If you specify /NOCHANGE_BARS, then change bars0 are forbidden for the duration of the document. /CONTENTS /CONTENTS[=file-spec] /NOCONTENTS (D)H Controls whether DSR generates an additional output file that canH become all or part of the in%put for the TOC program, which generates a table of contents.< The default name is the input file name with a type of BTC./DEBUG /DEBUG[=(option[,...])] /NODEBUG (D)H Directs DSR to show its handling of certain commands in the output< file. You can specify one or more of the following options:H CONDITIONALS Causes DSR to ignore all conditional commands (.IF,H .ELSE, .IFNOT, and .ENDIF), and to output all formattedH &text; draft flags, if defined by the .VARIABLE command, are also output.H CONTENTS Causes DSR to write all .SEND TOC commands to the output file.H FILES Causes DSR to write all .REQUIRE commands to the output.H INDEX Causes DSR to write all .INDEX and .ENTRY commands and: all index-flagged text to the output file.1 ALL Specifies all four options above.; If you specify /DEBUG without any options, AL'L is assumed./DOWN /DOWN[=n] /NODOWN (D)H Directs DSR to insert n blank lines at the top of each output page.: If you specify /DOWN without a value, /DOWN=5 is assumed. /FORM_SIZE /FORM_SIZE=n (D)H Specifies the maximum number of lines that can be output to a page, in-H cluding all header and trailing information. The default is 66 lines per page./INDEX /INDEX[=file-spec] /NOINDEX (D)H Controls whether DSR generates an additiona(l output file that can be-H come all or part of the input to the TCX program, which generates a two-column index.< The default name is the input file name with a type of BIX./LOG /LOG /NOLOG (D)H Controls whether or not DSR writes a termination message to SYS$OUTPUT.H If DSR detects any errors while processing a file, it writes the ter-/ mination message as if you had specified /LOG. /MESSAGES /MESSAGES=optionH Specifies the destination for DSR error m)essages. You can indicate aD specific destination by specifying either of the following options:9 OUTPUT Put error messages only into the output fileD USER Display error messages only on the terminal (SYS$ERROR)H The default is to send messages both to the output file and displayH them on the terminal. If you specify /NOOUTPUT, a /MESSAGES qualifier2 is ignored and messages are sent to the terminal./NONSPACING_UNDERLINE /NONSPACING_UNDERLINE[=c]H Causes fl*agged text to be underlined by a nonspacing character such asH a bell or control character. You can supply a character (c) to replaceH the default nonspacing character, bell (%D7). When replacing the char-H acter, you must specify the octal, decimal, or hexadecimal equivalent of the replacement character.H Do not use this qualifier with the /SEPARATE_UNDERLINE or /UNDER- LINE_CHARACTER qualifier./OUTPUT /OUTPUT[=file-spec] (D) /NOOUTPUTH Specifies the file for ou+tput from DSR. The default file name is theH name of the input file. The default file type depends on the input file type." Input Extension Output Extension" --------------- ---------------- .RNO .MEM .RNB .BLB .RNC .CCO .RND .DOC .RNE .ERR .RNH .HLP .RNL .PLM .RNM .MAN .RNP .OPR .RNS .STD .RNT .MEC .RNX .MEX none , .MEM other .MEM7 If no input extension is supplied, only .RNO is tried.H You can use the /OUTPUT qualifier as either a file qualifier or a com-H mand qualifier. If you specify /OUTPUT as a file qualifier, the nameH applies only to the respective input file. If you specify /OUTPUT as aH command qualifier, the name applies to all input files except any that" have their own /OUTPUT qualifier.H /NOOUTPUT tells DSR not to create an output file, and to take other -H shortcuts to speed processing. Use /NOOUTPUT in conjunction with theH /CONTENTS and /INDEX qualifiers if you want to generate only .BTCH and/or .BIX files. You can also use /NOOUTPUT to check an input file7 for errors without generating a formatted output file./PAGES /PAGES="start[:end][,...]"H Indicates that only pages within the specified range(s) are to be out-H put. Choose a range of page numbers by specifying starting and endingH page numbers that are separated. by a colon and enclosed in quotation marks.H You can specify multiple page ranges by separating them with commas inH the quoted string. If you omit :end from the last page range, all pages2 from start to the end of the document are output.H Each start and end are ASCII page numbers, including the page and subpage (if any). For example, /PAGES="4-12:4-15,A-1:A-14"/PAUSE /PAUSE /NOPAUSE (D)H Controls whether DSR pauses after printing each page of outpu/t. PausingH allows you to insert single sheets of paper or reproduction mastersH into the output device. Printing resumes as soon as you enter any char-& acter. (The character is not echoed.)/RIGHT /RIGHT[=n] /NORIGHT (D)H Directs DSR to shift the output to the right on each line by the numberH of columns specified. Note that these characters are not deducted from, the page width specified in the input file.< If you specify /RIGHT without a value, /RIGHT=5 is assumed.0/SEPARATE_UNDERLINE /SEPARATE_UNDERLINE[=c]H Causes flagged text to be underlined by a characters on a separateH line. You can supply a character (c) to replace the default separate-H underlining character, hyphen (-). Specify the replacement character asH either a character enclosed in quotation marks or as an octal, decimal, or hexadecimal value.H Do not use this qualifier with the /NONSPACING_UNDERLINE or /UNDER- LINE_CHARACTER qualifier. /SEQUENCE /SEQUENCE1 /NOSEQUENCE (D)H Controls whether DSR outputs sequential line numbers at the right ofH each line in the output file. These line numbers indicate the input& line that generated each output line.H For editors that generate line numbers in the input file, /SEQUENCE2 causes similar numbering to appear in the output. /SIMULATE /SIMULATE /NOSIMULATE (D)H Controls whether line feeds or form feeds are used to advance to theF top of each page. The default is /2NOSIMULATE, which uses form feeds.H Specify /SIMULATE if you want line feeds used to advance to the top ofH each page and a pause to occur before starting the first page only.H Printing starts as soon as you enter any character (the character is not echoed)./UNDERLINE_CHARACTER# /UNDERLINE_CHARACTER[="c"] (D) /NOUNDERLINEH Specify the character to be used for normal (overprint) underlining, orH disable all underlining (/NOUNDERLINE). You can supply a character (c)H 3 to replace the default underlining character, underscore (_). SpecifyH the replacement character as either a character enclosed in quotation5 marks or as an octal, decimal, or hexadecimal value.H Do not use /UNDERLINE_CHARACTER with the /NONSPACING_UNDERLINE or /SEPARATE_UNDERLINE qualifier./VARIANT /VARIANT=stringH Enables output of conditional text controlled by the name(s) given inH the string. These names are defined in the input file using the .IF,H .IFNOT, . 4ELSE, and .ENDIF DSR commands. Specify multiple names in aH quoted string, separating them by commas. See the VAX-11 DigitalH Standard Runoff (DSR) User's Guide for descriptions of the conditional commands. 2 .APPENDIX .APPENDIX text1 .AX text1 C This command causes a .BREAK and initiates an appendix, taking theD text-parameter (text1) directly following the keyword as the title.B The identifying letter will be automatic and sequential, startingD with Appendix A. When th5e command is issued, a new page is startedB and 12 blank lines are inserted. The left margin is set to zero,I and fill, justify, and single spacing are enabled. The word "APPENDIX" ? followed by a space and the appendix letter is centered on theF thirteenth line. The fourteenth line is left blank and the fifteenthE line contains the centered chapter title in upper case, unless flagsC in the text specify otherwise. Three blank lines are then skipped8 and the text starts on the nineteenth6 line of the page.2 .AUTOPARAGRAPH .AUTOPARAGRAPH .AP .NO AUTOPARAGRAPH .NAPD These commands enable and disable the autoparagraph mode. When theD mode is enabled any subsequent blank line or any line starting withA a space is considered as the starting point for a new paragraph.E This allows paragraphs to be automatically formatted without the useF of additional commands. When auto-paragraphing is enabled, the firstF word for each paragraph is indented five spaces from the 7left margin.C All Runoff commands that perform an implicit .BREAK, when insertedD directly following a .AUTOPARAGRAPH command, will cancel the effect of the .AUTOPARAGRAPH command.2 .AUTOSUBTITLE .AUTOSUBTITLE n .AST n .NO AUTOSUBTITLE .NASTC The .AUTOSUBTITLE command allows text for the subtitle information? lines to be taken form each header-level-one entry used in theC document. The feature is available by default and may be disabledC by the .NO AUTOSUBTITLE command. 8 However, the enabling command isA only operable if a subtitle command has been previously entered.@ Since six numbered header levels can exist, an optional signed D number-parameter (n) is available with the .AUTOSUBTITLE command to2 specify a header level text other than the first. 2 .AUTOTABLE .AUTOTABLE .AT .NO AUTOTABLE .NATE These commands enable and disable the autotable mode. When the modeE is enabled any subsequent line without a leading space is consideredD as the 9start of a new paragraph. The first word of each line, thusD considered, will be indented five spaces from the left margin. TheG auto-table effect can be temporarily cancelled if intervening commands- are entered at a line with no leading space.2 .BAR .ENABLE BAR .EBB .BEGIN BAR .BB .END BAR .EB .DISABLE BAR .DBBG The bar feature is used to insert a bar (|) in column one of a line toD indicate to the reader that the text has been replaced or otherwiseI altered :. These commands enable the feature (.ENABLE BAR), specify whereG the change-bars begin (.BEGIN BAR) and end (.END BAR), and disable theG feature (.DISABLE BAR). The commands are used in the order described.G Once the feature is enabled, the begin and end commands are used (like? flags) to initiate and terminate the insertion of change-bars.2 .BLANK .BLANK n .B nF This command causes a .BREAK and then leaves a number of lines blank,( as specified by a number-parameter (n). 2 .B;OLDING .DISABLE BOLDING .DBO .ENABLE BOLDING .EBOI These commands disable and reenable the bolding feature. However, sinceF this feature is initially enabled by default and the BOLD flag (*) isG not, enabling recognition of the flag (.FLAGS BOLD) is also necessary.2 .BREAK .BREAK .BRH This command causes the previous line to be output without being filled or justified. 2 .CENTER .CENTER n;text1 .CENTRE n;text1 .C n;text1F This command causes a .BREAK and ce <nters the following text-parameterE (text1) around a column that is specified by halving either the pageG width or a number-parameter. All centering is relative to the currentC page width setting and is, therefore independent of left and right margin settings. 2 .CHAPTER .CHAPTER text1 .CH text1F This command causes a .BREAK and initiates a chapter, taking the textC parameter (text1) as the title. The numbering of chapters with beB automatic and sequential. When the command is =issued, a new pageD is started and 12 blank lines are inserted. The left margin is setF to zero, and fill, justify, and single spacing are enabled. The wordD "CHAPTER" followed by a space and the chapter number is centered on@ the thirteenth line. The fourteenth line is left blank and theB fifteenth line contains the centered chapter title in upper case,C unless flags in the text specify otherwise. Three blank lines areE then skipped and the text starts on the nineteenth line of the page.> 2 .COMMENT .COMMENT text2 .! text2B This command allows the user to insert descriptive or explanatory? comments (text2) in the input file that will not appear in the output file.2 .CONTROL_CHARACTERS .CONTROL CHARACTERS .CC .NO CONTROL CHARACTERS .NCCE These commands cause the recognition of control characters as normalC text to be enabled or disabled. If control characters exist in anE input file and they are not enabled an error message will occur when the? output file is created.2 .DATE .DATE .D .NO DATE .NDE These commands enable and disable the printing of the current systemH date, under the number of each page-header. However, the .DATE commandF will only be effective if a .SUBTITLE command has previously entered.- The date is printed in the form 'DD MMM YY'.2 .DISPLAY_APPENDIX .DISPLAY APPENDIX y .DAX y D This command causes a .BREAK and then transforms appendix numberingJ into a format specified by the user (de @cimal, roman numerals or letters).H Moreover, the case (upper, lower or mixed) of roman numerals or lettersB can be specified. The display-descriptor-parameter (y) codes areF described in "HLP RUNOFF display-descriptor-parameter". The .DISPLAY@ APPENDIX command should appear following the .APPENDIX command.2 .DISPLAY_CHAPTER .DISPLAY CHAPTER y .DCH y H This command causes a .BREAK and then transforms chapter numbering intoE a format specified by the user (decimal, roman numerals or Aletters).H Moreover, the case (upper, lower or mixed) of roman numerals or lettersB can be specified. The display-descriptor-parameter (y) codes areF described in "HLP RUNOFF display-descriptor-parameter". The .DISPLAY> CHAPTER command should appear following the chapter commands.2 .DISPLAY_ELEMENTS .DISPLAY ELEMENTS "q",y,"q" .DLE "q",y,"q" ? This command causes a .BREAK and then formats list elements asD specified by the user. The command extends list element formattingD possiBbilities to include roman numerals and letters. Moreover, the A case (upper, lower or mixed) of roman numerals or letters can beC specified. In addition, itemization symbols can be enclosed (e.g.F in parentheses or brackets). A quoted-string-parameter (q) specifiesB the character desired for the left closure (e.g. a left bracket).D A display-descriptor-parameter (y) code is then used to specify the? form and case (see "HLP RUNOFF display-descriptor-parameter").G A second quoted-string-para Cmeter is then used to specify the characterB desired for right closure. The .DISPLAY ELEMENTS command must beA entered between the associated .LIST command and the first .LIST element command.2 .DISPLAY_LEVELS" .DISPLAY LEVELS y1,y2,y3,y4,y5,y6 .DHL y1,y2,y3,y4,y5,y6F This command causes a .BREAK and transforms header level numbers intoE a format specified by the user. The command uses up to six display-C descriptor-parameters (y1-y6) (see "HLP RUNOFF display-descriptor-F paramDeter"). The .DISPLAY LEVELS command must be inserted before the .HEADER LEVEL commands.2 .DISPLAY_NUMBER .DISPLAY NUMBER y .DNM yB This command causes a .BREAK and transforms page numbering into aF format specified by the user. The command uses a display-descriptor-D parameter (y) (see "HLP RUNOFF display-descriptor-parameter"). TheI .DISPLAY NUMBER command should be inserted following the page formatting commands.2 .DISPLAY_SUBPAGE .DISPLAY SUBPAGE y .DSP yE This comm Eand causes a .BREAK and transforms subpage numbering into aF format specified by the user. The command uses a display-descriptor-E parameter (y) (see "HLP RUNOFF display-descriptor- parameter"). TheB .DISPLAY NUMBER command should be inserted following the subpage  formatting commands. 2 .DO_INDEX .DO INDEX text1 .DX text1@ This command causes a .BREAK, forces a new page, outputs headerD information, and then prints the entire content of the Index Buffer@ as a one column index (i. Fe., does a .PRINT INDEX). Entries areA printed against the left margin with regular line spacing and in@ alphabetical order, a blank line is left between entries havingB different first letters. Those entries requiring a reference are@ directly followed by a dotted line and an appended page number;5 any additional page numbers are separated by commas.A The .DO INDEX command forces a new pages and outputs the header.D The initial header line output contains the first index page numberC ( GPage Index-n), set against the right margin followed by two blankC lines. The command then centers the text-parameter (text1), if itB is supplied, in upper case. The title information is followed by+ four blank lines and then the index items.C This command is ignored if the /INDEX switch appears on the RUNOFF@ command line. The procedure for creating a two column index is described in "HELP RUNOFF TCX".2 .ENTRY .ENTRY text2 .Y text2B This command is used in the same manner aHs the .INDEX command and@ provides the same output. However, the items appears alone; no2 dotted line or reference page number is included. 2 .FIGURE .FIGURE n .FG n  .FIGURE DEFERRED n .FGD nB These command cause a .BREAK and reserve a number of blank lines,E specified by a positive number-parameter (n), for the insertion of aD figure; the lines may be reserved for a current (.FIGURE) or laterB (.FIGURE DEFERRED) page. The number of lines specified cannot beE greater then Ithe number of lines available per page. If the .FIGURED command is used and the required number of lines are not available,D a new page will be started and the lines will be skipped on the newD page. If the .FIGURE DEFERRED command is used and there isn't roomE on the current page, the current page will be filled before skipping to the next page.2 .FILL .FILL .F .NO FILL .NFE The .FILL command causes a .BREAK and causes each subsequent line ofI the output to be filled. T Jhis means that words are added to the currentH line until the addition of another complete word would exceed the rightG margin. The .NO FILL command disables both filling and justification.I Moreover, the command also disables any .AUTOPARAGRAPH and/or .AUTOTABLEF commands previously entered; a subsequent .FILL command will reenable these commands.2 .FIRST_TITLE .FIRST TITLE .FTD This command is used to force running head information to appear onC the first page. The .FIRST TITLEK should follow the .TITLE command/ and precede any text input for the first page.2 .FLAGS .FLAGS name k .FL name k .NO FLAGS name k .NFL name kH These commands control recognition of flag characters. By using a flagH name as a parameter a flag may be individually enabled (.FLAGS name) orI disabled (.NO FLAGS name). By excluding the flag name or using the wordC "ALL", all flags (except CONTROL and COMMENT) may be collectivelyJ enabled (.FLAGS ALL) or disabled (.NO FLAGS ALLL). A flag may be redefinedE by using a character parameter (k) along with a .FLAGS command. For3 a description of the flags see "HLP RUNOFF FLAGS". 2 .FOOTNOTE .FOOTNOTE n .FN n .END FOOTNOTE .EFNG These commands allow a number of lines to be reserved at the bottom ofA the current page (or the next page if room is not available) forF footnote information. The text following the initiating command and @ preceding the terminating command is collected for the footnoteD buffer. M Page, title and section formatting commands cannot be usedA within a footnote. When a footnote is initiated, current format@ values are saved, and restored when the footnote is terminated.B If space reserved for the footnote is the product of an optional,H positive number-parameter (n) multiplied by the current .SPACING value.C If n is not specified, the required number of lines is computed by RUNOFF.2 .HEADER_LEVEL .HEADER LEVEL n text2 .HL n text2? This command causes a .BREAK,N executes a .TEST PAGE (using the? current paragraph-test-page value + 7), and specifies both the> header level (n) of the subsection and the text (text2). TheB value of n may be any single digit from 1 to 6. Fill and justify8 are automatically enabled by the .HEADER LEVEL command. 2 .HEADERS .HEADERS UPPER .HEADERS LOWER .HEADERS MIXEDD This command allows the words "page" and "index" to appear in upper case, lower case or mixed case. 2 .HEADERS_ON .HEADERS ON .HD ON .OHD .NO HEADERS .NHDH These commands allow the printing of running headers to be disabled andI resumed. If headers are enabled, the initial three or four lines of theH text area, for every page, are reserved for the insertion of one or two lines of header information.2 .HYPHENATION .HYPHENATION .HY .NO HYPHENATION .NHYG These commands disable and reenable the hyphenation feature. However,F since the feature is initially enabled by default and the HYPHENATIOND flag( P=) is not, enabling recognition of the flag is also necessary.E Hyphenation may be used to close up excessively long spacing between words.2 .IF .IF name .ELSE name .ENDIF name .IFNOT nameI These commands are used to exert conditional control over the processingG of segments of text and commands. The commands are entered as a groupI (i.e. .IF, .ELSE, .ENDIF), and each command uses the same name-parameterF (name) to both define a segment and serve as the basis for a true or QF false test. Test values are specified by the user via a command lineI switch (/VARIANT=(name1,name2,...). A switch (/DEBUG) is also availableJ to force RUNOFF to ignore the conditional commands allowing all segmented information to be processed. 2 .INDENT .IDENT n .I n .LEFT nI This command causes a .BREAK and forces the *next* line of text to beginD at a column defined by a number-parameter (n). If -n is used, n isE subtracted from the current value of the left margin. Wh Ren n is not= specified the current value of the paragraph indent is used.2 .INDEX .INDEX text2 .X text2G This command causes the text-parameter (text2), directly following theF keyword, to be delivered to the index buffer. If the command is usedE without a SUBINDEX flag (>), text2 is delivered as a major item. IfF the command is used with one or more SUBINDEX flags, the command willG subdivide the entry into a major item and one or more minor items, allH of which will be insertSed in the buffer. The first letter of the majorI item is printed in upper case, while all other item letters are in lowerH case. These case rules can be altered by the use of appropriate flags. 2 .INDEXING .ENABLE INDEXING .EIX .DISABLE INDEXING .DIXJ These commands disable and reenable the operation of all indexing related commands and flags. 2 .JUSTIFY .JUSTIFY .J .NO JUSTIFY .NJG The .JUSTIFY command causes a .BREAK and then adjusts word spacing forF all s Tubsequent lines of text. The .NOJUSTIFY command causes a .BREAK and disables justification. 2 .LAYOUT .LAYOUT n1,n2 .LO n1,n2C This command causes a .BREAK and rearranges the header informationB (titles/subtitles and page numbers), for all subsequent pages, asG specified by the user. If n1 is 0, n2 is not allowed and the standardF page arrangement is used. If n1 is 1, the title/subtitle is centeredC and n2 is required. If n1 is 2, the title/subtitle is flush rightC (odd page) or U left (even page) and n2 is required. If n1 is 3, n2C is required and standard page numbering is used along with runningC page numbers; the latter being centered at the bottom of the page.C Using n2, n2 lines are reserved at the bottom of each page for theG page number; i.e. at least n-1 blank lines will occur between the last" line of text and the page number.2 .LEFT_MARGIN .LEFT MARGIN n .LM nB This command causes a .BREAK and then sets the left margin to theA value of the numbVer-parameter (n). The number used must be lessA than the right margin. If +n or -n is specified the left margin is adjusted relatively.2 .LIST .LIST n,"q" .LS n,"q" .END LIST n .ELS nD These commands initiate and terminate the formatting of a list, theB items of which are itemized by the use of .LIST ELEMENT commands.E An optional positive number-parameter (n) allows the user to specifyD blank lines of spacing before the first and between each subsequentD line of the lisWt. The actual number of blank lines skipped dependsG on the current spacing. If n is specified as 0, only the current lineF spacing will be used. An optional quoted-string parameter (q) allowsC the user to specify a common header, for each list element, with aF single character. This overrides the normal default of labelling theI list sequentially with numbers. Fancier labelling formats are availableG with the .DISPLAY LIST ELEMENTS command. An .TEST PAGE command using E the current p Xaragraph-test-page-value + 2 is performed. If the leftG margin is set to zero the .LIST command will set the margin to a valueG of 9. If the left margin is not zero, the .LIST command will add 4 toI the left margin. Any fill, justify, case, margin or spacing changes made! within the list are temporary. E The optional number-parameter (n) on the .END LIST command specifies2 the number of blank lines to skip after the list.2 .LIST_ELEMENT .LIST ELEMENT .LEA This command causesY a .BREAK and then formats the item number orA character for the associated line(s) of text. The .LIST ELEMENT= command must appear between a .LIST and a .END LIST command. 2 .LITERAL .LITERAL n .LT n .END LITERAL .ELE These commands initiate and terminate a literal block of informationD the length of which may be optionally defined by a positive number-F parameter (n). The .LITERAL command causes a .BREAK and provides theI output with exact copy of the input. This occurs uZntil the .END LITERALA command occurs. Within a literal block, execution of all RUNOFFE commands is disabled except for current left margin setting, currentE tab settings and current spacing value. Also, a right margin of 150 is used. 2 .LOWER_CASE .LOWER CASE .LC? This command forces a lower case lock and is equivalent to the LOWERCASE flag pair (\\).2 .NOTE .NOTE text1 .NT text1 .END NOTE n .EN nF These commands initiate and terminate the formatting of a forma [l note? within the text, that will be automatically titled, spaced and? centered. A .TEST PAGE command is performed using the currentF paragraph-test-page + 4. A .BREAK is done and two lines are skipped.B If a title is not entered, the capitalized word "NOTE" is output.E Following the title, one line is skipped and the text is centered byC issuing a .LEFT MARGIN +15 and a .RIGHT MARGIN +15, if the currentB left margin is zero, otherwise margins are set to +4 and -4. TheC text is filled \and justified. When the .END NOTE command is seen,E 2 lines are skipped unless n is specified, in which case n lines are skipped.2 .NUMBER_APPENDIX .NUMBER APPENDIX c .NMAX cF This command is used to force an initial identifying appendix letter,F following which the sequential lettering of subsequent new appendicesH will be resumed. The command also reenables page numbering. A count- G parameter (c) is used to specify the appendix letter(s) via letters orA digits. If the param ]eter consists of a digit or digits, the newD appendix sequence starts with the letter equivalence of the numericG value of the digit(s) (i.e. 1 to 26 = a to z and 27 to 52 = aa to zz).G Signed numbers may be used to affect a relative change. If a .CHAPTER@ command directly follows the .NUMBER APPENDIX command, the wordD "CHAPTER" will be changed to "APPENDIX" and the specified letter(s) will be affixed.2 .NUMBER_CHAPTER .NUMBER CHAPTER c .NMCH cG This command is used to specify a^ chapter number for the next .CHAPTERI command, following which the sequential numbering of subsequent chaptersI is resumed at the new level. The command also reenables page numbering.F A count-parameter (c) is used with the command to specify the chapterI number via digits. Signed numbers may also be used to affect a relativeE change. If a .APPENDIX command directly follows the .NUMBER CHAPTERB command, the word "APPENDIX" will be changed to "CHAPTER" and the" specified number will be _affixed.2 .NUMBER_INDEX .NUMBER INDEX .NMNDXE This command reenables page numbering and causes the word "Index" toC appear as a prefix for each page number of the index. The commandC typically precedes a .PRINT INDEX command to provide prefixed page@ numbering for those indices created without header information.H However, the initial page number used will be a continuation of currentG page numbering. In addition, the command causes all subsequent header4 level numbers to be pre`fixed with the word "Index".2 .NUMBER_PAGE .NUMBER PAGE c .NMPG c .NO NUMBER .NNMD The .NO NUMBER command disables page numbering (normal or running),C while the counting of pages continues and the .NUMBER PAGE commandA resumes page numbering. If the count-parameter (c) is specifiedC with the .NUMBER PAGE command a new page number can be forced. IfC c is a signed number the page counter will be modified relatively.2 .NUMBER_RUNNING .NUMBER RUNNING c .NMR cD This acommand is used to specify and/or modify running page numbers.B The parameters, restrictions and characteristics are identical to= those of the .NUMBER PAGE command. Running page numbers areA initiated by a .LAYOUT 3 command and only decimal numbers can be displayed.2 .NUMBER_SUBPAGE .NUMBER SUBPAGE c .NMSPG cF This command can force a new sequence of subpage lettering by the useH of a count parameter (c). A signed numeric value may be used to affect, a relative change in the subbpage lettering.2 .OVERSTRIKING .ENABLE OVERSTRIKING .EOV .DISABLE OVERSTRIKING .DOVC These commands disable and reenable overstriking. This feature isE enabled by default but the OVERSTRIKE flag (%) is not. Therefore itF is necessary to issue the .FLAGS OVERSTRIKE also, in order to perform overstriking.2 .PAGE .PAGE .PGG This command causes a .BREAK and then starts a new page if the current) page contains at least one line of text. 2 .PAGE_SIZE .PAGE SIZE n1 c,n2 .PS n1,n2G This command is used at the beginning of a file to specify the maximumH number of lines of text per page (n1) and the maximum width of the textI in columns (n2). The command causes a break and if a .NO PAGING commandD has been entered, resumes the paging mode. The length parameter isH optional with a range of 13 to 9999 and the width parameter is optionalF with a range of 3 to 150. If signed numbers are used the effects are+ relative. N1 defaults to 58 and n2 to 60. d2 .PAGING .PAGING .PA .NOPAGING .NPAD These commands disable and resume paging mode. When paging mode isH disabled, the remainder of the document, up to the next .PAGING commandG becomes a single page. This means that the document will not be splitF into numbered pages and header spacing will not be reserved. It does= not mean that the mechanical page breaks will be eliminated. 2 .PARAGRAPH .PARAGRAPH n1,n2,n3 .P n1,n2,n3F This command causes a .BREAK and then forms an eindependent paragraph,@ using the text that follows the command. The command has three optional parameters.H The positive n1 value (paragraph-indent) specifies the number of indent, spaces for the first line of the paragraph.G The negative n1 value (negative-indent) can be used to specify spacing to the left of the left margin. H A positive n2 value (paragraph-spacing) may be any number (including 0)E and specifies the number of blank lines that will be skipped between paragraphs.fJ A negative n2 value (paragraph-skip) specifies the number of blank lines J up from the bottom of the page upon which the first line of the paragraph will appear.J The n3 value (paragraph-test-page) specifies the number of line that mustI be available on the page to fully accommodate the paragraph. It is used3 as an argument to an automatic .TEST PAGE command.' N1 defaults to 5, n2 to 1 and n3 to 2. 2 .PERIOD .PERIOD .PR .NO PERIOD .NPRJ Following the punctuation cha gracter that appears at the end of a sentenceH or independent clause (i.e. period, semi-colon, colon or question mark)J a double space is output by default. This occurs only if fill is enabledI and the punctuation character is followed by either a space or an end ofB line. These command enable and disable the double space feature.2 .PRINT INDEX .PRINT INDEX .PXE This command causes a .BREAK, forces two blank lines and outputs theD entire content of the index buffer, in alphabetical o hrder, as a oneH column index. Entries are printed against the left margin with regularE line spacing and in alphabetical order, a blank line is left betweenC entries having different first letters. Those entries requiring aF reference are directly followed by a dotted line and an appended page= number; any additional page numbers are separated by commas. 2 .REPEAT .REPEAT n,"q" .RPT n,"q"A This command allows a string of up to 50 characters defined by a@ quoted-string-parameter (q)i to be printed n times. If .FILL is? enabled, horizontal replication will occur otherwise, vertical replication will occur. 2 .REQUIRE .REQUIRE "q" .REQ "q"I This command allows the user to request that an externally located file,E specified by the quoted-string-parameter (q) be processed as part of* the input. Required files may be nested.2 .RIGHT .RIGHT n;text1 .R n;text1G This command causes a .BREAK and then forces the last character of theH text-parameter (text1) to j be positioned to the left of the right marginF by a value specified by a number-parameter (n). If n is not present,H the right margin is used. The .RIGHT command only affect the line that directly follows the command.2 .RIGHT_MARGIN .RIGHT MARGIN n .RM nI This command causes a .BREAK and then sets the right margin to the valueG of the number-parameter (n). The characters on a line will not extendI beyond the right margin setting, unless they are extended via a .LITERALF command k. If n is not specified, the right margin will default to theF page width. If a signed number is specified the right margin will beD adjusted relatively. If the new value is greater than the originalD page width setting, the page width is reset to the new right marginI value. If a .CHAPTER or a .STANDARD command is issued, the right marginD is reset to the page width value defined by the .PAGE SIZE command,- otherwise the default value (60) is assumed. 2 .SEND_TOC .SEND TOC n,text1 .lSTC n,text1H This command causes the text (text1) to appear in the table of contentsI file (.RNT). The text may be a string of RUNOFF commands, flags, or anyI information that the user desires to insert in the table for enhancement< purposes. The number-parameter n should be specified as 0. 2 .SET_DATE .SET DATE n1,n2,n3 .SDT n1,n2,n3 .SET TIME n1,n2,n3 .STM n1,n2,n3D These commands cause a .BREAK and set a current, or specified, dateI or time. By using signed values may mbe adjusted or specified; otherwiseI current values are used. Once the values are set, a SUBSTITUTE flag ($)C may then be used to obtain any or all of the setting (e.g. $$date,$ $$time or $$year, etc.) as desired.. The n1 parameter sets day (dd) or hours (hh).3 The n2 parameter sets month (mmm) or minutes (mm).1 The n2 parameter sets year (yy) or seconds (ss).2 .SET_PARAGRAPH .SET PARAGRAPH n1,n2,n3 .SPR n1,n2,n3A This command allows the user to pre-define optional values for an; .PARAGRAPH command without causing paragraphing to occur. 2 .SKIP .SKIP n .S nF This command causes a .BREAK and then inserts a number of blank linesE depending on the number-parameter (n) and current line spacing value& (sp). The number of lines skipped is (n * sp) + sp - 1.G If a .SKIP command is entered so that it coincides with the generationG of a new page the command will have no effect. If -n is specified theE value indicates how far up from the bottom of tohe page the next line of text will appear. 2 .SPACING .SPACING n .SP nH This command causes a .BREAK and then defines new vertical line spacingH for the text as specified by n. The range of values for n is 1 through 5. The default value is 1. 2 .STANDARD .STANDARD n .SD nC This command causes a .BREAK, reenables the Paging mode (and otherC defaults), and sets certain page size parameters. The left marginE is set to zero, the right margin to the current page width and fi pll,H justify and single spacing are enabled. An optional signed or unsignedD number-parameter(n) may be specify the page width the user desires.C However, for certain values of n (60 and 70) specific page lengths (58 and 74) will be set.2 .STYLE_HEADERS .STYLE HEADERS n1,n2,n3 .STHL n1,n2,n3E This command causes a .BREAK and reformats the header levels, and/or@ the case, as specified by three number-parameters (n1, n2, n3).F The n1 parameter forces a run-in format, normally onlqy used with .HL3F through .HL6, for all of the header levels that greater than or equal to n1. H The n2 parameter capitalizes the text for all of the header levels that! are greater than or equal to n2.G The n3 parameter capitalizes the first letter of all the header levels& that are greater than or equal to n3. 2 .SUBPAGE .SUBPAGE .SPG .END SUBPAGE .ESG Both of these commands cause a .BREAK and start a new page, while theyC initiate and terminate subpaging. When subparging is initiated, a J paging mode with an altered numbering scheme; that is, the incrementationI of page-numbers is supressed and the letter sequence is appended to each change page. 2 .SUBTITLE .SUBTITLE text1 .ST text1 .NO SUBTITLE .NSTD The .SUBTITLE command causes a .BREAK and takes the text-parameter B (text1) as the subtitle. The text will appear at the left margin> and on the second header line of every page except the first.? However, the subtitle can appear on the s first page if a .FIRST? TITLE command is added. The .NO SUBTITLE command disables the subtitle feature. 2 .TABS_STOPS .TAB STOPS n1,n2,...,n32 .TS n1,n2,...,n32J There are 32 tab stop settings available to the user. The default values@ occur in consecutive multiples of eight and each setting may beI sequentially invoked by successive TAB's. The .TAB STOPS command allowsE an alternative value or list of values to be specified via signed or, unsigned number-parameters (n1,n2,...t,n32).2 .TOC .ENABLE TOC .ETC .DISABLE TOC .DTCI These commands disable and enable the generation of a table of contents. 2 .TEST_PAGE .TEST PAGE n .TP nG This command causes a .BREAK and then skips to a new page if there are2 fewer than n lines available on the current page.2 .TITLE .TITLE text1 .T text1I This command causes a .BREAK and takes the text parameter (text1) as theH title. The text will appear in the left margin and on the first headerH line uof every page except the first (unless the .FIRST TITLE command is used. 2 .UNDERLINE .ENABLE UNDERLINE .EUN .DISABLE UNDERLINE .DULG These commands disable and reenable the underline feature which, along3 with the UNDERLINE flag (&), is initially enabled. 2 .UPPER_CASE .UPPER CASE .UCH This command affects a no-case-change. Therefore, it will lock a fixedH case terminal in its normal upper case mode. This command has no value for a variable case terminal. 2 .VARIAvBLE .VARIABLE name flag1,flag2 .VR name flag1,flag2 G The .VARIABLE command is used in conjunction with the /DEBUG switch toB allow the user to not only output the text, defined by a group ofC conditional commands, but to label each segment as to its relativeD position in the IF-ELSE-ENDIF structure. The IF portion of segmentI 'name' is labeled with flag1 and the ELSE portion is labeled with flag2. 2 Defaults .PAGE SIZE 58,60 .NUMBER PAGE .LEFT MARGIN 0 .RIGHT MARGwIN 60 .SPACING 1 .FILL .JUSTIFY .TAB STOPS 9,17,25,...2 Display-Descriptor-ParameterJ A display-descriptor-parameter is a one or two character descriptor code.J The codes are used with .DISPLAY commands to change the default numbering# format. The codes are as follows: D Decimal numbering O Octal numbering H Hexidecimal numbering RU Upper case roman numerals RL Lower case roman numerals RM Mixed case roman numerals LU Upper case letters LL x Lower case letters LM Mixed case letters2 FlagsH A flag is a uniquely named character that is used to perform a specificI operation (e.g. underlining). The specified operation is performed whenI the character is entered in the text and recognized as a flag by RUNOFF.J The operation must also be enabled by default or via an associated RUNOFFI command. When a character is recognized as a flag it will not appear inJ the output, even if its operation is disabled. The flags can be disa ybledJ and enabled with the .FLAGS command. The .FLAGS command also allows flag characters to be redefined. 3 ACCEPT (_)G This flag is enabled by default and causes any character that directlyF follows it to be accepted as normal text. When the flag is used, theE affected character will be taken as is and no automatic spacing willB be added. For abbreviations, this provides a method for enteringF periods that are not miscontrued as end of sentence punctuation. ForD underlining, the flag z can be used to force the acceptance of a real space. 3 BOLD (*)H The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. A single characterD occurrence of the flag causes the next character to be bolded. TheF BOLD flag may be paired with the UPPERCASE flag (^*), to lock bolding5 and with the LOWERCASE flag (\*), to unlock bolding. 3 BREAK (|)F The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. The flag is usedF to indicate the logical break(s) in a sequence of related characters,5 such {as a mathematical formula or hyphenated phrase.3 CAPITALIZE (<)E The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. The flag causesE all the letters in the word directly following it to be capitalized,A with the exception of any letters that are flagged by an ACCEPT, UPPERCASE or LOWERCASE flag. 3 COMMENT (!)A This flag is enabled by default and can be used in place of the C .COMMENT command to insert user comments in the .RNO file. If theF flag is to be inserted at the beginning | of a line it must be preceded# by a column one CONTROL flag (.!). 3 CONTROL (.)E This flag is enabled by default and is the command prefix character.3 HYPHENATE (=)D The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. If the flag isG inserted between one or more syllables of a word, RUNOFF is allowed to$ hyphenate the word at these places.3 LOWERCASE (\)E This flag is enabled by default, and causes the letter that directlyF follows it to appear in lower case. The LOWERCASE flag m}ay be paired as follows:4 With an UNDERLINE flag (^&), to unlock underlining./ With a BOLD flag (^*), to turn unlock bolding.3 OVERSTRIKE (%)D The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. If the flag isH inserted between two characters, the first character is overstruck withF the second character. This allows characters to be produced that are not normally available. 3 PERIOD (+)G The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. The flag causes aC double-space to be in ~serted directly following any character. ForF instance, the flag may be used to insert a double-space following endD of sentence punctuation that is unconventional (i.e., not a period,7 semi-colon, colon, question-mark or exclamation mark). 3 SPACE (#)G This flag is enabled by default, and allows an unexpandable space (notC affected by justification) to appear in the output for every flag F character inserted into the input file. The flag may directly follow; an underline flag (&#) to u nderline an unexpandable space.3 SUBINDEX (>)E Although this flag is initially enabled, it is only operable when itC is used to delimit parameters from an .INDEX, .SUBINDEX, or .ENTRYC command for an index. It causes all the parameter characters thatB directly follow it to be included in the index until the end of aD parameter is indicated by the appearance of a semi-colon, an end of line or another SUBINDEX flag.3 SUBSTITUTE ($)F The recognition of this flag is initially disabled. This flag can be& be used in one of the following ways: $$Date DD MMM YY $$Time HH:MM:SS $$Year YYYY $$Month (spelled out) $$Day DD $$Hours HH $$Minutes MM $$Seconds SS3 UNDERLINE (&)F This flag is enabled by default, and its single occurrence causes theH next character to be underlined. The UNDERLINE flag may be paired withD the UPPERCASE flag (^&) to lock underlining, and with the LOWERCASE? flag (\&) to unlock underlining. An unexpandable space may be: under lined by pairing the UNDERLINE and SPACE flags (&#).3 UPPERCASE (^)F This flag is enabled by default and will capitalize any single letterG that directly follows it, but has no effect if the following character> is not a letter. The UPPERCASE flag may be paired as follows:8 With a CAPITALIZE flag (^<), to lock capitalization on.5 With an UNDERLINE flag (^&), to lock underlining on.+ With a BOLD flag (^*), to lock bolding on.2 TOCHTOC is a DIGITAL Standard Runoff utility for creating a table ofHcontents. See the VAX-11 DIGITAL Standard Runoff (DSR) User's Guide for(complete instructions on the use of TOC.HTo create input for TOC (.BTC file), give the /CONTENTS qualifier when running DSR.HTOC has no command line; it gets its initial input by asking a series ofHquestions. TOC is installed as a foreign utility. To use it, set up a:symbol definition such as the following in your LOGIN.COM: $ TOC :== $TOC 3 ExampleHBelow is an example of the use of TOC. represents the userpressing the Return key. toc TOC, Version V2.0 Specify input file: test, Varying header-level indents? [Y/N] (N) y$ Running page counter? [Y/N] (N) 6 Specify deepest header level to include: [#] (99) 3 Specify deepest header level for which to print- trailing dots and page number: [#] (99) ; Keep chapter/header underlining and bolding? [Y/N] (N) , Do you want headers numbered? [Y/N] (Y) FINISHED 3 QuestionsHTOC has no command line; it gets its initial input by asking the follow-Hing series of questions. Square brackets [ ] enclose allowed values forHyour answers to these questions. If you respond simply with a carriageHreturn, you get the default shown in parentheses ( ). If you respond toHany question after the first one with CTRL/Z, TOC takes default answersHto all further questions. Responding with CTRL/Z to the input-file.question causes TOC to quit and return to DCL.Q1. Specify input file:,Q2. Varying header-level indents? [Y/N] (N)$Q3. Running page counter? [Y/N] (N)6Q4. Specify deepest header level to include: [#] (99)3Q5. Specify deepest header level for which to print, trailing dots and page number: [#] (99);Q6. Keep chapter/header underlining and bolding? [Y/N] (N),Q7. Do you want headers numbered? [Y/N] (Y)4 Q1 Specify input file: The default file-t ype is .BTC.4 Q2( Varying header-level indents? [Y/N] (N)H A 'Y' response causes each header level to be indented two spaces more2 than the preceding level, enhancing readability.4 Q3 Running page counter? [Y/N] (N)H A 'Y' response causes running page numbers (1, 2, 3, ...) in allH table-of-contents entries. Running page numbers are the numbers thatH appear (enclosed in hyphens) at the bottoms of pages only if you spe-H cify .LAYOUT 3,n in the DSR input file. By means of this question, youH can specify that running page numbers be used in the table of contentsB regardless of whether you ever said .LAYOUT 3,n in the document.4 Q42 Specify deepest header level to include: [#] (99)H All header levels numerically greater than your response are excludedH from the table of contents. The default is that all header levels are included.4 Q50 Specify deepest header level for which to print( trailing dots and page number: [#] (99)H Of the header leve ls chosen in the previous question (Q4) to appear inH the table of contents, those numerically greater than your response toH this question appear without dots or page numbers. The default is that: all header levels are output with dots and page numbers.4 Q67 Keep chapter/header underlining and bolding? [Y/N] (N)H A 'Y' response causes all user-specified underlining and bolding ofH chapter and header titles to appear in the table of contents. By de-H fault, such underlining and bolding is dropped from the table of contents.4 Q7( Do you want headers numbered? [Y/N] (Y)H A 'N' response inhibits printing of header level numbers in the table of contents.2 TCXHTCX is a DIGITAL Standard Runoff utility for creating a two-columnHindex. See the VAX-11 DIGITAL Standard Runoff (DSR) User's Guide for(complete instructions on the use of TCX.HTo create input for TCX (.BIX file), specify the /INDEX qualifier when running DSR.HTCX has no command line; it gets its initial input by asking a series ofHquestions. TCX is installed as a foreign utility. To use it, set up a:symbol definition such as the following in your LOGIN.COM: $ TCX :== $TCX 3 ExampleHBelow is an example of the use of TCX. represents the userpressing the Return key. tcx TCX, Version V2.0 Specify input file: test Additional input? [Y/N] (N) y Specify input file: part2 Additional input? [Y/N] (N) % Running page counters? [Y/N] (N) 9 Specify number of index lines per page: [13-80] (55) 52D Specify reserve count for first page: [0 - ] (0) 5C Specify a single line of input for DSR: [Text or .REQ ""] .req 'indextop.rno' FINISHED 3 QuestionsHTCX has no command line; it gets its initial input by asking the follow-Hing series of questions. Square brackets [ ] enclose allowed values forHyour answers to these questions. If you respond simply with a carriageHreturn, you get the default shown in parentheses ( ). If you respond toHany question after the first one with CTRL/Z, TCX takes default answersHto all further questions. Responding with CTRL/Z to the input-file.question causes TCX to quit and return to DCL.Q1. Specify input file: Q2. Additional input? [Y/N] (N)%Q3. Running page counters? [Y/N] (N)9Q4. Specify number of index lines per page: [13 -80] (55)DQ5. Specify reserve count for first page: [0 - ] (0)G The following question appears only if the response to Q5 is nonzero:E Q6. Specify a single line of input for DSR: [Text or .REQ ""]4 Q1 Specify input file:H The default extension is .BIX. The following question, Q2, makes itH possible to give several files as input to TCX. If you have multipleH .BIX files, enter them in the order you would like their corresponding' index entries to appear in the index.4 Q2 Additional input? [Y/N] (N)H Answer "Y" (yes) if you have additional files to be processed; in thatH case, question Q1 will appear again, allowing you to specify the nameH of the file. The Q1-Q2 sequence repeats until you answer Q2 in the negative.4 Q3! Running page counters? [Y/N] (N)H A 'Y' response causes running page numbers (1, 2, 3, ...) in all indexH entries. Running page numbers are the numbers that appear (enclosed inH hyphens) at the bottom s of pages only if you specify .LAYOUT 3,n inH the DSR input file. By means of this question, you can specify thatH running page numbers be used in the index regardless of whether you( ever said .LAYOUT 3,n in the document.4 Q45 Specify number of index lines per page: [13-80] (55)H Default is 55 (which corresponds to a page length setting of 58 withH the .PAGE SIZE command). Implicit in this default index page size areH some assumptions about the formatting defaults in effect: .HEADERS are0 on, .SPACING is 1, and .LAYOUT 0 is in effect.4 Q5@ Specify reserve count for first page: [0 - ] (0)> If your response is null or zero, the index is now produced.H Otherwise, the number of lines specified are reserved for an index7 heading which is solicited by the following question:B Specify a single line of input for DSR: [Text or .REQ ""]H Enter a DSR source line (which can be a .REQUIRE command). The textH produced by thi s line is inserted at the top of the first page of the index.ww?ى̋ 1 SETMODEME SETMODEM allows the RTS and DTR bits on ports 0 and 1 of a DMF32Bto be turned on. This is necessary if one wants to 1) connect a aDlocal terminal to port 0 or 1 of a DMF32, 2)use only a 4 wire cable,Cand 3)Use a special purpose pigtail on port 0 and 1 to strap one ofAthe forced high lines (RTS or DTR) to Carrier Detect. If carrierGDetect is not high, terminals will not talk to a DMF32 on ports 0 or 1.8 To use SETMODEM define it as a foreign command, ie. $SETMODEM:=$SETMODEMand $SETMODEM ddcu:where@ ddcu: is the PHYSICAL device name of port 0 or 1 of a DMF32, ie TXA0: or TXA1:ww@k*g1 SETUIC< SETUIC allows users to display their current UIC and if the@ user has GROUP, WORLD, or SYSPRV privilege to change their UIC.? If the user has GROUP privilege, the UIC may be changed withinA the group. If the user has WORLD privilege, the user may change> both group and member number provided the group is > a preset? minimum value (currently set at 311). If the user has SYSPRV, any UIC is legal.7 SETUIC is defined in SYSLOGIN.COM as a FOREIGN command& SETUIC:==$SYS$SYSDISK:[SYSUTL]SETUICC and is installed with CMKRNL privilege during sysboot so all users can use it.$ SETUIC -> Displays UIC0 SETUIC [ggg,mmm] -> Change UIC to [ggg,mmm]0 SETUIC ggg,mmm -> Change UIC to [ggg,mmm]2 SOURCE_LOCATION Found on [SYSUTL] directory.ww`YP1 SPELLA The SPELL command reviews the spelling of words within a textFfile. Because of the complexities and subtleties of English usage, the@command will not necessarily flag all misspelled words. In someFinstances it may even flag correctly spelled words as incorrect. WhileBsuch errors will not usually occur, proper nouns, highly technicalDwords, and abbreviations will probably be flagged erroneously unlessBprovided for i ` %u1 LN03E RUNOFF (as of VMS V4.1) does not directly support the LN03 LasereFPrinter. Since bolding can not be done in the same manner on the LN03Cas on a ribbon-printer, some other method (temporary) was needed to Hsupprot bolding on the LN03. To do this we use RUNOFF's support for the!LN01 printer by using the command  t RUNOFF /DEVICE=LN01 HCWhen this is done, the output file, has escape sequences to controlHFbolding and underlining, however, these esca pe sequences are incorrectFfor use with the LN03 printer. The LN03 command is used to convert a DLN01 RUNOFF output file into an LN03 compatible output file. To use LN03, define $ LN03:=$SYS$SYSVPWFILES:LN03 HThen LN03 will produce an output file with the name of Hthe input file with an extension .LN3 in which the LN01 escape sequences&have been converted to LN03 sequences.wwcts aGfile type of TXT appended to the first part of the file name. However,Fany correct file name (for example, MYFILE.WOW) can be used as long as4file types other than TXT are completely specified. 2 WORDFILEE WORDFILE refers to a file of words that would probably not appear?in a dictionary, such as proper nouns, places, technical words,Dabbreviations, nonstandard spellings, etc. If this parameter is notDspecified then the program will assume a default file which contains3words that would be classified in these categories. 3 CREATING= Creating a word file is relatively simple. First build aBdictionary file containing all of the words you wish to use. This)file must adhere to the following rules:  no lower case letters no special characters  one word per line no blank lines no spaces5The word file is created with the following commands:$$ SET COMMAND SYS$VPWFILES:WORDS.CLD3$ WORDS dictionaryfile[,dictionaryfile...] wordfileCWhen multiple dictionary files are used (by separating the name ofEeach one with a comma) they will be be merged properly. However, onlyBone word file may be specified. For dictionary files, the defaultBfile extension is DIC; for word files, it is WRD. Generally, oneEwould wish to include the words in the default word file in one's ownBword file. To do this, the dictionary file ENGL:DEFAULT is used. 2 LIMITATIONS USER BEE WEAR!!!EA soft wear package witch checks spelling is no mower than a weigh toBverify. That the weird, as it appears inn the taxed is also in theAstored file. It can knot correct arrows in punctuation ore usage:Aand it will not fined words witch are mis-used butt spelled rite.AFour example, this paragraph wood bee past by most such programs,?even though it has mini flaws. Their fore, the message is that@proof-reading is knot eliminated by using such a package, and isberry much reek wired. 2 Qualifiers&The SPELL command takes the qualifiers 5 /[NO]CHARACTERS /[NO]CORRECT /[NO]ECHO /[NO]LISTING  /[NO]RIGOR /[NO]STATISTICS /CHARACTERS  /CHARACTERS /NOCHARACTERS (D)E The character parameter allows the user to skip the processing ofKlines that begin with any one of a set of specified characters. By default-processing of special characters is disabled.For example, the command: $ SPELL/CHARACTERS=; MYFILEFwould cause the file MYFILE.TXT to be examined, using the default word9file, and ignoring all lines beginning with a semicolon. /ECHO /ECHO /NOECHO (D)D This qualifier instructs the program to echo all of the lines inGthe text file to the listing. By default, all lines in the listing arenot echoed to the listing./LISTING[=file name] /LISTING[=file_name] /NOLISTING (D)F This qualifier directs the output of the command to a file insteadDof sending it directly to the terminal. If the LISTING qualifier isFused without specifying a file name, the name of the listing file willBthe same as that of the textfile except that its file type will beFchanged to LIS. If the LISTING qualifier is used with a file name butEwithout a specified file type, the file type will also be supplied byEthe program as LIS. By default, /LISTING is disabled and all outputis directed to the terminal./CORRECT /CORRECT /NOCORRECT (D)J This qualifier gives the user a chance to interactively correct words Jwhich are flagged by the spell program as incorrect. The corrections are Kmade by the user through the EDT editor, This option causes the other SPELLGoptions to be set to their default values except the RIGOR option. TheGcorrection option can be invoked only on a VT100 or VT52 terminal. By Idefault, the /CORRECT qualifier is disabled and errors are flagged in theoutput listing./RIGOR /RIGOR /NORIGOR (D)L This qualifier rigorously checks the spelling of the text. By default, it is disabled. /STATISTICS /STATISTICS (D) /NOSTATISTICSJ This qualifier prints the final statistical summary for the run of theLprogram. /NOSTATISTICS disables the display of the final statistics output summary.ww g1 SYE ? SYE is the VAX/VMS error log report formatter. To run it typeBMC SYE. The error log files are on [SYSERR]. The current file isLERRLOG.SYS but it is currently open by the error logging task and should notLbe read as it stands. If you try to read it and ERRFMT tries to write to itGand can't (you have it open), it will create a new error log file, thusJscrewing up our automatic journaling of errorlog files for field service. 7Thus, to get a reading of the current error log status;" 1. $RENAME ERRLOG.SYS ERRLOG.OLD? 2. $APPEND ERRLOG.OLD 'month''year'.SYS (example JAN82.SYS).* 3. $MC SYE (and use ERRLOG.OLD as input) 4. $DELETE ERRLOG.OLD;* 2 OPTIONS) When SYE runs you are allowed to specify0 1) Input file Defaults to [SYSERR]ERRLOG.OLD4 2) Output file Defaults to SYS$OUTPUT. If not a & terminal, defaults to FOR002.DAT.+ 3) OPTIOS Defaults to ROLL-UP type report2 R[oll-up] - Totals in each catagory of events.- C[ryptic] - Contents of Device registers.1 B[rief] - Brief report of nature of errors.0 S[tandard]- Full report of nature of errors.) system events, and config changes.= 4) Device name Defaults to all devices and catagories. May. either be a device name (DRAn, etc) or a - catagory type (SY - system events, CP - / errors other than for devices, CO - config. changes). Preceeding the input with a '-'% sign will exclude that catagory.> 5) After time Time to log after which reporting is to begin." Defaults to beginning of log.< 6) Before time Time to log before reporting ends. Defaults to end of log.ww 1 TERMLOC2 TTA0,TTA0: (9600,9600) LA120 EIA VAX Line printer2 TTA12TTA1: ( 300, 300) LA120 EIA Letter Quality printer2 TTA2*TTA2: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA MarkB's office2 TTA38TTA3: (9600,9600) VT10I Ì 1 TERMLOCT2 TTA07TTA0: (9600,9600) LA120 EIA Printer, FED diagnostic bayT2 TTA1BTTA1: ( 300, 300) LA120 EIA Letter Quality printer, FED diag. bay2 TTA2/TTA2: (9600,9600) LA36 EIA Dick Bird's lab area 2 TTA3;TTA3: (9600,9600) VT102 EIA Bob Schroeder's office/SEL/DBISD2 TTA49TTA4: (4800,4800) LA36 EIA Tracer Northern MCA, SEL/DBISB2 TTA5.TTA5: (4800,4800) VT102 EIA Laser Control Room2 TTA66TTA6: (9600,9600) VT52 EIA Engineering Electronics Lab2 TTA77TTA7: (9600,9600) Modem EIA Auto answer modem, VAX Roomo2 TTB02TTB0: (9600,9600) VT131 EIA/20 Gil Wuttke's office2 TTB1(TTB1: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA/20 **empty**2 TTB22TTB2: (9600,9600) TEK4014 EIA/20 DMS PDP11-34 room2 TTB30TTB3: (9600,9600) VT240 EIA/20 DMS PDP11-34 room2 TTB4)TTB4: (9600,9600) VT100 20ma DMS SEM roomo2 TTB5.TTB5: (1200,1200) LA120 20ma Printer, SEM room2 TTB6*TTB6: ( 300, 300) LA36 20ma DMS 11/34 Room2 TTB7+TTB7: (9600,9600) VT100 20ma DMS 11/34 roomo2 TTC0/TTC0: (4800,4800) VT100 EIA Alex Glass's officec2 TTC10TTC1: (2400,2400) VT100 EIA Linda Powers' office2 TTC2:TTC2: (9600,9600) VT102 EIA Jef Tarvin/Paul Rocket offices2 TTC3$TTC3: (4800,4800) NBI EIA NBI Port 12 TTC41TTC4: (4800,4800) VT102 EIA Dave Solomon's officec2 TTC53TTC5: (9600,9600) VT102 EIA George Charatis' officec2 TTC64TTC6: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Dorthy McGarrah's office2 TTC7.TTC7: (4800,4800) VT100 EIA Lou Erwin's office2 TXA0.TXA0: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Laser Control ) TEK4014 EIA Diagnostic RoomwwJ+g 1 TESTFILED Determines if a named file exists, without cluttering up SYS$OUTPUTJ with diagnostic messages, leaving $STATUS and $SEVERITY in a small set ofH known states. TESTFILE is a "foreign" command, so you must define it as5 a symbol (done in SYSLOGON.CMD automatically), viz.:: $TESTFILE:==@SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSMGR.CMDFIL]TESTFILE.COMFormat TESTFILE file-specResult5 o If file-spec exists, $STATUS = $SEVERITY = 1 .H o If file-spec does not exist, but the command was well formatted,) then $STATUS = 3 (informational).J The testfile command procedure replaces the task doing the same thingGunder V2.5. The task no longer works so we are using a simpler commandLprocedure to achieve most (but not all) of the functionality of the previoustask. 2 Exit_status9 For successfull completion of TESTFILE, $STATUS may take$ the following (hexidecimal) values:" 1 - normal (file found) 3 - File not found via F$SEARCHJ errors as Invalid-Keyword or such RMS errors as Invalid-Directory-Syntax.2 Uses8 To delete a file, without messages if it doesn't exist: $TESTFILE FILE.BAD, $IF '$STATUS .EQ. 1 THEN DELETE FILE.BAD;*D To run a command procedure which makes a file, but only if the file does not already exist: $TESTFILE NEEDED.DAT# $IF '$STATUS .EQ. 3 THEN @MAKEFIL 2 Parameters file-specE A legal file specification without any wild cards (*). Defaults are? supplied by either (a) the current default device/directory or (b) the /DEFAULT qualifier.ww>a 1 TVGE TVG is a powerful utility program used to create neat, professional-D looking view-graphs. A series of commands used to make a slide mayD be saved and re-used or modified. HCS must be installed for TVG to work. The commands are:& BYE Logs you out of TVG, same as ^Z.0 CLEAR Clears all text and box definitions; the default values are unchanged.1 E E Iu1 REFi; REF is used by VAXnet to reformat files. Type HELP VAXnetn for further information. ww Modify the alignment of TEXTl to d, where1 D = 0. (LEFT) AND D = 1. (RIGHT). Default: d=0.- MB l Draw up to 32 connected line segments.> MC [l] n Modify the character set of TEXTl to n. Default n=3.E MO [l] d Modify the orientation of TEXTl to d degrees. Default: d=0.2 MP l Modify the position of TEXTl to that of the. crosshair input. The alignment can also be, "Iu1 RESFOR Please see HELP RESEQUENCEwwl] d Modify the size of TEXTl to d inches. Default: d=.25.) MT l Replace TEXT l with new text.0 N n Place n ticks on right side during REDRAW. R Redraw with identifiers. S t Save as file named t. U t Unsave from file named t.' where [l] is the tag letter identifier F To generate a final viewgraph and copy (if TVG is a foreign command,  type:# $TVG filename.ext[/switches]D Where "filename.ext" is.Iu 1 RESEQUENCEH Resequence labels, by program unit, of VAX-11 compatible FORTRAN code.H All program units (e.g., subroutines), contained in a single file will be resequenced separately.V Format: RESEQUENCE [file-spec] 2 Parameters file-spec H Specifies name of FORTRAN source file to be resequenced. ResequencedH code is written to a new version under the same file name(s). DefaultD file type is "FOR". All VMS wildcard specifications are permitted. 2 Qualifiers/INCREMENT[=n] (D=20) H Incremental difference to be used in generating new labels. ThisC qualifier has a maximum value of 99 and must be greater than zero. /FORMAT_LABEL[=n]tH Starting label at which "FORMAT" statements are to begin in eachH program unit. Must be decimal integer having value less than 50001.H The value must be large enough so as to not interfere with the labeling+ of other FORTRAN statements. For example,n" /FORMAT_LABEL=8000 2 Limitations> 1. No VAX-11 FORTRAN keyword (e.g. DO, IF, READ, etc.) may beA split and continued on the next line. Any part of the statement = following the keyword may be continued but RESFOR may changer the continuation break.= 2. Arbitrary limits have been set as to the number of labelsi@ that may be resequenced at once. See first few lines of source5 for parameters that may be reset to increase limits.; 3. No more than 32767 source code statements may be in anyo one file RESEQUENCE'd.EB 4. Comments nested within continued executable FORTRAN statementsB will produce unpredictable results. Non-executing FORTRAN (e.g.,B FORMAT, DATA, EQUIVALENCE) may be commented without reprecussion.2 Use1To use RESEQUENCE, make the following assignment:e1 RES*EQUENCE:==$SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]:RESFOR.EXEl 2 Location* RESFOR was taken from [DECUS.VAX83A.BALL]ww> will appear. Your first command will be either% E to enter a line of text, or4 MB  չ 1 CNVSIX?Converts an ND SIX spectral file (produced by NDACP/SIX) to thenstandard spectral file format. dFormat: ( CNVSIX input_file_spec header_file_spec Examples:l CNVSIX S015 STD CNVSIX/EFF=D01 SIX HEAD e 2 Parametersinput_file_specsCSpecifies the name of the the ND SIX spectral file to be converted.eheader_file_spec<Specifies the name of the spectral header file to be used in&constructing the new spectral header. 2 Qualifiers /EFF=optiond1 FORTV4@ VAX Fortran V4.0 is an extended (yet further) implementation ofJFortran-77. Specifically, this release is designed to produce yet furtherFlevels of optimized code (runs faster), correct inconsistencies in theFway VAX Fortran and PDP-11 F77 worked (error trapping), and to provide?support for the use of the Common Data Dictionary. This latterlDfeature provide Fortran with a Pascal-Like record structure in whichCa record could be defined as being composed of a number of discreten elements.nBA number of new options on the command line are possible which areCdocumented in the help library. Also documented for the first timemBin the fortran help library, is detailed information on how to useFFortran statements and functions. Basically, the VAX Fortran language*summary reference card is now a help file.Potential Problems.oEBecause the compiler further optimizes code, users using AST routines Ato update variables in other sections of code may need to change .?the routines to explicitly tell the compiler that the variablesHbeing updated in the AST routines are VOLATILE and should not be subjectAto optimization. One statement per module will fix this problem.eDIf you have an AST routine that you are worried about, please let meknow (Jim Downward).wwMT B command is used to modify the text string tagged 'B'.)D The default Hershey characteristics for entry are character set #3,E orientation of 0 degrees with the X axis, left-justifieCSpecifies the source of the efficiency information. "option" can berEeither a file specification for an efficiency file, or DEFAULT, whichc=provides demonstration efficiency information. If /EFF is notgGspecified, the efficiency information is obtained from the header file.s/OUTPUT=output_file_specDSpecifies the output spectral file. If /OUTPUT is not specified, theFoutput will have the same name as the input, with a file type of SPE. ww) or 1. (right- justified).7 If the command isiÌ 1 COPIERSdK TEKTRONIX 4631 FEX Diagnostic lab own8E Storage screen hard copy unit sn/id B 020384 KMS # A 9676tK TEKTRONIX 4632 FEX Diagnostic lab own E Video screen hard copy unit sn/id B 204524 KMS # A 9912Xww9600,9600) VT100 EIA J. Downward's office own 9 DEC VT240 Graphics terminal K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A qÌ1 MISC3 DEC MODEM DF02-AA sn AS 85565 ww0306JH8 ownLK DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn TAF 5808 own3 TXA5: VAX02 TT14KTT14: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA MarkB's office ownTL DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (67)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K34 own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 33207224vÌ1 TERMID VAX TERMINALSR3OPA0: DEC LA38-GA sn PN 22929wDTTA0: DEC LA120-DA sn PND 6499 KMS # A10215/TTA1: DIABLO 630 sn 5183 TTA2: Nuclear data ND624TTA3: DEC VT102 sn TA 020120TTA4: Tracer Northern74TTA5: DEC VT102 sn TA 023622TTA6: MICRO TERM MIME 2A4;TTA7: BELL MODEM DATA SET 212A DATA PHONE 300/1200 CTTB0: DEC VT102 sn 18317 KMS # A8836TTTB1: **empty** 3TTB2: DEC VT100-AA sn WF 57053 (TTB3: DEC VT100 CTTB4: DEC VT100-AA sn AB 16312 KMS # A9809 DTTB5: DEC LA120-DA sn PND 1446 KMS # A10214(TTB6: DEC LA36 (TTB7: DEC VT100 ;TTC0: DEC VT102 sn TA 03901 3TTC1: DEC VT100-AA sn WF 5705303TTC2: DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 7069 TTC3: NBI NBI 3TTC4: DEC VT102 sn TA 045869TTC5: DEC VT240 Graphics terminal 6 -- DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40700NN85 -- DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 460BT25 3 -- DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39819 3TTC6: DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 7118 3TTC7: DEC VT100-AA sn ABC 6442T3TXA0: DEC VT100-AA Room2 TXA14TXA1: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Mark Buoniconto's office2 TXA2.TXA2: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Pam Vavra's office2 TXA30TXA3: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Image Processing Lab2 TXA44TXA4: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Harunori Takeda's office2 TXA51TXA5: (9600,9600) VT240 EIA Jim Downward's officec2 TXA6+TXA6: (9600,9600) TEK4014 EIA Laser Controlo2 TXA7-TXA7: (9600,9600) TEK4014 EIA Diagnostic Roomo2 TXB0BTXB0: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Siebert/Twarowski/Vavra/Moncur offices2 TXB11TXB1: (9 y using the unsave command U fnam2 U The command U fnam< is used to read in a previously saved file of TVG commands.< The extension .TVG is assumed if no extension is specified.wws)g1 UTL? UTL is a command procedure which can be used to activate tasksE on [SYSUTL] in a manner similar to the way the MC[r] command is usedG to activate tasks on [SYSEXE]. To use UTL as a foreign command define the symbol + UTL:==@SYS$SYSDISK:[SYSMGR.CMDFIL]UTL.COM& Then to activate a task, simply enter* UTL TASK cmdline_cmdline_cmdline_cmdlineH and the image on [SYSUTL] will be activated and the command line passed to it.wwNzg(1 VAXNETAVAXNET is a program which allows asynchronous communcationsAbetween two computers (systems). Communications can be eitherAdirectly between the computers using a synchronous null modemApatch cable (see "HELP PATCH" for the wiring diagram), or over aAdialup line (modem). Communica>a1 F_Deallocate; FD is a routine supplied by DEC to force a stubborn devicep> to be deallocated. It is very privileged and must be rebuilt each time a new system is in.  FD:==$SYS$UTILITY:FD Usage: FD device:; This routine should be used only for very serious problems 5 when nothing else will do. Sources may be found on n DUA0:[SYSUTL.DEALLOC].gwwof the methods listed below:Ao You can open a log file and use a TYPE command at the remoteA 71 PCS750D VAX 11/750's microcode must be loaded at each system boot. TheB routines which do this are referred to as PCS for Programable Control Store.pE In the event that a new system is generated, the PCS750 routinesdE must be rebuilt. The sources for rebuilding the PCS750 routines  are on DUA0:[SYSUTL.PCS].wwransmitted. 2 AUTO_LOGINAThis command uses several DCL symbols to automatically login theAremote system. If you are using an aut`$ 1 KermitF Kermit is a file transfer protocol. It allows the transfer of filesF over terminal lines from a remote Kermit program to the local Kermit program. F Kermit-32 can be run from SYS$SYSTEM:. It will then prompt for input from SYS$COMMAND:.F Kermit-32 can be run in either local or remote modes. In remoteF mode, transfers take place over the controlling terminal line.F Ususally, Kermit-32 is used in remote mode as a "server", meaningF that it will accept commands from the other Kermit. In local mode,F Kermit-32 will perform transfers over a terminal line other than theF controlling terminal. In local mode, Kermit-32 is capable of givingF commands to a "server" Kermit. Note that in order to use Kermit-32F in local mode, the protection code for the terminal to be used must; allow the user access. This is set by the system manager.F When Kermit-32 starts up, it will determine a default terminal lineF to be used  for file transfers (and the CONNECT command) by theF following process. If there is a logical name "KER$COMM" whichF translates to a terminal name, the default transfer terminal will beF that terminal. Otherwise, Kermit checks "SYS$INPUT", "SYS$OUTPUT"F and "SYS$COMMAND", (in that order), and the first one whichF translates to a terminal name is used as the default. If none ofF these are terminals, Kermit will use the terminal which controls theF job which owns the process. If the process does not have aF controlling terminal, or if the terminal which was found cannot beF allocated, Kermit will not have a default terminal, and the SET LINEF TTcn: command must be used before any commands which require theF transfer terminal (SEND, GET, etc.). Kermit will type out a message= indicating the default transfer terminal when it is started.F2 BYEhF This command will cause Kermit-32 (when in local mode) to tell theF other Kermit (which should be in server mode) to exit from KermitF and, if applicable, terminate its job (or process, etc.). WhenF Kermit-32 receives the acknowledgement that this is being done, it will exit to VMS. Kermit-32>BYE 2 CONNECToF The CONNECT command will allow you to connect in as a virtualF terminal over the line that was specified by the SET LINE command, orF to the terminal line specified in the command. The terminal lineF must be one which is accessible to the users process. This meansF that the applicable protection code for the terminal must have beenF set to allow your process to access it (done by the system manager).F If a session log file was previously specified, a new version of theF file will be created, and all typeout logged in the file. The fileF will be closed when the command is completed (by use of anF escape-character "C" command). The format of the CONNECT command is: Kermit-32>CONNECT orv" Kermit-32>CONNECT TTcn:3 where TTcn: is the terminal line name to be used. 2 EXITF The EXIT command will cause Kermit to return to command level. ThisF command is the same as the QUIT command. An example of this command is: Kermit-32>EXITh2 FINISHF This command will cause Kermit-32 (when in local mode) to tell theF other Kermit (which should be in server mode) to exit from Kermit.F After receiving the acknowledgement that this is being done,+ Kermit-32 will prompt for another command.n Kermit-32>FINISHs2 GETdF The GET command is used to have a local Kermit-32 request a file fromF the remote Kermit. Kermit-32 must be running as a local KermitF (i.e., a SET LINE command must have been done). Kermit-32 will thenF request the other Kermit (which must be running in server mode) toF transfer the specified file (or set of files) to Kermit-32. The fileF specification must be in the format of the system on which the server2 Kermit is running. The format of the command is:+ Kermit-32>GET file-specificationEF Where "file-specification" is any valid file specification on the. system on which the server Kermit is running.2 LOCAL F This command allows the user of Kermit-32 to perform various actionsF on the user's system. These commands provide for listing theF contents of a directory, deleting files, typing files, displaying theF amount of disk space used, etc. Many of these commands are performedF by spawning a subprocess to execute the corresponding DCL command;F therefore, the standard parameters and qualifiers which DCL allows may be used.r, Kermit-32>LOCAL keyword argumentsF Where keyword is the name of the command, and arguments are the$ optional arguments for the command.3 COPYF This causes Kermit-32 to make a copy of the specified file. ThisF command uses the standard DCL COPY command. Any options valid for DCL's COPY command may be used.. Kermit-32>LOCAL COPY old-local-file$ New file: new-local-fileF Where 'old-local-file' is the name of the file you wish to copy, and+ 'new-local-file' is the name for the copy. 3 CWDoF This command (short for "Change Working Directory") causes Kermit-32F to the default directory that will be used for files whoseF specification does not include the directory information. This isF similar to the DCL SET DEFAULT command. If no device or directory isF given, the default device and directory is set back to that which was' being used when Kermit-32 was started. < Kermit-32>LOCAL CWD local-directory-specification or  Kermit-32>LOCAL CWDF Where 'local-directory-specification' is the device and/or directoryF portion of a standard VMS file specification. It may include logical names, but not wildcards.3 DELETEF This causes Kermit-32 to delete the specified file(s). This uses the standard DCL DELETE command.l4 Kermit-32>LOCAL DELETE file-specification@ Where file-specification is a valid VAX/VMS file specification. 3 DIRECTORYF This causes Kermit-32 to display a directory listing. This uses the standard DCL DIRECTORY command.7 Kermit-32>LOCAL DIRECTORY file-specificationeF Where the file-specification is an optional valid VAX/VMS file specification.t 3 DISK_USAGEF This causes Kermit-32 to display the amount of disk space used andF available for the given UIC (or the user's UIC if none is given)./ This uses the standard DCL SHOW QUOTA command.a) Kermit-32>LOCAL DISK_USAGE uicf3 Where uic is an optional UIC (in square brackets).u3 HELPF This causes Kermit-32 to display the help message which it sends asF the reply when it receives a "REMOTE HELP" command in server mode.? This describes the REMOTE commands which Kermit-32 implements.N Kermit-32>LOCAL HELPi3 HOSTF This command requests Kermit-32 to perform the specified command asF if it were typed by the user on a terminal. Any results of theF command will be printed on the user's terminal. Note that thisF should only be used for commands which will not require any more userF input, since there will be no way for the user to interact with theF subprocess to supply more input. This works by spawning a subprocess: (much like the DCL SPAWN command) to perform the command.' Kermit-32>LOCAL HOST commands* Where 'command' is any valid DCL command.3 RENAMEF This command causes Kermit-32 to change the name on a file. This& uses the standard DCL RENAME command.0 Kermit-32>LOCAL RENAME old-local-file$ New file: New-local-fileF Where 'old-local-file' is the name of the file to be renamed, and/ 'new-local-file' is the new name for the file. 3 SEND_MESSAGEF This command causes Kermit-32 to send a short (one line) message toF the given terminal. Because this uses the DCL REPLY command, OPER priveleges are needed. 5 Kermit-32>LOCAL SEND_MESSAGE terminal-namep! Message: message-textoF Where 'terminal-name' is a valid name for a terminal, and* 'message-text' is the message to be sent.3 TYPEF This causes Kermit-32 to display the specified file(s) on the terminal.2 Kermit-32>LOCAL TYPE file-specification@ Where file-specification is a valid VAX/VMS file specification.3 WHOs3 This displays the output of a SHOW SYSTEM command.a Kermit-32>LOCAL WHO2 LOGrF The LOG command allows the user to specify the file names to be usedF for the various log files Kermit is capable of creating. A LOGF command without a file specification will cause no log file of that type to be created.) Kermit-32>LOG keyword filespecdF Where keyword is DEBUG, SESSION, or TRANSACTION, and filespec is theF file specification to use for that type of log file. If filespec is/ not present, that type of logging is disabled. 3 DEBUGyF The LOG DEBUG command sets the file specification to be used for theF debugging log file. This file will be used for the debugging outputF produced when a SET DEBUG ON command is done. A new version of theF file is created each time a transfer command is performed, and closed- upon the completion of the transfer command. ' Kermit-32>LOG DEBUG filespecrF Where filespec is the file specification to use for the debugging logD file. If the filespec is null, the debugging log file is disabled. 3 SESSIONcF The LOG SESSION command sets the file name to be used for a log fileF of a "CONNECT" session. A new version of this file is created eachF time the CONNECT command is used, and closed when the CONNECT commandF finishes (as a result of the escape command to close the session).F All output to the controlling terminal will be logged in the session log file.) Kermit-32>LOG SESSION filespeciF Where filespec is the file specification to use for the session logB file. If the filespec is null, the session log file is disabled. 3 TRANSACTIONoF The LOG TRANSACTION command sets the name of the file to be used as aF transaction log file. A new version of this file is created eachF time a transfer command is given (SEND, GET, SERVER, etc.).F Information about the transfer is logged in this file. This includes; the names of the files being transferred, any errors, etc..- Kermit-32>LOG TRANSACTION filespec.F Where filespec is the file specification to use for the transactionF log file. If the filespec is null, the transaction log file is disabled.2 LOGOUTF This command will cause Kermit-32 (when in local mode) to tell theF other Kermit (which should be in server mode) to exit from KermitF and, if applicable, terminate its job (or process, etc.). WhenF Kermit-32 receives the acknowledgement that this is being done, it! will prompt for another command.e Kermit-32>LOGOUTo2 QUITF This command will cause Kermit to return to command level. This is the same as the EXIT command. Kermit-32>QUITo 2 RECEIVEsF The RECEIVE command is used to put Kermit-32 into remote mode waitingF for a single file transfer transaction. This is most useful if theF other Kermit does not support local server commands. If no fileF specification is given, Kermit-32 will use whatever fileF specification is supplied by the other Kermit (suitably altered toF conform to VMS standards). If a file specification is given,F Kermit-32 will use that file specification instead of that suppliedF by the other Kermit. This is most useful when the file name on theF other system is such that it does not map well into a VMS fileF specification. Note that if the other Kermit sends more than oneF file, the same name will be used for all of them. Only the versionF numbers will be different. Therefore, it is best to use aF file-specification on this command only when transferring a single% file. The format of the command is:n Kermit-32>RECEIVE ora/ Kermit-32>RECEIVE file-specifications@ Where "file-specification" is any valid VMS file specification.2 REMOTEF This command allows the user of Kermit-32 (in local mode) to giveF various commands to the other Kermit (which must be in server mode).F These commands provide for listing the contents of a directory,F deleting files, typing files, displaying the amount of disk spaceF used, etc. Note that not all server Kermits support all commands,F but all server Kermits should repsond with a message saying the6 command is not implemented if it does not support it.- Kermit-32>REMOTE keyword argumentsCF Where keyword is the name of the command, and arguments are the$ optional arguments for the command.3 COPYF This causes Kermit-32 to request that the server Kermit make a copyF of the specified file. Both the old and new files are files on theF server's system - no file transfer between systems is done. TheF server Kermit should respond with some indication that either theF file was successfully copied, or with an error message. Note thatF some Kermit's will allow wild-carded copies, while others will only. allow a single file to be copied per command.0 Kermit-32>REMOTE COPY old-remote-file% New file: new-remote-filelF Where 'old-remote-file' is the name of the file you wish to copy, and, 'new-remote-file' is the name for the copy.3 CWDiF This command (short for "Change Working Directory") causes Kermit-32F to request that the server Kermit change the default directory (path,F device, etc.) that will be used for files whose specification doesF not include the directory information. For some systems a passwordF can be supplied which will allow access to the new directory. SinceF Kermit-32 can not know whether the server Kermit requires a password,F it will always ask for one. If no directory is specified in theF command, the server Kermit will set the default directory back to theF users default. This may be either the directory which is the defaultF when a job created, or the default directory which was in effect whenF the server Kermit was started. The server Kermit should respond withF a message which indicates where the new default directory has been set, or with an error message.:> Kermit-32>REMOTE CWD remote-directory-specification3 Password: password for remote directory or  Kermit-32>REMOTE CWDfF Where 'remote-directory-specification' is a string which isF acceptable as a directory indication for the server system. TheF password is any string which is required as a password for access to7 the given directory. The password will not be echoed. 3 DELETEF This causes Kermit-32 to request the server Kermit to delete theF specified file (or files if the server Kermit supports wild-cardF deletes). The server Kermit should respond with a message indicating. whether the file (or files) has been deleted.5 Kermit-32>REMOTE DELETE file-specificationuF Where file-specification is a valid file specification for the remote Kermit's system.a 3 DIRECTORYnF This causes Kermit-32 to request a directory listing from the serverF Kermit. The directory listing will be printed on the users terminal.> The format of the listing is determined by the server Kermit.8 Kermit-32>REMOTE DIRECTORY file-specificationF Where the file-specification is an optional valid file specification for the server Kermits system.h 3 DISK_USAGEF This causes Kermit-32 to request the server Kermit to reply with anF indication of the amount of disk space used and available for the= given directory (or the default directory if none is given).e> Kermit-32>REMOTE DISK_USAGE directory-specificationF Where directory-specification is an optional directory specification for the server Kermit's system.3 EXITF This command is identical to the FINISH command. It requests theF server Kermit to exit to its system command parser, allowing the) terminal to be used for normal commands.t Kermit-32>REMOTE EXIT3 HELPF This causes Kermit-32 to request the server Kermit to reply with aF sort summary of what commands it supports in server mode. If anF argument is given, help on the specific topic is requested. The< resulting help message will be typed on the users terminal.& Kermit-32>REMOTE HELP topic ora Kermit-32>REMOTE HELPF Where topic is an option subject for more detailed help. If no topic/ is given, a general help message is requested. 3 HOSTF This command requests the server Kermit to perform the specifiedF command as if it were typed by the user on a terminal. Any resultsF of the command will be printed on the user's terminal. Note thatF this should only be used for commands which will not require any moreF user input, since there will be no way for the user to interact with( the remote system to supply more input.( Kermit-32>REMOTE HOST commandF Where 'command' is any valid command to be processed by the remote! systems standard command parser.3 LOGINrF This command allows the user to supply the server Kermit withF accounting information. The server Kermit may use this to validateF the users access to the system as well as for billing purposes. ItF may also use this information to provide the user with access to files on its system.o) Kermit-32>REMOTE LOGIN user-idt+ Account: remote-accounting-info % Password: remote-passwordsF Where 'user-id' is a string which represents a valid userF identification on the remote system, 'remote-accounting-info' is anyF additional accounting information required by the remote system (suchF as account strings), and 'remote-password' is the password for theF remote system which corresponds to the given user-id. The password will not be echoed.3 LOGOUTF This command is the same as the LOGOUT command. It will request the* server Kermit to exit and logout its job." Kermit-32>REMOTE LOGOUT3 RENAMEF This command causes Kermit-32 to request that the server KermitF change the name on a file. The server Kermit should respond with anF indication that the operation is completed successfully, or else withF an error message. Some Kermit's may allow wild-card fileF specifications to be used, and will repsond with a list of files and new names.I2 Kermit-32>REMOTE RENAME old-remote-file% New file: New-remote-filewF Where 'old-remote-file' is the name of the file to be renamed, and0 'new-remote-file' is the new name for the file.3 SEND_MESSAGEF This command requests the server Kermit to send a short (one line)F message to the given destination. Depending on the system, theF destination may be a terminal, a user name, a mailbox name or someF other destination address. The server Kermit should respond with an" indication of success or failure.< Kermit-32>REMOTE SEND_MESSAGE destination-address! Message: message-textnF Where 'destination-address' is a valid destination for the server's6 system, and 'message-text' is the message to be sent.3 STATUSF This requests the status of the server Kermit. The server Kermit/ will reply with some indication of its status.I" Kermit-32>REMOTE STATUS3 TYPEF This causes Kermit-32 to request the server Kermit to transmit theF specified file (or files if the server supports wildcards) so that0 the file(s) can be typed on the users terminal.3 Kermit-32>REMOTE TYPE file-specificationiF Where file-specification is a valid file specification for the server Kermit's system.c3 WHOF This requests the server Kermit to display a list of users of itsF system, along with other information about the users and/or system.F A specific user-id may be supplied, which may result in more detailedF information about the particular user. It is also possible to supplyF options for use by the server Kermit in determining the format, etc., of the resulting list.:' Kermit-32>REMOTE WHO user-id.! Options: options-listTF Where 'user-id' is an optional string representing a specific user,F and 'options-list' is an optional list of formatting or selection options.s2 SENDF The SEND command will allow you to send a file(s) to the otherF Kermit. T to specify the type of remote system you areAcommunicating with. This sets up various flags within VAXNET toAdetermine how to talk to the remote. For example, if you specifyAIBM, a local echo will be performed since IBM (TSO) doesn't echo3characters sent to it. The valid system types are:: APPLE, CROSSFILE, DEC, EASYLINK, IBM, UNIX, and XXDP.ww*W+g1 WHOG WHO is an unsupported VMS V2.0 utility that performs UIC <--> USERNAMEH translation. WHO should be i nstalled with SYSPRV. It accidently seemsE to Work on VMS V3.0. However, no commitment is made to continue its" use or support on the KMS system.2 EXIT Exit the WHO utility. FORMAT: EXIT2 SHOW= Show UIC <--> USERNAME translation. If a translation can be/ made, then write it to SYS$OUTPUT in the form: [ggg,mmm]USERNAME FORMAT: SHOW ! ? Where and conform to the VAX/VMS definitions.? Note that both and  may be wildcarded. Also, 5 two forms of the SHOW command yield special results:5 SHOW [*,*] - List every user in the UAF in ascending order on the UIC.2 SHOW * - List every user in the UAF in ascending order on the USERNAME. ww+g1 XQTGXQT is designed to simulate (within the limitations imposed by VMS) theH.XQT and multi-tasking features of RSX-11M. There are times when issuingEa single immediate mode command would lock up an interactive terminal Hfor a long time. This command procedure is designed to be used to submitGsingle line DCL or MCR commands for BATCH processing. It is designed to be used as a Foreign command ie.& XQT:==@SYS$SYSDISK[SYSMGR.CMDFIL]XQTFOnce set as a foreign command,one but need issue a command of the form XQT cmd_lineAIf there is no command line present, XQT will prompt for a singleGcommand (which must be less than about 80 characters to satisfy passingFparameters on the SUBMIT command. XQT will t hen submit itself with forGBATCH processing with the decoded parameters passed to BATCH. It can doGthis because it follows different paths depending on whether or not theCuser is logged on to BATCH or an interactive terminal. Finally, theEprocedure passes back a message to the user who submitted the commandGthat the process is done. No log file will be spooled, but XQT.LOG will3be sitting on the user's directory for examination.ww`RG1 ZEUSG ZEUS is a monitoring RUNOFFNSETMODEMSETUICSPELLSWAP TapecheckTAPEXFER TEKGRAPH*TESTFILE{TIME TRANSFORMTVGUTL XQTZEUSZEUSQTZEUSZEUSXQTZEUSXQTZEUSQTZEUSQTZEUSZEUSZEUSZEUSQTZEUS3FINDUICLN03TREMINDERZEUSUS task which is designed to insure that computeHbound tasks do not claim an inordinant amount of CPU time. Normally allHuser sit at priority 4. If any user uses more than 25% of the system CPUHtime during any scan interval, ZEUS lowers the user's priority to 3. AsHlong as the user process remains compute bound, ZEUS leaves the priorityHsitting at 4. However, should the user cease being compute bound duringCany scan interval, ZEUS will restore the user's base priority to 4.F The scan interval is set to be about once per minute and at this Dfrequency ZEUS uses about 1-2% of system resources. The sources forZEUS can be found on:) KMS$DECUSUSR1:[VAX82B.DFWLUG.MEAD.ZEUS]ww h_ 1 BROADCASTA BROADCAST is a task which allows any user to send a one line4notice to another user on the system. Its syntax is3 BROADCAST[/BOT] TTuu:"message...message...message"or> BROADCAST[/BOT] TXuu:"message...message...message" (DMF-32)or3 BROADCAST[/BOT] OPA0:"message...message...message"mor7 BROADCAST[/BOT] Username:"message...message...message" 2 Parameters Terminal_Namem@IF the text preceeding the ":" starts with a "TT", a "TX" or an ?"OPA0:, the target device is assumed to be a terminal and not agGusername. The terminals must exist. They do not have to be logged on.sUsernameFIf the form using the Username is used, the name may either be a validBVMS login name or a logical name which translates to a login name.IIn this case, BROADCAST will send a notification message to all terminalsuDthe user is logged on to. Alternatively, using the form specifying Hthe terminal number, the message will be sent to the terminal regardlessof the user at the terminal.MessageeHThe message text should be enclosed in quotes. The length is limited tooadcast message to the bottom line of the terminal. wwf! 1 TEKGRAPHAThe function of TEKGRAPH is to provide graphics display services Dincorporating the Tektronix Plot10 Advanced Graphics calls. At itsBcore, TEKGRAPH is a command dispatcher of a limited set of TCS and(Advanced Graphics subroutine calls. CTEKGRAPH may be invoked as a foreign command by defining the symbol" TEKGRAPH:==$SYS$UTILITY:TEKGRAPHThen the command $ TEKGRAPH control__file@will cause TEKGRAPH to read the control file in and perform the requested plot actions.hGIf TEKGRAPH is invoked with no command line, and the symbol GRAPH__FILEsFdoes not exist, TEKGRAPH will assume the input file name is GRAPH.DAT.DHowever, TEKGRAPH will first prompt for a file name displaying the Ecurrent default file name setting (GRAPH.DAT). If a carriage return rFis typed, TEKGRAPH will now display a list of options (Delete, Merge, Fetc.) and line/point options. This mode can be used for graphically editing a graphics data set.:If an explicit filename is entered, TEKGRAPH assumes you?want to do something special with the file and then asks you if9you want to create a graph control file. If you do not,a@it displays the editing option menu. However, if you choose to,CTEKGRAPH then proceds to prompt with a large number of questions G(axis type, data limits, point type, line type, comments, etc.) which Git then uses to display the graph. This mode can be used for producingt+a polished graph from an existing data set.t CTEKGRAPH is designed to be used in a subroutine-like fashion from a Fmain calling program. The main program can spawn commands to TEKGRAPHFin two ways. First, the main program can create a graph control file,Emy_file.CTL, containing the appropriate Advanced-Graphics commands. FThen the main program can spawn the command $TEKGRAPH my_file.CTL, andDthe graph will be plotted. If the user does not wish to be botheredFwith prompting for a data file name, one can set the symbol GRAPH_FILE@to  be the name of the data file and then spawn off the command, C$TEKGRAPH, with no control file name on the command line. In thistFevent, TEKGRAPH will not prompt for a file name but it will prompt for.whether or not a control file should be used. EWhen run on a VT125 (also VT240) terminal, TEKGRAPH has the abilityZDto move its cursor (when displayed) via the arrow keys. The movementFproduced by the arrow keys is rate sensitive. The faster you move the@keys, the larger steps the cursor mo ves. If the interval betweenDhitting an arrow key is faster than .3 seconds, each time a key isFhit, the interval the cursor moves increases by 2 (up to 25). If the Finterval is longer, each time the interval decreases by 5 (down to 1).DThis allows for fast and accurate positioning of the cursor with the arrow keys. EIf TEKGRAPH does not know what type of terminal it is on, it will dDprompt for the terminal type. At this time it only knows about 4014Eand VT125 terminals. However, thi s feature can be used from withinaEan indirect command procedure (or batch) to have TEKGRAPH output datasCin either 4014 or ReGIS mode to a text file which can be displayedYBlater. At present, TEKGRAPH does not know about VT100's which canEemulate a Tektronix 4014. TEKGRAPH knows what terminal device it must Eoutput the graph to, by using the information about terminal type set Fvia the SET TERM/DEVICE=XYZ command. Current graphic devices are theEVT125 or FT1 (Foreign terminal 1, for  _1 File_Specifier The VMS File SpecifierA The file is the basic unit of storage for VAX/VMS. All user Dinformation is stored in files, usually on tapes or disks. In orderCto retrieve a file from storage, or create and store a new one, you.1must be able to identify the file to the system. eC The VAX/VMS file specifier is used to name a file on a disk orfDtape in such a way that it can be uniquely identified for use by theEsystem and users. It is composed of a number of distinct parts. Theh&general form of the file specifier is C Node_Name::Device_Name:[Directory]File_Name.File_Type;VersionlC Any or all of the file specifier may be used. In general, allcCthat is needed to reference a file on a users account is to specifye!the File_Name and the File_Type. m File_Name.File_Type?Several rules should be noted about the general file specifier.rG 1) The Node_Name must be separated from Device_Name by a ::tF 2) The Device_Name must be separated from Directory by a :/ 3) The Directory must be enclosed in [ ] F 4) The File_Name must be separated from File_Type by a .F 5) The File_Type must be separated from File_Version by a ;H 6) Only the letters A-Z and the numbers 0-9 may be in a file specifier.2 Device The VAX/VMS Device SpecifierF Files reside on physical devices; disks and tapes in general. TheIdevice name is used to reference these devices. VMS supports  identifying Da file both by logical and physical device names. Logical names are@created via the VMS ASSIGN or DEFINE command and may be up to 31Dcharacters in length terminated with a ':'. The physical device nameEconsists of three parts the device mnemonic, the controler index, andsAthe unit number. The general form of the physical device name is DDCUU:m"where: DD - The device mnemonic ) C - The controler index (A - Z)-% UU - The unit number (0 - 7)a) : Terminates the device name /The physical device mnemonics on our system ares " CS TU58 cassett tape (CSA1:). DM RK07 disk (Controler A, Unit 1 only)9 DR RM03 disk drive (Controler A, Unit 0 and 1 only)i. DU RA81 disk drive (Controler A, Unit 0) MS TS11 Tape Drive! OP Operators console, OPA0:Z7 TT Terminals (DZ Controlers A, B, C. Units 0 - 7)M2 TX Terminals (DMF32 controller A, Units 0-7) 2 Directoryr& The VAX/VMS Directory Speci fierF Directories are named areas of the disk (like file drawers) where:files can be located. Each directory name consists of 1-9Calpha-numeric characters. The entire directory name is enclosed inuDbrackets. VMS also supports directory/subdirectory combinations. AAsubdirectory name also consists of 1-9 alpha-numeric characters. eASubdirectories may them selves have subdirectories. A total of 8 @levels of directories and subdirectories are possible (7 if yourEaccount sits on a rooted  directory). The general form of a directorye string is D [ Directory . Subdirectory1 . Subdirectory2 . .... Subdirectory8 ]Dwhere the spaces are for clarity and should not be present. In the Btotal directory specifier, each subdirectory is seperated from itsDadjoining directories or subdirectories by a ".". When a directory-Dsubdirectory string is specified for locating a file specifier, eachEdirectory and subdirectory must be correctly accessed in sequence forethe system to find the  file.K To simplify the problem of searching through multiple directories for (Ja file the wild card (*) and the elipsis (...) may be used. The wild cardFwill match any directory/subdirectory name at that level. The elipsisFmeans that starting with the toplevel directory one should search downHthrough all in-line directories. Either [ ] or < > pairs may be used todelimit the directory names.2 Name The VAX/VMS File NameF A file name consists of from 1 - 9 alpha-numeric char acters. TheEfile name is seperated from the file type by a period. The file nameoCis seperated from a directory by a ]. If no directory is specified Dand a device or node name is specified, the ":" seperates the device*specifier or node name from the file name.! 2 Node_Nameo! The VAX/VMS Node Name SpecifierdI The VMS node name designates which computer on a network to reference. DA VMS node name consists of 1 - 6 alpha-numeric characters seperatedDfrom the rest of the file specifie r with a ::. Optionally, the nodeEname may contain a access control string enclosed in quotes which is n<required to gain access to a file on a remote network node. ? Each access to a remote node is checked to see if the user oFrequesting the operation has the right to perform the operation. ThisAis accomplished by checking the access control string against thepCuser's account privileges on the remote node. If an access controle=string is omitted, a default access control string is used. dCGenerally, the default account is sufficient for reading (copying) mFfiles from a remote node to your parent account. However, for copying@files to a remote node, a valid access control string is always 6required. This general form for the node specifier is$ Node_Name"Account_name Password"::EFor example, if you have an account on the 11/45 system (node FUSION)aAsystem with a name SMITH and a pasword SMX97Y, the complete node bspecfier would beI S FUSION"SMITH SMX97Y"::2 Type The VMS File TypeG The file type consists of 1 - 3 alpha numeric characters seperatedaFfrom the file name with a ".". It is used to designate the file type.FFor example .BAS files are BASIC source files, .FOR are fortran source.files and .EXE are executable programs to RUN.2 Version_number VAX File Version NumbersE The first time a file is created it is assigned a version number Bof 1. Each time the file is revised (edited), a new version of theEfile is created with one higher version number. The previous versionuAnumber file is usually retained unless deleted by the user. File Cversion numbers may range from 1 to 32767 decimal. Version numberse.must be seperated from file types with a ";". 2 Wild_Cards+ VAX File Wild Cards F To simplify file operations that can operate on more than just a Gsingle file (like the DIRECTORY command), wild card characters (* or %)Gcan be used to mean that any character will match. H Once this data is entered, the user is told to enter data. DoH not try and exit from tablet data entry by a CTRL-Z since doing mayH leave GRAPH.DAT locked. Note, if the first point doesn't enter,H press the 'RETURN' key and reenter the point. Sometimes thisH solves the problem. If it doesn't, exit from TAB and start it up) again with the cursor on the tablet. H Each time data is entered, the red LED's will blink. As dataH is digiti Tektronix 4014 terminals). s2 Restrictionsm?The HDCOPY command can not work on a VT125/VT200 terminalo?unless a printer is attached to the printer port. HardcopiesT?may be made using the 8-V MUX and the video hard copy printer.a?If a command of the form $TEKGRAPH Ctrl_File is issued for at?VT125/VT2xx terminal, TEKGRAPH will display the graph and waitb?for a return to be hit, thus allowing time for a user to signal )the 8-V Mux to make a copy of the screen.f?When aborted with a CTRL/Y, TEKGRAPH erases the screen beforea$returning the user to the DCL level.=To insure that a VT125/VT2xx terminal is useable for enteringt8commands, the terminal must always be switched back from;graphic format to non-graphic format when a graphic programe>exits (no matter how). Consequently, when TEKGRAPH exits on a?ReGIS terminal, it erases the screen whereas when it exits on a DISCRETE/CONTINUOUS digitizing modeK 4. Define a unit squarei. 5. Define unit square 9 ґ 1 TEKGRAPHAThe function of TEKGRAPH is to provide graphics display services oDincorporating the Tektronix Plot10 Advanced Graphics calls. At itsBcore, TEKGRAPH is a command dispatcher of a limited set of TCS and(Advanced Graphics subroutine calls. CTEKGRAPH may be invoked as a foreign command by defining the symbola" TEKGRAPH:==$SYS$UTILITY:TEKGRAPHThen the command $ TEKGRAPH control__file@will cause TEKGRAPH to read the control file in and perform `{^q1 QDEQD (Queue Display) is a utility program that provide a listing of theFprint and batch queues. It prints the entry numbers, queue names, jobDstates, file sizes, originating user's names and file names. If theCdevices associated with the queues can be identified by the programrF(see program listing), an estimate of the total time required to clearFeach queue is display. If the program cannot identify the device, the?total number of blocks to be printed is printed in  The "*" means thatDone or more characters at the given location will match, whereas theE"%" means that any one (but only one) character at that location willFmatch. Wild cards are very useful for use with the directory command. For example;% $DIR *.FOR ! list all fortran files0 $DIR Foo.* ! List all files named foo with any ! file type6 $DIR FOO%.FOR ! List files FOO1.FOR, FOO2.FOR (etc.)* ! but not FOO10.FOR, FOO20.FOR (etc.)5 $DIR FOO*.* ! List all file names starting with FOO ! with any file type 2 EXAMPLES/ Some examples of valid file specifiers are:9 DRA0:[SYSUTL]SYSUTL.HLB;2 ! Use Physical deviceC STAR::DRA0:[DOWNWARD]LOGIN.COM ! Specify a node and deviceE FUSION"SMITH SPX79Y"::[200,200]FOO.CMD ! Access control for node= KMS$FEDUSR1:[TARVIN]LOGIN.COM ! Use a logical device3 []LOGIN.COM ! Use current directory/disk7 DRA0:LOGIN.COM ! Use current directory/DRA0:ww place of thetEestimated time. The devices are identified by data statements withinpEthe source code; instructions are included as comments in the code.. r<The job state ("State") section of the display will indicateone of four states: ) "Curr" ..... Job is currently printing.r2 "Pend" ..... Job is on the active chain and will+ start after the Current job is finished.e6 "Hold" ..... Job is held (e.g., by a /HOLD qualifier or queue is stopped).8 "Time" ..... Job is held waiti.ng for a time expiration! (e.g., by a /AFTER qualifier).y<The "Blks" column will indicate the file size and the "Copy"8column will indicate the number of copies being printed.ww The procedure will ask you next for file names to transfer. AtCthis prompt a simple carriage return will terminate further prompts Eand the tape will get made. You can also enter any existing VMS file Dname including wildcards. For example, you could enter *.LIS at the?prompt to place all listing files on s1 TVGiE TVG is a powerful utility program used to create neat, professional-D looking view-graphs. A series of commands used to make a slide may6 be saved and re-used or modified. The commands are:& BYE Logs you out of TVG, same as ^Z.0 CLEAR Clears all text and box definitions; the default values are unchanged.1 E Enter new text to be associated with thet next available identifier.n% F [n] Plot final viewgraph on TTn:.h3 MA [l] d Modify the alignment҅_ 1 BROADCASTA BROADCAST is a task which allows any user to send a one line4notice to another user on the system. Its syntax is3 BROADCAST[/BOT] TTuu:"message...message...message"or> BROADCAST[/BOT] TXuu:"message...message...message" (DMF-32)or3 BROADCAST[/BOT] OPA0:"message...message...message"or7 BROADCAST[/BOT] Username:"message...message...message" 2 Parameters Terminal_Name@IF the text preceeding the ":" starts with a "TT", a "TX" or an ?"OPA0:, the target device is assumed to be a terminal and not aGusername. The terminals must exist. They do not have to be logged on.UsernameFIf the form using the Username is used, the name may either be a validBVMS login name or a logical name which translates to a login name.IIn this case, BROADCAST will send a notification message to all terminalsDthe user is logged on to. Alternatively, using the form specifying Hthe terminal number, the message will be sent to the terminal regardlessof the user at the terminal.MessageEThe message text should be enclosed in quotes. The length is limitedto 80 characters. 2 Qualifiers/BOT8Messages sent to DEC CRT terminals will erase the top 6 Elines of the screen and display the notice 2 lines down from the top.HHowever, the optional switch, /BOT, may be added to the command to force:the broadcast message to the bottom line of the terminal. 2 Display_AreaCUnless the /BOT switch is used, a message broadcast to a VT100 type Dterminal will erase the top 6 lines of the display, sound the bell, Fand display the message downw two lines from the top. The /BOT switchFforces the message to be displayed as if the terminal were a hard copyBterminal (ie the message appears at the bottom of the screen or at!the current text entry location).2 UseG VPW defines BROADCAST for users to use as needed. However, to use+BROADCAST apart from VPW, define the symbol' BROADCAST:==$SYS$SYSVPWFILES:BROADCASTCTo properly work, BROADCAST must be installed with OPER, and WORLD privilege. ww  of TEXTl to d, wheret1 D = 0. (LEFT) AND D = 1. (RIGHT). Default: d=0.7 MB l Make Box. Draw up to 32 connected line segments.> MC [l] n Modify the character set of TEXTl to n. Default n=3.E MO [l] d Modify the orientation of TEXTl to d degrees. Default: d=0.2 MP l Modify the position of TEXTl to that of the9 crosshair input. The alignment can also be chosen if - either an L, C or R is typed to set point.? MS [l] d Modify the size of TEXTl to d inches. Default: d=.25.) MT l(in which case they are not saved after printing), they can beCtransfered as individually named IBM files, or they can be included@as part of an IBM Part itioned Data Set (PDS). If you chose the Fpartitioned data set option, you will have to enter an IBM PDS name. EConsult the IBM system manager if you are not sure what the PDS name should be.D The procedure will ask you next for file names to transfer. AtCthis prompt a simple carriage return will terminate further promptsEand the tape will get made. You can also enter any existing VMS fileDname including wildcards. For example, you could enter *.LIS at the?prompt to place all listing files on the tape. As each file isAprocessed for inclusion on the tape, a message will appear on theAVT100 terminal specifying the file being processed. In the eventCthat a file name is entered which does not exist, a warning messageAwill appear and the procedure will prompt again for another name.AWhey you finally type just a return at this prompt, the specifiedBfiles will be written to the tape and the tape will be dismounted.DPhysically remove the tape from the tape drive, give the tape to theAIBM operator and the tape will be transfered to your IBM account.ww> Replace TEXT l with new text.0 N n Place n ticks on right side during REDRAW. R Redraw with identifiers. S t Save as file named t. U t Unsave from file named t.' where [l] is the tag letter identifier F To generate a final viewgraph and copy (if TVG is a foreign command,  type:# $TVG filename.ext[/switches]D Where "filename.ext" is the name of the file in which the viewgraphB description is saved. (The default extension type is .TVG). Type4 HELP TVG SWITCHES for  help on command line switchesL Type HELP TVG BEGIN for how to start TVG. Type HELP TVG command for help" relating to a specific command. 2 SETSKSETS is a seperate program which can be used to generate a complete displayIof the specified character sets with the exception of the character.HThe is a space in all sets except in character set 9 where it is a Lhalf-. This program currently only works correctly on the 11/45 system.MIf you need to know what the sets look lik e, request a Xerox of the character%sets (FEXXXX) from the FED Secretary.!M! The screen will erase and you will be asked if you want fonts(F) are all(A)I! characters of a given set displayed. If you type 'F', a sample of eachJ! set will be drawn. If you type 'A' so as to see all characters of a setI! displayed, the screen will erase and then the following question will ! appear,! ! Character sets: ! B! Enter the minimum [and maximum] set numbers you wish samples of.I! The !program will automatically generate hardcopies. Type ^Z to exit. ! 2 SWITCHES= TVG can specify an indirect command file on its command line of the form TVG @filename or TVG filename[/-FI/MG:N.] where) /-FI surpresses the filename identifier  at bottom right of figure? /TE:n means plot on terminal n (*** DOES NOT YET WORK ON VAX)* /MG:n.nn is magnifaction factor for HCMAG2 START To initiate TVG, Type  ! $TVG (if a foreign command)# $UTL TVG ( "if invoking as utility) ; or use the VAX Professional Workstation Graph Master Menu. @ The screen of the plotting terminal will blank, bottom and sideA axes will be drawn, and the prompt TVG> will appear. Your first command will be either% E to enter a line of text, or4 MB to modify (enter) a box or line segment shape = An identifying tag letter (beginning with capital A) will be= assigned to this entry. This tag identifier will be used in+ subsequent commands t #o refer to the entry. E After either of these commands, the cross-hairs will become visible.E For entry of text, position the cross-hairs where you would like theB text, and type either L, R, or C (see HELP for the MP command forG details). If you wish to see this entry, use the R command to re-drawJ the screen. The text string entered will be plotted. For entry of boxesI or lines, position the cross-hairs at each point in the line or box, andB type any character except C or E. (The $space bar is useful here).B Line segments will be produced between these points. Use C or E 6 to terminate the entry. See HELP for MB for details. = To enter additional text strings or figures, use the E or MBH commands. You can change the default size, orientation, character set,L or allignment by using the commands MS, MO, MC, or MA without specifying anJ identifying tag. All subsequent entries will have these characteristics.2 BYEE The BYE command (or ^Z) is used to terminate TVG. % Before TVG exits,A the question "Have you saved this? [Y,n]" will appear. To exit,C type Y. To continue in TVG, type N. This question is designed to2 remind you to save your new or modified TVG file.2 CLEARF The CLEAR command is used to wipe all text and box definitions, whileG remaining in TVG. Any default definitions that have been reset remain reset.2 E E = The E command is used to enter text. The next available tag@ identifier (beginning with capital A thro &ugh lower-case z) will> be assigned; and is used to reference that text in subsequentE commands. (i.e., the MT B command is used to modify the text string tagged 'B'.)D The default Hershey characteristics for entry are character set #3,E orientation of 0 degrees with the X axis, left-justified allignment,B and letter size of 0.25 inches. To change these characteristics,% see the MC, MO, MA, and MS commands.2 F B The F command is ued to draw the viewgraph in final form (without@ t 'ags or axes). After the F command is used, typing a will= cause the screen to blank, and the TVG> prompt to re-appear.2 MAA The command MA is used to modify the allignment of text strings.B Allignment is defined as either 0. (left-justified) or 1. (right- justified).7 If the command is used with a specific tag identifier, MA B 1A only that string is re-alligned. If the command is used without an identifier, MA 1C the default allignment is changed. The initial default all (ignment is 0.2 MBCThe command, MB, is used to enter a box or line segment shape. EThe command, MB [l], is used to modify an existing box with the tagGidentifier l. After the MB command is used, the cross-hairs will appearEon the screen. Position these at the first point of the box or line,Eand type any character except C or E (the space bar is useful here). >Re-position the cross-hairs to the next point and type anotherAcharacter. The first line segment will appear on the scre)en. ToFterminate entry, type E (end of shape), C (close box) or A (draw arrowDto point). If a C is typed, a line will be drawn between the current1point and the initial point of the box or shape. 2 MC The command  MC n? is used to modity the default character set (#3). The command MC l n> is used to modify the character set of an entry specific text string. 2 MO The command  MO a? is used to modify the default orientation of text. The command MO l a@ is used to mo *dify the orientation of the specified text string.; The initial default orientation is 0. degrees with respect to the X-axis.@ If the MO command is used with a box, the line type is changed. 0 straight line2 MP The command MP l3 is used to modify the position of a string or box.D When MP is used, the cross-hairs will become visible. Position the crosshairs and type> L to use this point as the lower left-hand corner of the text? R to use this point as the lower right-hand corne+r of the text4 C to use this point as the center point of the text2 MS The command MS s; is used to modify the default lettering size. The command MS l sB is used to modify the lettering size for the specific text string? or box. The size s is entered in floating point inches. The / initial default lettering size is 0.25 inches.2 MT The command MT l@ is used to modify (replace) the text string specified by tag l.H If MT l is used, that string is eliminated and, the tag identifier  released for re-use.2 N The command N mB is used to generate m tic marks along the right side of the graph when it ix next re-drawn.2 R< The R command is used to re-draw the graph with the latest ; modifications and additions included. The tic'ed axes areF included, as well as the identifying tag letters associated with each string or figure.2 S The command S fnam; is used to save the current set of TVG commands as a file.A The extension >TVG is a -utomatically appended to the file name if an extension is not specified.> TVG does not update the version number of the file, so if youA are planning to use both the unmodified and modified versions ofB a file, make a copy before entering TVG. Once the file is saved,@ it may be recalled for modification by using the unsave command U fnam2 U The command U fnam< is used to read in a previously saved file of TVG commands.< The extension .TVG is assumed if no extension is specified.ww/600,9600) VT100 EIA Chet Shepard's officec2 TXB20TXB2: (9600,9600) VT240 EIA Roy Johnson's office2 TXB31TXB3: (9600,9600) VT240 EIA Mike Monsler's officec2 TXB4&TXB4: (9600,9600) VT220 EIA Don Slater2 TXB51TXB5: (9600,9600) VT102 EIA Fred Schebor's officec2 TXB6-TXB6: (9600,9600) VT102 EIA Sue True's officec2 TXB70TXB7: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Dick Berger's officewww0@rÌ 1 TERMVAX 2 OPA0KOPA0: ( 300, 300) LA36 EIA VAX Console device own L DEC LA38-GA sn PN 22929 (72)2 TTA0KTTA0: (9600,9600) LA120 EIA VAX Line printer own0L DEC LA120-DA sn PND 6499 KMS # A10215 (72)2 TTA1KTTA1: ( 300, 300) LA120 EIA Letter Quality printer lse L DIABLO 630 sn 5183 1 (71)2 TTA2KTTA2: (4800,4800) LA36 EIA/20 Xray Calib Lab own L NUCLEAR DATA ND62 D. Bird (61)2 TTA3KTTA3: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA B. Schroeder/J. Stiegman ownAL DEC VT102 sn TA 020120 (66)2 TTA4KTTA4: (4800,4800) LA36 EIA Tracer Northern MCA own L Multi Channel Anal. (623)2 TTA5KTTA5: (4800,4800) VT100 EIA Laser Control console own4L DEC VT102 sn TA 023622 (73)2 TTA6KTTA6: (9600,9600) VT52 EIA Engineering Lab own8L MICRO TERM MIME 2A (75)2 TTA7KTTA7: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Dial in Line ownNL BELL MODEM DATA SET 212A DATA PHONE 300/1200 (72)2 TTB0I3TTB0: (4800,4800) VT100 20mA G. Wuttke ?rM DEC VT102 sn 18317 KMS # A8836 (16C)Y2 TTB1ITTB1: (9600,9600) VT100 20mA S. Zabinsky ?HL DEC (16)2 TTB2KTTB2: (4800,4800) FT1 20mA DMS 11/34 room own0M TEKTRONIX 4014-1 (113) 2 TTB3KTTB3: (9600,49600) VT100 20mA DMS 11/34 room own M DEC (113)M2 TTB4KTTB4: (9600,9600) VT100 20mA DMS SEM lab own0M DEC VT100-AA sn AB 16312 KMS # A9809 (114)X2 TTB5KTTB5: (1200,1200) LA120 20mA DMS LP, SEM lab own M DEC LA120-DA sn PND 1446 KMS # A10214 (114)n2 TTB6KTTB6: ( 300, 300) 5 LA36 20ma DMS 11/34 Room ownPM DEC (113) 2 TTB7KTTB7: (9600,9600) VT100 20ma DMS 11/34 room ownXM DEC (113) 2 TTC0ITTC0: (4800,4800) VT100 EIA Alex Glass's office ?RL DEC VT102 (58)2 TTC1KTTC1: (9600,9600) VT100 6 EIA L. Powers own5E2 TTC2 VT100-AA sn WF 57053 (9)EKTTC2: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Jeff T./Paul R. office ownAL DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 7069 (15)2 TTC3KTTC3: (4800,4800) FT2 EIA NBI Port 1 lse L NBI NBI (86)2 TTC4KTTC4: (4800,4800) VT100 EIA Dave Solomon'7s Office lse M DEC VT102 sn TA 04586 (51A) 2 TTC5KTTC5: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA G. Charatis own9K DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (9) K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40700NN8 own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 460BT25 own K DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39819 own02 TTC6KTT8C6: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Dorothy McGarrah own M DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 7118 (92D)n2 TTC7KTTC7: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA L. Ewrin / IBM ownNL DEC VT100-AA sn ABC 6442 (34)2 TXA0KTXA0: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Curtin / Laser lab ownFL DEC VT100-AA sn ABY 1568 (73) SELANAR GRAP:HICS2 TXA1KTXA1: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA Mark Buoniconto own L DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (67)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K34 own-K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 33207224 own-K DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39820 own TT14: PDP 11/45I2 TXA2KTXA2: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Pam Vavra office ow 1the requested plot actions.(GIf TEKGRAPH is invoked with no command line, and the symbol GRAPH__FILEeFdoes not exist, TEKGRAPH will assume the input file name is GRAPH.DAT.DHowever, TEKGRAPH will first prompt for a file name displaying the Ecurrent default file name setting (GRAPH.DAT). If a carriage return EFis typed, TEKGRAPH will now display a list of options (Delete, Merge, Fetc.) and line/point options. This mode can be used for graphically editing a graphics data set.:If an ex;݌ 1 Field_TestEFrom time to time, KMS participates in Field Testing various software *packages. We do this for several reasons:5 1. To obtain functionality we do not currently have. - 2. To evaluate software we might want to buy 7 3. To get problems resolved prior to the final version 3 (Time to fix bug during Field Test is far less) = 4. To provide input, so that the products features will more # closely conform to KMS's needs. JDuring Field Testing, it is very<nM DEC VT100-AA sn PN 42553 KMS # A9719 (86C) &TT15: PDP 11/45 VT125 up grade2 TXA3KTXA3: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Image Processor own-M DEC VT100-AA sn PN 32198 (72A)i& VT125 up grade2 TXA4KTXA4: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA H. Takeda's office ownSL DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 7076 (88)2 TXA5KTXA5=: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA J. Downward's office own0L DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (70)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 345000H7 own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 40306JH8 own K DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn TAF 5808 own TT13: PDP 11/4542 TXA6KTXA6: (9600,9600) FT1 EIA FEX Diagnostic lab own7L TEKTRO>NIX 4014-1 id B 054043 (71)@TT3: PDP 11/45 4953 Grh tablet id B 010162 KMS # A96772 TXA7KTXA7: (9600,9600) FT1 EIA Laser Control lab own0L TEKTRONIX 4014-1 id B 066698 KMS # A9743 (73)2 TXB0KTXB0: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA K. Moncur / L. Siebert own L DEC VT100-AA sn ABE 8420 (86)2 TXB1KTXB1: (9600,9600) VT100 ? EIA C. Shepard office own M DEC VT100-AA sn PN 38567 (52A)T2 TXB2KTXB2: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA R. Johnson office own L DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (49)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601HY6 own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 34905T33 ownnK DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39825 @ own 2 TXB3KTXB3: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA M. Monsler office own4L DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (39)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn ownLK DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn own K DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn own 2 TXB4KTXB4: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA D. Slater own L DEAC VT240 Graphics terminal (31)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K18 own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 35002RY6 own K DEC MONITOR VR201-B sn TAM 1817 own 2 TXB5KTXB5: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA F. Schebor's office own L DEC VT102 sn TA 134507 (4E)2 TXB6KTXB6: (9600,9600) VT100 B EIA Sue True office own M DEC VT102 sn TA 031295 (16A) 2 TXB7KTXB7: (9600,9600) VT100->VT125 EIA D. Berger office ownTL DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (33)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 34900DC9 own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 32605157 own K DEC MONITOR VR201-C sn TAD 8303 C own ww MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 398193TTC6: DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 71183TTC7: DEC VT100-AA sn ABC 64423TXA0: DEC VT100-AA sn ABY 15689TXA1: DEC VT240 Graphics terminal6 DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K346 DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 332072243 DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39820NTXA2: DEC VT125 up grade sn PN 4255D FÌ1 TERM452 TT00KTT0: (9600,9600) VT100 ? PDP 11/45 console own4D DEC VT100-NA sn AB 98913 KMS # A10243( VT100-AA upgrade2 TT01KTT1: (9600,9600) LA120 ? PDP 11/45 line printer ownAC DEC LA120-AA sn WF 06007 KMS # A9717F2 TT2KTT2: (9600,9600) LA180S ? FEX Diagnostic lab own C TEKTRONIX 4014-1 E id B 032002 KMS # A8830 3 Joystick 4952 id B 020788 2 TT3 KTT3: (9600,9600) LA180S ? FEX Diagnostic lab own 3 TEKTRONIX 4014-1 id B 054043 CTXA6: VAX 4953 Grh tablet id B 010162 KMS # A967702 TT13KTX13: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA J. Downward's office own 9 DEC VT240 Graphics terminal K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 345000H7 F own K DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn B 040306JH8 ownK DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn TAF 5808 own TXA5: VAX 2 TT14KTT14: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA MarkB's office own L DEC VT240 Graphics terminal (67)K DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K34 ownK DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 33207224 ownKG DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39820 own) TXA1: VAX 2 TT15KTT15: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA P. Vavra's office own4C DEC VT100-AA sn PN 42553 KMS # A97192&TXA2: VAX VT125 up gradeww 4014-1 id B 054043C Graphics tablet 4953 id B 010162 KMS # A9677TT4: **Empty**TT5: No interfaceTT6: No interfaceTT7: **Empty**TT10: **Empty**TT11: H sn ABY 156829TXA1: DEC VT240 Graphics terminalp6 DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K346 DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 332072243 DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39820 NTXA2: DEC VT125 up grade sn PN 42553 KMS # A9719 (VT100AA)NTXA3: DEC VT125 up grade sn PN 32198 (VT100AA)3TXA4: DEC VT100-AA sn ABM 7076R9TXA5: DEC VT240 GraphiIcs terminalp6 -- DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 345000H76 -- DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn B 040306JH83 -- DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn TAF 5808 3TXA6: TEKTRONIX 4014-1 id B 054043cC -- Graphics tablet 4953 id B 010162 KMS # A9677eCTXA7: TEKTRONIX 4014-1 id B 066698 KMS # A9743d3TXB0: DEC VT100-AA sn ABE 84203TXB1: DEC VT100-AA sn PN 38567-9TXB2: DEC J VT240 Graphics terminalE6 DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601HY66 DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 34905T333 DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39825* TXB3: ?*9TXB4: DEC VT240 Graphics terminalT6 DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K186 DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 35002RY63 DEC MONITOR VR201-B sn TAM 1817*4TXB5: DEC VT102 sn TA 1345074TXB6: DEKC VT102 sn TA 0312959TXB7: DEC VT240 Graphics terminal6 -- DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 34900DC96 -- DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn B 0326051573 -- DEC MONITOR VR201-C sn TAD 8303PDP 11/45 TERMINALSNTT0: DEC VT100-AA up/gd sn AB 98913 KMS # A10243 (VT100NA)CTT1: DEC LA120-AA sn WF 06007 KMS # A9717CTT2: TEKTRONIX 4014-1 id B 032002 KMS # LA88303 Joystick 4952 id B 020788 3TT3: TEKTRONIX 4014-1 id B 054043wC Graphics tablet 4953 id B 010162 KMS # A9677 TT4: **Empty**TT5: No interfaceTT6: No interfaceTT7: **Empty**rTT10: **Empty** TT11: **Empty**ATT12: **Empty**D9TT13: DEC VT240 Graphics terminal 6 DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 345000H76 DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn B 040306JH83 M DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn TAF 5808 9TT14: DEC VT240 Graphics terminal 6 DEC PWR SUP VS240-A sn AB 40601K346 DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 332072243 DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39820 NTT15: DEC VT125 up grade sn PN 42553 KMS # A9719 (VT100AA)TT16: **Empty** 3DEC MODEM DF02-AA sn AS 85565CTEKTRONIX 4631 Storage screen FEX Diagnostic lab own E N hard copy unit sn/id B 020384 KMS # A 9676aCTEKTRONIX 4632 Video screen FEX Diagnostic lab own2E hard copy unit sn/id B 204524 KMS # A 9912 wwIA Engineering Lab ownL MICRO TERM MIME 2A (75)2 TTA7KTTA7: (9600,9600) VT100 EIA Dial in Line ownL BELL MODEM DATA SET 212A DATA PHONE 300/1200 (72)2 TTB0IO5Ì1 REPAIREDIGITAL,SERVICE (313)-348-8902 508 AFTER HOURS SERVICE EXTENSIONT;DIGITAL,SERVICE (313)-348-8900 NOVI SERVICE NUMBER9DIGITAL,SERVICE (313)-995-5600 ANN ARBOR SERVICE N******************************************************************************N* DIGITAL,SERVICE ** (800)-323-6612 ** NIGHT LINE *N* DIGITAL,SERVICE ** (800)-482-0164 ** (11/45-7075) (VAX 82C56670H) *N**************************************P****************************************&TEKTRONIX,SERVICE (313)-478-5200HSherard,Bob (703)-273-7900 DeAnza East coast sales/serviceww00,9600) VT100 20mA DMS SEM lab ownM DEC VT100-AA sn AB 16312 KMS # A9809 (114)2 TTB5KTTB5: (1200,1200) LA120 20mA DMS LP, SEM lab ownM DEC LA120-DA sn PND 1446 KMS # A10214 (114)2 TTB6KTTB6: ( 300, 300) Q important that if problems develop or areIsuspected of being present, that they are promptly reported to the system Gmanager. The problem will be analyzed and sent in to DEC. If possible %a rapid work-around will be provided.EAThis help file will provide information on current Field Tests. 2 DECalcT This Field Test is over 2 DECgraph  This Field Test is over 2 FortranIFT2 of the Fortran V4.0 compiler is now on the system. This compiler has Ha number of new featueRs including record structures (like Pascal). MoreFimportantly for most of us, it generates more highly optimized code. IObject files created by the V4.0 compiler may execute 2 times faster than Ibefore. Since the VAX is currently heavily loaded with compute intensiveMwork, it is hoped that the V4.0 compiler will lower the burden on our system. 7If problems with the V4.0 compiler are discovered, ie, 9 1. It generates incorrect code which does not generate ! the same results as beSfore.f; 2. The compler will not compile a source file it used to83 3. A previously working feature, ceases to work.6IIt is very easy to return to the V3.6 compiler either on a per user basis or on a system wide basis.JIf a particular user desires to use the V3.6 compiler as his/her default, 9compiler, this may be accomplished by issuing the commandK $ @SYS$LIBRARY:USEFORTV3Heither interactively or in one's LOGIN.COM file. The V3.6 compiler willKthen become the default compiler until one logs off and logs back in again. HIf any user feels the need to do this, please contact the system manager&explaining the reasons for doing this.FThe object modules produced by the V3.6 compiler and the V4.0 compilerIshould be compatible. If for any reason they are not, contact the system manager.3 Restrictions ; 1. The LEN function may not currently be used with string # litterals or character arrays.-ww sn ABY 1568 (73) SELANAR GRAPDHICSPAGEPCS750J PHONEBOOKPLOT10REMINDER RESEQUENCE RESEQUENCERESEQUENCEESEQUENCEESEQUENCE RESEQUENCE RESEQUENCERESEQUENCE RESEQUENCE RESEQUENCECE VS240-A sn AB 40601K34 ownK DEC KEYBOARD LK201-AA sn BO 33207224 ownK DEC MONITOR VR201-A sn HK 39820 ownTT14: PDP 11/452 TXA2KTXA2: (9600,9600) VT125 EIA Pam Vavra office ow B1 DCUWA DCU.EXE -- The DECalc Directory Maintenance UtilityTA ____________________________________________________iIDCU.EXE is a standalone utility that allows the user to manipulate DECalcR directories.MEach DECalc user creates a DECalc directory for grid storage. The directory,uMof the form SYS$LOGIN:HOOuuuuuu.DIR, where uuuuuu is the user's UIC, containstMa file DECALCPRV.NAM (The DECalc 'name' file) which DECalc uses to translate lity to r WOYJB1 DCU.A DCU.EXE -- The DECalc Directory Maintenance UtilityaA ____________________________________________________sIDCU.EXE is a standalone utility that allows the user to manipulate DECalct directories.MEach DECalc user creates a DECalc directory for grid storage. The directory,EOof the form SYS$LOGIN:HOOuuuuuu.DIR, where uuuuuu is the user's UIC, contains ayMfile DECALCPRV.NAM (The DECalc 'name' file) which DECalc uses to translate 40eMchar Xacter DECalc grid names to DCL file specifications of the form 000xxP.GRDcM('grid' file name). In order to insert a grid into a users DECalc directory,l8this file must be modified to recognize the added grid. JIn common directories, the name file is called DECALCCOM.NAM, and the grid!files are of the form 000xxC.GRD.JDCU allows provides the user with a means of modifying a DECalc name file.2 SHOWI The SHOW command displays the current contents of the DECalc name file.bIDCU prompts thYe user for the DECalc directory specification, and whether S*the DECalc directory is private or common.IFor example, if the user TUCKER, who has a UIC of [260,003] wants to SHOWthis DECalc name file:IN------------------------------------------------------------------------------$ RUN DECALC$LIBRARY:DCU DECalc Utility 1.0 L -- List DECalc grids# S -- Show a DECalc grid name filen% M -- Modify the UIC of DECalc gridsI3 I -- Insert a DECalc grid into a DECalc directory Z E -- Exit the DECalc Utility Option ? S3 What is the directory name ? [TUCKER.HOO260003]c< Is the DECalc directory private or common ? ( P or C ) ? PB 200 27-APR-1984 14:12:10 260003 37 5 1984 Software Budget> 200 27-APR-1984 14:12:43 260003 37 0 Accounts Payable; 200 27-APR-1984 14:13:08 260003 37 6 Salary ReviewlN------------------------------------------------------------------------------GThe following information is displayed for each entry in the d[irectory.oColumn------ 1 DECalc version numberm! 2 Date of the grid's creationh! 3 Time of the grid's creation& 4 The UIC of the grid's creator. ( 5 Length of the grid in disk blocks. 6 DECalc grid number 7 DECalc grid nameNThe DECalc grid number is used to construct the DCL file specification for theMgrid. For example, grid 6 (Salary Review) has a DCL file spec of 00006P.GRD.d2 LISTThe LIST commandGThe list command will list the names of all DECa\lc grids contained in aeKspecified directory. The grid name is read from the grid file itself, thisr0command can be used even if no name file exists.KGenerally, this command is used prior to the isert command to determine thee(DCL file specification of a DECalc grid.M-----------------------------------------------------------------------------l DECalc Utility 1.0 L -- List DECalc grids# S -- Show a DECalc grid name filet% M -- Modify the UIC of DECalc gridsa3 I -- Insert a DE]Calc grid into a DECalc directory  E -- Exit the DECalc Utility Option ? L1 What is the directory name ? [TUCKER.HOO260003]s=SYS$USERSET:[CASTALDI.HOO260003]00000P.GRD;1 Accounts Payable ASYS$USERSET:[CASTALDI.HOO260003]00005P.GRD;1 1984 Software Budgeto:SYS$USERSET:[CASTALDI.HOO260003]00006P.GRD;1 Salary ReviewM_____________________________________________________________________________ 2 INSERTThe INSERT commandLThe INSERT command allows the user to insert a grid into a D ^ECalc directory.LOne of the most frequent uses of this command is to retrieve an accidentallylost grid from a backup media.JThe INSERT command will ask the user where the grid is to be inserted. ItHwill then ask for the DCL file specification of the grid to be inserted.JTypically, the user loads an old [HOO...] directory from a backup media toKa temporary working directory. The LIST command is then used to determine sKwhich grid is to be inserted. INSERT requires that the user supply th _e DCLHKfile specification for the grid to be inserted. The INSERT command is then 9run to replace the grid in the active [HOO...] directory.FNNote: Do not load the grid to be restored into the active [HOO...] directory.GAs an example, lets suppose our user TUCKER has loaded an old [HOO...] Mdirectory into [TUCKER.BACK]. He wants to put the grid "Accounts Receivable"F!into his active DECalc directory.WN------------------------------------------------------------------------------ `DECalc Utility 1.0 L -- List DECalc grids# S -- Show a DECalc grid name fileO% M -- Modify the UIC of DECalc grids 3 I -- Insert a DECalc grid into a DECalc directoryn E -- Exit the DECalc Utility Option ? L, What is the directory name ? [TUCKER.BACK]BSYS$USERSET:[CASTALDI.DECALC.HOOTEST]00000P.GRD;1 Accounts PayableESYS$USERSET:[CASTALDI.DECALC.HOOTEST]00001P.GRD;1 Accounts ReceivableFSYS$USERSET:[CASTALDI.DECALC.HOOTEST]00005P.GRD;1 1984 Software Budget?SYS$USERSET:[CASaTALDI.DECALC.HOOTEST]00006P.GRD;1 Salary Review L -- List DECalc grids# S -- Show a DECalc grid name filet% M -- Modify the UIC of DECalc gridst3 I -- Insert a DECalc grid into a DECalc directoryl E -- Exit the DECalc Utility Option ? I5 Enter the DECalc directory in which to insert grid:A1 What is the directory name ? [TUCKER.HOO260003]t< Is the DECalc directory private or common ? ( P or C ) ? P= What is the DCL file specification of the grid to insert ? i [TUCKE bR.BACK]00001P.GRDrD Is the grid you want to insert named "Accounts Receivable" ? YESB Enter the UIC of the grid to be inserted: [XXX,YYY] ? [260,003] Please wait .....fN------------------------------------------------------------------------------7The user may then exit DCU, the grid has been inserted.B2 MODIFYKThe MODIFY command is used to change the UIC of a DECalc grid. Suppose ourhKuser TUCKER has had his UIC changed from [260,003] to [260,011]. He can no Mlonger delete orc overwrite his DECalc grids because of DECalc's UIC checking.mBHe can use use the MODIFY command command to change his grid UICs.N------------------------------------------------------------------------------ DECalc Utility 1.0 L -- List DECalc grids# S -- Show a DECalc grid name filer% M -- Modify the UIC of DECalc gridsm3 I -- Insert a DECalc grid into a DECalc directoryl E -- Exit the DECalc Utility Option ? M1 What is the directory name ? [TUCKER.HOO260003] < dIs the DECalc directory private or common ? ( P or C ) ? P0 The name of the grid is : 1984 Software Budget" The UIC for the file is : 2600036 Do you wish to change the UIC for the file ( Y/N ) ?, What is the new UIC [XXX,YYY] ? [260,011], The name of the grid is : Accounts Payable" The UIC for the file is : 2600036 Do you wish to change the UIC for the file ( Y/N ) ?, What is the new UIC [XXX,YYY] ? [260,011]M-----------------------------------------------------------------------------e3And so on, until all the grids have been processed.twwues but can be changed by the user at any time with the MISSVAL and MISSFIX commands.l82 Usage_Notes - Restrictions and other caveats 5 * The DATATRIEVE EDIT facility is not supported.iI * Continued commands are supported. However, since DTRWHIZ does noth> look for a ';' to indicate the end of a command, breaking theF command line at a 'logically complete' location will cause DATATRIEVE= to execute the w ޡ 1 FINDFILECFINDFILE is a program that returns the name and directory of a filenBgiven a logical (lbn) or physical (cylinder/track/sector) address.7To use FINDFILE you need to define a symbol as follows:) $ FINDFILE :== $SYS$UTILITY:FINDFILE.EXEt)The syntax for the command is as follows:sA $ FINDFILE {[/LBN=l] | [/CYLINDER=c/TRACK=t/SECTOR=s]} [device]eEFINDFILE will return the file name and directory, or return a messagehEthat it could not find the file. Either a g`#: 1 DTRWHIZtHDTRWHIZ - A data connectivity utility which links VAX-11 DATATRIEVE withHa variety of spreadsheet tools including DECalc, MultiPlan and Visicalc.GIt a DECUS 'freebe' supplied by the DECalc development group. DTRWHIZ Luses CALLABLE DATATRIEVE to extract data from DATATRIEVE and then creates anKintermediate file containing the data in a format acceptable to the utilityINselected to receive it. Once the intermediate file has been created, the userMexits from DTR hWHIZ, invokes the selected utility and instructs the utility toeNread the intermediate file. Examples for each of the supported utilities will)be presented later in this help message. tHIt is assumed that the DTRWHIZ user is familiar with both DATATRIEVE andGthe utility for which the data are to be extracted. Through the use ofdKthe COMMAND FILE and BATCH FILE options in DTRWHIZ, the DATATRIEVE side canFbe made quite simple. These options also are described later. SimplyJstated, DATATRIEiVE commands can be pre-defined in a file and that file canFbe invoked from within DTRWHIZ. This eliminates the need for users toLremember complex DATATRIEVE commands while enabling them to benefit from the-data manipulation capabilities of DATATRIEVE.s;2 Syntax - How to get your data out of DATATRIEVEcLAfter invoking DTRWHIZ (ie. 'RUN SYS$UTILITY:DTRWHIZ'), the user READY's theNdesired DOMAIN then issues one of the following DTRWHIZ commands followed by aODATATRIEVE Record Selection jExpression (RSE). The only restriction is that thesLRSE must be valid for the DATATRIEVE 'LIST' command. (DTRWHIZ actually usesIthe LIST command to extract the data prior to reformatting it.) If nNrepresents a valid Record Selection Expression, then the format of the DTRWHIZextraction commands is - u DECALC  MULTIPLAN e VISICALC =2 Qualifiers - How to get your data the way you want it OOnce the extraction command has been accepted and processed, DTR kWHIZ asks for -iD ORIENTATION - NORMAL or TRANSPOSED? Normal orientation would lookA the same as the results of a DATATRIEVE 'PRINT' command, RecordsaB become Rows, Fields become Columns. With Transposed Orientation,/ Fields become Rows and Records become Columns. @ USE HEADINGS? If desired, the Field Names will be included asC Headings in the output file. For Normal Orientation, the HeadingsrA will appear above the Columns. With Transposed Orientation, the 6 Field Names will occupy l the First Column of Each Row.B LOCATION WITHIN THE UTILITY? This refers to the location of the' Top-Left Corner of the data rectangle. C NOTE: For VISICALC and DECalc, the Location is determined from thea? position of the cursor at the time the data is loaded into the spreadsheet.xC OUTPUT FILE NAME? This is the name of the file that will containlC the reformatted data. This is the file name to be referenced whenr# loading the data into the utility.9 CHARACTER? DECalc separat mes data items in a table fileED with a delimiter character. DECalc will need to know this character6 when it processes a table file. It defaults to .=2 Loading_Data - Inserting data into the spreadsheet A LOADING EXTRACTED DATA INTO THE UTILITIES - How to use the datacHEach of the supported utilities has a unique approach to loading foreignHdata (ie. data produced outside the utility). In the following examplesHthe symbol will indicate where to supply the OUTPUT FnILE NAMEselected within DTRWHIZ. DECALC \ST a* MULTIPLAN TOS (Set format to Symbolic) TL  VISICALC /S#L =2 Loading_Data - Inserting data into the spreadsheet 82 Commands - DTRwhiz advanced commands HThe following commands are recognized by DTRWHIZ, all other commands areIpassed to DATATRIEVE. These commands are described in more detail later.2I NODEFAULT Gives the user more control over the format of thoe output.> DEFAULT Returns DTRWHIZ to the default formatting mode.: VMS Gives the user access to VMS Command Level from within DTRWHIZ.) HELP Displays this information. % @ Invoke a COMMAND FILE.6# BATCH Invoke a BATCH FILE.lE FIXMISSING Allows replacement of missing data with some value.e+ NOFIXMISSING Disables FIXMISSING mode. 0 MISSVAL Indicates data to be replaced.A MISSFIX Specifes vpalue to use in place of missing data., 3 NODEFAULT,0 NODEFAULT MODE Format: DTRWHIZ> NODEFAULT LUnder NODEFAULT MODE, the user can specify the Orientation, Use of Headings,Iand Location in the Spreadsheet for each Field in the individually.rJThis might be useful for complex spreadsheets where data are to be entered$into cells which are not contiguous.ANOTE: Visicalc and DECalc are NOT supported under NODEFAULT MODE.E3 VMS= VMS Format: DTRWHIZ> VMS or DTRWHIZ> V qMS command sJThrough this command users can enter system command mode or simply executeIa single system level command (eg. DIRECTORY, EDIT, DELETE, etc). In thenJfirst case (ie.'VMS' alone), the user enters system level command mode andMremains there until the LOGOUT command is entered. The user is then returnede to DTRWHIZ.aMIn the second case (ie. 'VMS command'), the 'command' is executed as a systemLJlevel command and, upon completion of the command, is returned to DTRWHIZ.JNOTE: Th ris feature is implemented through the use of SPAWNED SUBPROCESSES.3 @21 @ - COMMAND FILES Format: DTRWHIZ> @filename yFDTRWHIZ will look to the file specified for commands and will continueMreading commands from the file until the end of the file is reached. DTRWHIZU,then will return to input from the keyboard.GNOTE: DTRWHIZ will be read from the Command File ONLY when a COMMAND isfC expected. Input for which the user is prompted will still be readaA from the keyboard. All 'format sting' input (eg. Orientation, UseaB of Headings/Row Names, and Location information) is to be entered from the keyboard. ? Also, use of the DATATRIEVE '*.' prompt for input feature fromoA within a Command File will cause DTRWHIZ to look to the keyboard, for the response to the prompt.3 BATCHt8 BATCH - BATCH FILES Format: DTRWHIZ> BATCH filename ILike the '@filename' command, the 'BATCH filename' command causes DTRWHIZ)Kto read commands from the file specified except that ALL INPUT i ts read fromoLthe Batch File until the end of the file has been reached. Input thereafteris read from the keyboard.HNOTE: A Batch File may contain other BATCH FILE commands or COMMAND FILEB commands. Command Files may contain BATCH FILE commands or otherA COMMAND FILE commands as well. However, if Batch File 1 invokesiB Batch File 2, control will be returned to the keyboard at the endC of Batch File 2 even if more commands remain in Batch File 1. Thea same applies for COMMAND FILES. uF But, if a BATCH FILE invokes a COMMAND file, control will be returnedB to the BATCH FILE at the end of the COMMAND FILE. A COMMAND FILE@ invoking a BATCH FILE behaves the same way. Therefore, a BATCH9 FILE can invoke multiple COMMAND FILES (and vice versa).a 3 FIXMISSING5 FIXMISSING MODE Format: DTRWHIZ> FIXMISSING l% Format: DTRWHIZ> MISSVAL string f% Format: DTRWHIZ> MISSFIX string sJUnder FIXMISSING MODE, data fields which contain no entry can have a valueMsubstitu vted by DTRWHIZ. When this mode is active, any entry which matches the LMISSVAL string is replaced by the MISSFIX string. These strings have defaultNvalues but can be changed by the user at any time with the MISSVAL and MISSFIX commands.n82 Usage_Notes - Restrictions and other caveats 5 * The DATATRIEVE EDIT facility is not supported.bI * Continued commands are supported. However, since DTRWHIZ does noth> look for a ';' to indicate the end of a command, breaking theF command line at a 'logically complete' location will cause DATATRIEVE= to execute the command rather than prompt for continuation."sJ * Sources for DTRwhiz are located on KMS$SYSTEMUSR1:[SYSUTL.DTRWHIZ]wwld be dimensioned to 80.HRESCOM restores COMMON to the values saved with SAVCOM. This eliminatesGthe steps involved in checking the table each time a new graph is to be displayed.23 BSYMS - (4.1.4) Symbol Drawing1This draws symbols for data points when required. xlogical or physical addressLEmust be specified, and both can not be specified. FINDFILE checks thedAaddress to be sure it is in range for the specified device. If no.-device is specified, it defaults to SYS$DISK.FFINDFILE understands volume sets and executes rather quickly. FINDFILEFworks by mapping INDEXF.SYS into process space and analyzing retrievalFpointers to locate the file which occupies the specifed address. If a Kfile is located, directory back-links are recursively searched to determineu5the directory-spec. The information is then reported.rHThis utility was taken from KMS$DECUSUSR1:[VAX84A.BATTELLE.FINDFILE] andwas written by Mark Oakley Battelle Columbus Labortories 505 King Aver Columbus, Ohio 43201n 614/424-5086 wwLINE)Parameters Entered:B X,Y are the screen coordinated to which the bar is to be drawn.9 LINE is the direction is which the line is to be drawn.3 0 draws a bar similar to the last one drawn.= 2 draws vz71 DAY ; DAY is a micro image whose sole purpose is to find oute;which day of the week it is and to set the name of that daye?(ie, MONDAY, TUESDAY, ..... SUNDAY) into the DCL global symbol BTODAY.: DAY.EXE is located on SYS$UTILITY. Its source is on >DUA0:[SYSUTL.MISCUTL]. It was taken from a VAX Sig Tape. The>original name, tape and location seems to be lost but it seems<it was on one of the VAX83* directories probably with a namedifferent than DAY.twwr.1 MAXX is the X axis screen maximum of the bar.1 MAXY is the Y axis screen maximum of the bar.6 ISYMB is the integer symbol code from 0 through 15.6 It indicates the type of line shading to fill the box.; LSPACE is the distance in raster units between the lines  shading the bar.?FILBOX fills each bar of the chart with the specified grid work for shading.53 LABEL - (4.1.6) Tic Mark Labeling*Displays the tic mark labels o |51 TIMEF The function of this command is to perform time calculation services. Format:7 TIME [ time-spec [ (operator) time-spec] ... ] E By default if no operands are specified the command will display thec1 current system time and the user's connect time.rH If only one operand is supplied, then instead of calculating the user'sJ connect time the operand (which must be in absolute time format) will be F subtracted from the current system time and that resultin}g delta time. displayed along with the current system time.: [] indicates optional. () are required for the operator.2 '...' only valid for (+),(-),(*), & (/) operators The TIME symbol is defined by:i TIME :== $FERMI$EXE:TIMEu 2 Time-specd< The times values which may be specified are absolute time, 7 delta time, keyword for an absolute time or a positiveh integer value. 3 Absolute_timee Formats:t dd-mmm-yyyy[:][hh:mm:ss.ss] ; 1. If you specify both the date (dd-mmm ~-yyyy) and the timei> (hh:mm:ss.ss), you may type the colon between the date and6 the time or seperate them with a tab or a blank. < The lexical function 'F$TIME()' may be used to generate ? the current time value (this returns the value with a blanka( between the date and time fields). @ On output there will always be a colon between the date and  the time of day fields.m< 2. If only the date is specified the system will supply the3 current time of day for the missing time field.m> 3. If you specify a time of day you can truncate the time on = the right. The truncated fields will be zero filled (Seeo/ point 4 if you wish to supply punctuation).nB 4. If you omit any of the fields but supply the punctuation marks= the system will supply the current system time values as 1; defaults (do not confuse this with truncation where thes0 punctuation marks are also omited; point 3). 3 Delta_time Formatl dd[-]hh[:mm:ss.ss]E When you specify a delta time value, you can truncate the time fieldeD on the right; you may also omit any of the variable fields, as long% as you supply the punctuation marks. > When any field is omitted from a delta time value, the system% supplies a value of 0 for the field.b 3 Integer A An positive integer value may also be specified. The value must, be within the range:L  0 - 2147483647 3 KeywordsC The following keywords represent certain absolute dates (the timesl are always 00:00:00.00):n# YESTERDAY yesterday's start.s* TODAY start of the current day.# TOMORROW start of tomorrow. 0 THISMONTH First day of the current month.- NEXTMONTH First day of the next month.e1 LASTMONTH First day of the previous month. / THISYEAR January 1 of the current year.b= THISWEEK Monday of the current week (possibly today).s: NEXTWEEK Next Monday (first day of the next week).: LASTWEEK Monday of the previous (full 7-day) week. 2 OperatorC The operators available are addition, subtraction, multiplication,  division, and comparison." The syntax for the operators are: (+) Addition (-) Subtractiona (*) Multiplication (/) Division (=) Compare for equal to$ (<>) Compare for not equal to! (<) Compare for less thano- (<=) Compare for less than or equal toL$ (>) Compare for greater than0 (>=) Compare for greater than or equal to (?) General comparisonC The operator MUST be enclosed in parenthesis's. This is to avoid R? syntax confusion with the '-' used in the time specifications. > Note: If any of the results yealds a negative time value the7 absolute value of the calculation is displayed.t3 Addition (+)? This operator will add the two operands and return the result.t= Valid combinations and the type of result returned are shownn below: ? TIME absolute_time (+) delta_ti me --> absolute_time2? TIME delta_time (+) absolute_time --> absolute_timen< TIME delta_time (+) delta_time --> delta_time9 TIME integer (+) integer --> integeri3 Subtraction (-)< This operator will subtract the two operands and return the< result. Valid combinations and the type of result returned are shown below:b< TIME absolute_time (-) absolute_time --> delta_time? TIME absolute_time (-) delta_time --> absolute_timeu< TIME delta_time (-) delta_time --> delta_time9 TIME integer (-) integer --> integer9 Note: If any of the results yealds a negative value the6 absolute value of the calculation is returned.3 Multiplication (*)< This operator will multiply the two operands and return the; result. Valid combinations and the type of result returndg are shown below:f< TIME delta_time (*) integer --> delta_time< TIME integer (*) delta_time --> delta_time9 TIME integer (*) integer --> integera3 Division (/): This operator will divide the two operands and return the< result. Valid combinations and the type of result returned are shown below:n9 TIME delta_time (/) delta_time --> integeri< TIME delta_time (/) integer --> delta_time9 TIME integer (/) integer --> integer 3 Comparison (?); This operator will compare the two operands and return thet results of the comparison.r6 TIME absolute_time (?) absolute_time( GREATER_THAN& EQUAL_TO' LESS_THAN 0 TIME delta_time (?) delta_time% GREATER_THANs# EQUAL_TOa$ LESS_THAN3 EQ (=): This operator wil compare the two operands and return YES* if they are equal and NO if they are not.. TIME absolute_time (=) absolute_time/ TIME absolute_time (EQ) absolute_time + TIME delta_time (=) delta_timer, TIME delta_time (EQ) delta_time 3 NE (<>) ; This operator will compare the two operands and return YES 0 if they are not equal and NO if they are equal./ TIME absolute_time (<>) absolute_time / TIME absolute_time (NE) absolute_timel, TIME delta_time (<>) delta_time, TIME delta_time (NE) delta_time3 LT (<); This operator will compare the two operands and return YES 6 if the first operand is less than the second operand, otherwise it will return NO.r. TIME absolute_time (<) absolute_time/ TIME absolute_time (LT) absolute_timei+ TIME delta_time (<) delta_timea, TIME delta_time (LT) delta_time 3 LE (<=); This operator will compare the two operands and return YES: if the first operand is less than or equal to the second & operand, otherwise it will return NO./ TIME absolute_time (<=) absolute_timer/ TIME absolute_time (LE) absolute_timee, TIME delta_time (<=) delta_time, TIME delta_time (LE) delta_time3 GT (>); This operator will compare the two operands and return YES 9 if the first operand is greater than the second operand,r otherwise it will return NO.i. TIME absolute_time (>) absolute_time/ TIME absolute_time (GT) absolute_timeA+ TIME delta_time (>) delta_timer, TIME delta_time (GT) delta_time 3 GE (>=); This operator will compare the two operands and return YESn< if the first operand is greater than or equal to the second& operand, otherwise it will return NO./ TIME absolute_time (>=) absolute_time / TIME absolute_time (GE) absolute_time, TIME delta_time (>=) delta_time, TIME delta_time (GE) delta_time 2 Qualifiers/DEBUGA This option will show the intermediate results of a sequence of I? operations. It also disables some internal error checking so t the output may not be correct.i/SYMBOL=symbol_name F This option will cause the results of the calculation to be stored inF the specified symbol instead of being displayed to the output device.wwrom IYEAR.=3 YMDYD - (4.3.4) Year Month Day ConversionEConverts dates from the year, month, day format (YYYYMMDD) to a year,day format (YYYYDDD).Call:1 NETMAPD NETMAP is a DECNET network mapping utility whose location is onJ[VAX84A.DFWLUG.SOHIO.NETMAP]. It has built in HELP. However, that is itsonly documentation.iww day of the month.Parameters Returned: IYEAR is the year. IDAYS is the day of the year.IIf MONTH is outside the domain of 1 to 12, IYEAR2 will differ from IYEAR.;3 COMSET - (4.4.2) General COMMON Setting GSets the value of any item in COMMON. Its two arguments ˙ 1 GETQUOTAD The function of this program is to fetch the disk quota information? for the specified UIC and return this information in the localsE symbols supplied. Optionally the program will display on SYS$OUTPUTgA a formatted display of the disk quota information in L&N format.  Syntax:. $ GETQUOTA :== $SYS$UTILITY:GETQUOTA" $ GETQUOTA [ [ggg,mmm] ]8 If no UIC is specified the current process UIC is used. 2 Parametert> The optional parameter is the UIC of the user that disk quota information is desired for.* ggg - is the group number of the user.+ mmm - is the member number of the user. C If no UIC is specified then the UIC of the current process is usede (this is you).n 2 Qualifiers/DEVICE=ddcu: (D=SYS$DISK:) A This qualifier specifies the disk where the users quota is to beoD obtained from. If this qualifier is not specified then the current" default disk is used (SYS$DISK:)./OVERDRAFT=symboleB This qutali fier will obtain the number of disk blocks the user is@ allowed to use ABOVE AND BEYOND the his/her permanent quota and* return it in the local 'symbol' supplied.B This is the value maintained by the VAX/VMS disk quota system andE its only use is to allow a file already open to be extended past thenB permanent quota limit. Once past the permanent limit the user is0 not allowed to open any new files for writting./PERMQUOTA=symbolCB This qualifier will fetch the number of blocks of permane IBASEY (IWORD)Parameters Entered:H IWORD is the integer used to designate the item in the Y axis section  of COMMON. -2 TCS Terminal Control System SoftwareD3 INITT - (2.1) Initialization of Terminal and Terminal Status Area@Initialization of the terminal and the Terminal Status Area must@be accomplished as the first step in the use of Terminal Control6System routines. Initializing INITT accomplishes this.Calling Sequence: CALL INITT (IBAUD)Parameter nt spaceB the user is allowed to use on the disk and return it in the local 'symbol' supplied.eC This is the value maintained by the VAX/VMS disk quota system. Asr@ long as the user's disk usage is less than this value he/she isA allowed to open files for writting. When the usage exceeds thisw; value the user is stopped from opening files for writting.n!/QUOTA=symbolB! This qualifier will fetch then number of blocks that the user isB! allowed to keep on the disk while not logged in an d return it in! the local 'symbol' supplied.!hE! This value is maintained by the L&N quota system and is obtained by E! subtracting the overdraft value from the permanent quota value. IfoE! the user's usage is greater than this value the user is not allowed.B! to completely login until he has reduced his disk usage to below ! this value.e!n!/SCRATCH=symbolE! This qualifier will obtain the number of blocks the user is allowed ?! to use while logged in ABOVE AND BEYOND his/her L&N quota ande2! return the value in the local 'symbol' supplied.! E! This value is maintained by the L&N quota system and is obtained byE! using the overdraft value. If a user has exceeded his quota and isnC! using part of his/her scratch quota he/she will not be allowed to C! completely login until he/she has reduced the disk usage to below ! the user's L&N quota.-!. /SHOW_QUOTA /NOSHOW_QUOTA (D)i: This qualifier will cause the program to format the quotaD information and display it on SYS$O UTPUT. The display will containB the L&N related information. If you want the VAX/VMS information see the SHOW QUOTA command. /USAGE=symbolo> This qualifier will obtain the number of blocks of disk space< currently being used by the user and return it in the local 'symbol' supplied. wwrectangle.H3 DWINDO - (3.4) Second method of defining a virtual window C This subroutine uses a calling sequence similar to that of VWINDO.Calling Sequence:" CALL DWINDO (XMIN,XMA1 IFMOD_E The function of this program is to compare the modification dates ofiG specified files and depending on whether the results are true or falseeG execute a specified DCL command (similar to the DCL IF command). Thisa3 is a poor mans Module Management System (DEC/MMS).t Syntax:" $ IFMOD :== $SYS$UTILITY:IFMOD< $ IFMOD file_list operator file_list THEN dcl_commandE The basic idea is: If file A is used to generate file B, then IFMODiD can be used to determine if file A has been changed (since the last> time file B was created) and re-generate file B if necessary. 2 Parameters@ SPECIAL NOTE: To avoid syntax confusion between connectors andD file specifications it is strongly suggested that a space or tab? seperate the file_list's from the operators and connectors.r& file_list - file-spec[,file-spec,...]A file-spec[,file-spec,...] - is a list of file names seperated by= commas that are to have their modification dates fetched. B The highest date from the list of files specified is saved for comparison.aA The disk, directory, filename, and file type default from theiA previous file in the list. The first file in the list alwaysiB takes its disk and directory defaults from the current default directory.B Full directory and file wild carding is supported ('...', '-', '*', and '%').# operator - is on of the following:e4 .LT. .LE. .EQ. .NE. .GE. .GT.A  and they are used to control the comparision of the resultingo@ modification dates from the two lists of file names. A true5 or false value will be the result of the compare. D .OR. - is a connector which allows for the comparison of additional@ files in the same IFMOD command. The result is OR'ed to the& result of the previous comparison.5 $ IFMOD file_list operator file_list .OR. -t? file_list operator file_list THEN dcl_commandn: .AND. - is a connector which allows for the comparison of> additional files in the same IFMOD command. The result is4 AND'ed to the result of the previous comparison.6 $ IFMOD file_list operator file_list .AND. -? file_list operator file_list THEN dcl_commandsD .NOT. - is a modifier which will negate the true/false value of the comparison which follows it.D $ IFMOD .NOT. (file_list operator file_list) THEN dcl_commandA THEN - is used to indicate the end of the comparison operations.n< When this is encountered, if the result of the previous> comparisons was true then the DCL command that follows is$ executed, otherwise, it is not. 2 Parentheses ; Parentheses are allowed and work the way you would expect. = Parentheses will force the operations within to be of higher.0 precedence than the operations preceeding them.2 Operator_Precedence. Operator Precedence: .LT. 4 (high)) .LE. 4o .EQ. 4n .NE. 4O .GE. 4p .GT. 4r .NOT. 3t .AND. 2s .OR. 1 (low)= Parentheses will force the operations within to be of highere0 precedence than the operations preceeding them. 2 Example_1G9 The following is an example using IFMOD in a build proc:i; $ IFMOD := $disk:[directory]IFMOD /ECHO /ERROR=(.TRUE.)m $!8 $ IFMOD WHO.FOR .GT. WHO.OBJ THEN FORTRAN WHO.FOR $!/ $ IFMOD WHO.OBJ .GT. WHO.EXE THEN LINK WHO 2 Example_2 9 The following is an example using IFMOD in a build proc:c% $ IFMOD := $disk:[directory]IFMODl $! $ IFMOD/ERROR=(.FALSE.) -uC (TEST.FOR,TEST.INC) .LT. TEST.OBJ THEN GOTO ENDIF_CMPLo $ FORTRAN/LIST TEST.FOR $ PRINT/DELETE TEST.LIS $ ENDIF_CMPL:d $! $ IFMOD/ERROR=(.FALSE.) -u9 TEST1.MAR .LT. TEST1.OBJ THEN GOTO ENDIF_ASM: $ MACRO/LIST TEST1.MARe $ PRINT/DELETE TEST1.LIS $ ENDIF_ASM: $! $ IFMOD/ERROR=(.FALSE.) --6 (TEST.OBJ,TEST1.OBJ) .LT. TEST.EXE THEN -$ GOTO ENDIF_LINK! $ LINK/MAP/FULL TEST,TEST1n $ PRINT/DELETE TEST.MAP $ ENDIF_LINK:r 2 Example_3oD The following is an example using IFMOD in a build proc to maintain an object module library:; $ IFMOD := $disk:[directory]IFMOD /ERROR=(.TRUE.) /ECHOe $! $ IFMOD -t; QPARAM.FOR .GT. IPSSLIB.OLB/INCLUDE=(Q_PARAM) THEN -r# FORTRAN/LIST QPARAM.FORd $ IFMOD -t< QSTRING.FOR .GT. IPSSLIB.OLB/INCLUDE=(Q_STRING) THEN-$ FORTRAN/LIST QSTRING.FOR $ IFMOD -t< QUPCASE.FOR .GT. IPSSLIB.OLB/INCLUDE=(Q_UPCASE) THEN-$ FORTRAN/LIST QUPCASE.FOR $!/ $ IFMOD (QPARAM.OBJ,QSTRING,QUPCASE) .GT. -< IPSSLIB.OLB/INCLUDE=(Q_PARAM,Q_STRING,Q_UPCASE) THEN-; LIBRARY IPSSLIB/OBJECT QPARAM,QSTRING,QUPCASE- 2 Example_4dB The following is a real command procedure used to build the IFMOD program itself: $ verify = 'f$verify("NO")' * $ if "''ifmod_verify'" then set verifyD $!--------------------------------------------------------------A $! IFMOD.BLD - The function of this command procedure is toVD $! build an executable image of the program IFMOD. It will> $! test for modules which have changed and re-compile, $! (assemble) and Link the modules. $!B $! P1 - if specified, then P1 contains qualifiers for the@ $! LINK command to override the default qualifiers.B $! The first qualifier is not to contain a / since it@ $! will be added by the proc. This is done becauseC $! invoking the command procedure with a P1 value that@ $! begins with a / confuses DCL and it thinks the /B $! qualifier is for the command procedure invocation.D $!--------------------------------------------------------------7 $! 22-Jan-1984 R. A. Harris Initial Coding. D $!-------------------------------------------------------------- $ on error then goto abort" $ on control_y then goto abort $!D $! Suppress printing batch log file and set default directory' $! to where source is located.. $!; $ if f$mode() .eqs. "BATCH" then assign nla0: sys$print9 $ if f$mode() .eqs. "BATCH" then set default [.ifmod]i $!D $! Create a foreign symbol for IFMOD (boot strapping itself).A $! "SYS$COM:" is a logical name which is assigned to thenC $! disk and directory where an executable copy of IFMOD is  $! stored.e $!1 $ ifmod := $sys$com:ifmod/error=(.true.)/echo  $!? $! Define default qualifiers for compiles and assembles.eA $! This is done in such a way that simple changes to the= $! command procedure can change the defaults to ones)@ $! desirable for debugging enhancements to the program. $! $ macro := macro/nolist & $ !!!! macro := macro/nolist/debug$ $ !!!! macro := macro/list/debug $! $ message := message/nolist " $ !!!! message := message/list $!" $ link := link/notrace/nodebug% $ !!!! link := link/notrace/debugr# $ !!!! link := link/trace/debug - $ if p1 .nes. "" then link := 'link'/'p1'e $!D $! Set up to compile and assemble the progarm. If errors are7 $! detected then and error flag is set to yes.h $! $ error := noo $ on error then error := yes $!A $ ifmod ifmod.mar .gt. ifmod.obj then $ 'macro' ifmodtD $ ifmod ifmodrms.mar .gt. ifmodrms.obj then $ 'macro' ifmodrmsD $ ifmod ifmodlib.mar .gt. ifmodlib.obj then $ 'macro' ifmodlibD $ ifmod ifmodmsg.msg .gt. ifmodmsg.obj then $ 'message' ifmodmsg $!: $ if error then goto abort ! if errors, abortD $ on error then goto abort ! set up new on error action $! $! Link the program.r $!$ $ ifmod/error=(.false.)/noecho -1  (ifmod.obj,ifmodrms,ifmodlib,ifmodmsg) -r/ .lt. ifmod.exe then goto endif_link  $ v = f$verify("YES")" $ 'link' sys$input:/options ifmod,-a ifmodrms,- ifmodlib,- ifmodmsg& $ endif_link: !'f$verify(V)' $!8 $ if error then goto abort ! check for link errors. $ goto exitm $! $! Abort. $! $ abort:9 $ if verify then set verify !'f$verify("NO")'  $ exit 4 $! $! Exit. $! $ exit:9 $ if verify then set verify !'f$verify("NO")'i 2 Qualifiers/NOECHOi/ECHOC This qualifier will cause IFMOD to echo to SYS$OUTPUT: the commanduA that follows the 'THEN' parameter, if and only if the command iss passed to DCL for execution.E< This is a command qualifier and must be located immediately> following the IFMOD command and before the first 'file_list'. /ERROR=label? This qualifier will cause the command to return control at the D specified 'label' if one of the files specified has not been found.C This is very useful if say the object files were deleted since thec> last time the program was built. This could be used to forceD control to the compile phase reguardless of whether other files did exist.< This is a command qualifier and must be located immediately> following the IFMOD command and before the first 'file_list'.E If this qualifier is not specified and a specified file is not found 9 then an error will be issued and the command will abort.t@ If 'label' is specified as .TRUE. or .FALSE. then the following$ will happen if a file is not found:C .TRUE. - Assume the comparisons were true and execute the DCLeC command following the 'THEN'. .TRUE. may also beN specified as .T. = .FALSE. - Assume the comparisons were false and exit the > program normally (the DCL command following theA 'THEN' would NOT be executed). .FALSE. may alson" be specified as .F./INCLUDE=(module,...)A This file_spec qualifier specifies that the file it follows is aeA library file (OBJECT, TEXT, HELP, or MACRO library) and that thet> insertion dates for the list of 'modules' specified are to be extracted for comparison.C NOTE: The dates are the module insertion dates and have NO (NONE,n: ZERO, ZILCH) relation to the original input file's modification date./NOLOG/LOGA This qualifier specifies that the date fetched for each file (ort) library module) be logged to SYS$OUTPUT: < This is a command qualifier and must be located immediately> following the IFMOD command and before the first 'file_list'.2 Source_LocationT?Sources for IFMOD are on DUA0:[SYSUTL.IFMOD]. IFMOD is a DECUSIprogram from [VAX84A.LN.IFMOD].ewwhe height of a given number oflines in raster units.Calling Sequence: Variable = LINHGT (NUMLIN)Parameter Entered:FD 1 TRANSFORMe@ This program will transform the file specified from one type ofB carriage control to another. It will also perform bolding, rightB justification, and top of page margin insertion services as well. Syntax:" TRANSFORM input output: Command Definition: TRANSFORM :== $SYS$UTILITY:TRANSFORMB If the type of carriage control to use for the output file is not) specified it will be assumed to be LIST.i2 Carriage_control_types< The types of carr iage control files that are supported are:D LIST - This is the type of file EDT creates and a DIRECTORY/FULLD shows as 'carriage control'. There is no explicit carriage F control for each line of the file. Each line is treated as ifF there were a before the line and a following it. ItB is however possible to have additional , , & & characters stored in the file.C FORTRAN - This is the type of file a Fortran program creates b yBD default. The 1st character of each line is assumed to be a F Fortran carriage control character. See the Fortran Reference@ manual for details on what each type of character means.D NONE - This is the type of file created by RUNOFF. There is no = assumed carriage control, instead , , & t5 characters are explicitly stored in the file.a@ PRINT - This is the type of file created by the PAC II & III@ project management system and a DIRECTORY/FULL shows as ? 'Print file format'. The carriage control information YC is stored in a seperate 2 byte fixed control field for eachaC record on disk. This fixed control field is not typically t9 available to most utilities and Fortran programs. D This type of file may ONLY be used as input to the TRANSFORMB program. The output file may be either LIST, FORTRAN, or A NONE. Also, there is no file qualifier for specifing thelC  input file as a 'print file format' file. The program mustID determine this for itself by checking the file when it opens it. 2 Parameters2 There are 2 parameters required for this command:B input - this is the name of the file to be transformed. If noD carriage control type is explicitly specified then the input1 file's own carriage control type is used. E output - this is the name of the file where the transformed inpute> file is to be stored. If no carriage control type is E explicitly specified for the output file, it is assumed to ben LIST.e2 Command_Qualifiers /ASIS (D) F This qualifier specifies that the file is to be transformed from one ? carriage control type to another without any bolding or right A! justifiction services performed.: This is the default.t/BOLD[=n] (D=1) /NOBOLDeD This qualifier specifies that the file is to have bolding services B performed upon it. If /BOLD is spe cified, then the file will be C bolded. If /NOBOLD is specified, then all bolding currently in a  file will be removed.C 'n' specifies the number of times each line is to be over written.cF If 'n' equals 1 it will be over written once, if 'n' equals 2 it will be over written twice, etc...D Typically this value should be 1 or 2 to generate an excellent copyF ready for Xeroxing. If the value is too high it will cut through the- paper and could cause damage to the printer.d w/RIGHT=n /NORIGHTE 'n' = positive - This qualifier will pad each line on the left with5E the specified number of blanks. This will allow you to right E justify a file so that when it is printed the file will beaE positioned where you want it on the page (most likely you want torE center it, but this is up to you and the amount of righte justification you specify). E 'n' = negative - If the value specified is negative, then thelE specified number of lead ing blanks will be removed from theTE beginning of each line. In this case if the line is shorter thanrE the number of blanks to be removed, a blank line will be output. If0E a non-blank character is encountered before the specified number of4E blanks are removed from a line then negative right justification islE stopped for that line and the non-blank character found is the firsts9 character on the line. Tabs are NOT the same as blanks.1? 'n' = zero - no justification performed . This is the default.v/DOWN=nh/NODOWN D 'n' = positive - This qualifier will cause TRANSFORM to output 'n' D blank lines following a form feed character or Fortran top of E page carriage control character (a 1 in column 1). This will allow E? you to supply a larger margin at the top of the page then was nC supplied by the original file when printed on the desired printer.iB 'n' is less then or equal to zero - no lines are inserted at the) top of each page. This is the default.  lE Restriction/Limitation - At the current time TRANSFORM only inserts mD the blank lines following an explicit top of page carriage control D in the file. What this means to you is that if your file does not D begin with a top of page carriage control, the first page will not @ have the added top of page margin. In addition, some programs F attempt to only output a top of page carriage control when they must D skip lines at the bottom of the page. If the number of lines they E have to p ut onto a page is exactly equal to the number of printable hE lines on the page, they will let the printer just naturally skip to > the top of the next page instead of outputting a top of page C carriage control. Pages of this nature will also not receive the y" your desired top of page margins.2 File_qualifierse/LISTCD Input - When placed on the input file this qualifier specifies that? the type of carriage control the file actually has is to be / ignored and LIST carriage contro l assumed. EF Output - When placed on the output file this qualifier specifies thatA the input file is to be transformed to LIST carriage control P7 format and written to a LIST carriage control file.t/FORTRAND Input - When placed on the input file this qualifier specifies that? the type of carriage control the file actually has is to beh2 ignored and FORTRAN carriage control assumed. F Output - When placed on the output file this qualifier specifies thatD the input file  is to be transformed to FORTRAN carriage control : format and written to a FORTRAN carriage control file./NONErD Input - When placed on the input file this qualifier specifies that? the type of carriage control the file actually has is to bec/ ignored and NONE carriage control assumed. kF Output - When placed on the output file this qualifier specifies thatA the input file is to be transformed to NONE carriage control 7 format and written to a NONE carriage control file.Calling Sequence: CALL SEEMOD (LINE,IZAXIS,MODE)Parameters Returned:& LINE - Hardware line type in effect IZAXIS - Hardware Z-axis mode MODE - Software mode: 0 = alphanumeric 1 = vector 2 = point plot 3 = incremental plot 4 = dashB3 SEETRM - (5.7) Checks terminal speed, type, character size, etc.DThis subroutine returns the common variables which identify terminalCspeed, type, character size and maximum range of addre2 Source_location9?TRANSFORM is taken from [VAX84A.LN.TRANSFORM]. Sources are on IDUA0:[SYSUTL.TRANSFORM]Rwwed:@ ISPEED - Baud rate in characters per second (which has been set in INITT (Sec. 2.1) . ITERM - Terminal type set in TERM (Sec. 5.1)1 ICSIZE - Character size set in CHRSIZ (Sec. 5.3)5 MAXSR - Screen address range set in TERM (Sec. 5.1)H3 LINTRN - (6.1) Linear Transformation ELINTRN returns a user from either a logarith^1 OPS5EOPS5 is a Production System language used to create "Expert Systems".iEIt contains both a compiler and interpreter. The result of an OPS5 Ecommand is an executable image of the OPS5 code linked with the OPS5einterpreter. Command syntax:  l1$ OPS5 [OPS5-filespec[+...]] [,OTHER-filespec...]t@For instructions on how to enable the OPS5 command, see NEWUSER.2 Documentationr? Three documents describe the OPS5 language and the VAX-11 OPS5i implementation.s> 1. OPS5 User's Manual, written by Charles Forgy is a 57 page > document describing the syntax and semantics of OPS5. This= document may be obtained from the department of Computer p> Science, Carnegie-Mellon University, Pittsburgh, PA 15213. 7 NOTE: Any mention of the BLISS implementation of OPS5i, in the OPS5 User's Manual may be in error. > 2. VAX-11 OPS5 User's Guide describes the use and features of VAX-11 OPS5.> 3. VAX-11 OPS5 Installation Guide and Release Notes describes/ the installation procedure for VAX-11 OPS5.f 2 Parameters [OPS5-filespec]A Any valid VMS filespec containing OPS5 (and only OPS5) code.pA Presently, OPS5-filespecs may be separated by a plus (+) orRA a comma (,). In either case, the files will be concatenatedGD and treated as though they were contained in one file. B Concatenated files are not allowed when using modular 2 compilation (i.e. the /INDEXFILE qualifier).  e [OTHER-filespec]eE Any valid VMS filespec containing either object code or the nameVD of an object library. The default directory for these files isD your OPS$USERLIB. If more than one OTHER-filespec is specified= or if an OTHER-filespec is specified in addition to the t9 OPS5-filespec, they must be separated by commas [,]. 2 Qualifiers/DEBUGD The resulting executable image is linked with the debugger.D This is included primarily as an aid in debugging user supplied7 routine which are interfaced with an OPS5 program.h /NODEBUG (D)D The resulting executable image is not linked with the debugger. /SYSSHR (D).B Instructs the executable image produced by the OPS5 system toB use the system libraries as much as possible. This decreases& the size of the executable image. /NOSYSSHRsD Forces the executable image produced by OPS5 to be "self C contained". Code for all references to system libraries andrC the OPS5 Interpreter will be contained in the resulting image.5 This maximizes the size of the executable image.= /CODE (D)M7 The /CODE qualifier is assumed by default and r8 instructs the compiler to generate the BLISS and  MACRO code./NOCODEf9 The /NOCODE qualifier instructs the compiler toI: parse the OPS5 module but not generate the BLISS 6 or MACRO files necessary to run the OPS5 program./CREATEs: The /CREATE qualifier may only be used with the: INDEXFILE qualifier. The /CREATE qualifier directs: the compiler to create a new indexfile with the name/ given with the /INDEXFILE qualifier.a /NOCREATE (D)y8 /NOCREATE directs the compiler not to create an 6 indexfile regardless. /NOCREATE is assumed by default.t/EXECUTABLE[=filespec] (D)9 This switch allows the user to specify the name of 9 the executable image generated by the OPS5 command.s; The qualifier. $ LOGIN_PROMPT2 :== "secondary login prompt"/ $ LOGIN_CMD2 :== "secondary login command"e1 $ PASS_PROMPT2 :== "secondary password prompt"t* $ PASSWORD2 :== "secondary password"5 $ LOGIN_ERROR2 :== "secondary login error message"A 2 BAUD_RATElC This command is used specify the baud rate of the remote computer.hD VAXNET automatically sets the remote port to the speed you specify.C If you are communicating with the remote system using a dialupa6 modem, the baud rate will b /EXECUTABLE is assumed as default. If d9 no filespec is specified, the name of the first,: file containing OPS5 code concatenated with a file  type '.EXE' is used.l /NOEXECUTABLEr9 If /NOEXECUTABLE is specified, no executable imagei is produced. A /SHAREABLE9 This switch works in conjunction with /EXECUTABLE.s9 It directs the OPS5 system to produce a shareableU9 image containing a callable version of the OPS5 9 program is produced. See the release notes for moreT* information (SYS$HELP:OPSX21REL.DOC)./NOSHAREABLE (D)9 If /NOSHAREABLE is specified, no shareable image isT produced./INDEXFILE[=filespec]9 This switch allows the specification of a save filee9 from a previous compilation. This "indexfile"e9 contains all the information needed to correctly 9 link the recompiled file to those previouslyl9 compiled. The "indexfile" is created and maintainedi9 in a user created directory given the logical namea9 OPS$USERLIB. If OPS$USERLIB has not been assigned,e9 an error message is issued and the OPS5 command willr9 stop. The first time an "indexfile" is specified itt is created./NOINDEXFILE (D)9 The /NOINDEXFILE qualifier is assumed as default.C9 If /NOINDEXFILE is specified or if they9 /[NO]INDEXFILE qualifier is omited, a compilationh9 without additional modules is assumed. Further, 9 information allowing for the addition of futurel modules is not saved./KEEPc9 This switch instructs the OPS5 system to keep alle9 intermediate code (files generated as output fromd9 the OPS5 compiler) as well as the object filesm9 produced when the intermediate code is compiled bys% the BLISS and MACRO compilers. e /NOKEEP (D)m8 This switch instructs the compiler not to keep any * intermediate code files it generates./LIST (D for batch)e9 The /LIST qualifier instructs the OPS5 compiler to9 create a listing file. If the filespec is nots9 specified, a default filespec is taken from the namem9 of the first OPS5 file in the command line andl9 appended with a ".LIS" extension. The listing fileO9 contains information about the success or failure ofn9 the OPS5 compilation. The /LIST qualifier ise+ assumed as default in batch mode only.e/NOLIST (D for interactive)h: The /NOLIST qualifier instructs the OPS5 compiler not to create a listing file./RELINK 9 The /RELINK command instructs the OPS5 languageI9 system to create a new executable image from theh9 specified indexfile. /RELINK only has meaning whenn9 the /INDEXFILE qualifier is used and an indexfile 9 filespec is specified. The /EXECUTABLE qualifier mayi9 be used to designate the name of the executablem1 image generated by the relink command. d /NORELINK (D) < /NORELINK directs the OPS5 language system not to = consider this command as a /RELINK command. /NORELINK s is assumed by default.S/LIBRARY (file-qualifier)d9 This qualifier allows for the inclusion of Object 9 Libraries (OLBs) at the link stage. These filesa9 typically contain the compiled object code fromy% user-provided external routines.f/OBJECT (file-qualifier)9 The /OBJECT qualifier allows for the inclusion of=9 individual object modules at the link stage. Thesei9 files typically contain object code from externalt user-provided routines.2 Modular_Compilationi9 If modular compilation is desired, you will need to have9 the logical name OPS$USERLIB assigned to a directory to.9 contain your INDEXFILES and OBJECT LIBRARIES. For more./ information, see the VAX-11 OPS5 User's Guide.owwally have a dump terminator sentCC by specifying the symbol DU@D~1 V4 2 Fortrany3 Logical_Unit_Numbers? For input and output to your terminal you may not use the sameB logical unit number. IE, WRITE(5,xxx) and READ(5,yy) in the sameC program will produce an error. For reading/writing to the defaultMB SYS$INPUT/SYS$OUTPUT use '*' instead of an explicit unit number.2 VPW=3 Document Preparation SystempI a) The Denison Spelling Checker no longer works in interactive mode.> So that option has been temporarily removed. It work|ꍍ1 SMP< SMP (Symbolic Mathematics Program) allows one to manipulateI and solve algegraic equations symbolically. The procedure to activate 5K SMP is automatically defined for each user at login. The SMP activation gI procedure insures that SMP automatically uses the graphics format most iH appopriate for the terminal it is running from. The default graphics I device is automatically enabled. No additional user action is required.W. SMP may be invoked at any time bs in nonG interactive mode, however, to produce a SPELLING.ERR file whichcL is displayed at your terminal and which can be included in your text, as an aid in searching for spelling errors.3 b) The ANALYZE options does not work at all. i sK Both problems a) and b) must await corrections from their author as I they are DECUS "Freebies" and sources were not supplied for them.ww automatic answer capability. The other choice is to havedC messages deliverey typing SMP $SMP for interactive use, and $SMP The source for FRAG is on KMS$SYSUTLUSR1:[FILETOOLS]. It was8originally taken from [vax84c.levine.misc]. To rebuild, $Macro FRAG $Link FRAGwwto automatically reformat the log file. 2 FI  q\IK1 SPELLtA The SPELL command reviews the spelling of words within a textOFfile. Because of the complexities and subtleties of English usage, the@command will not necessarily flag all misspelled words. In someFinstances it may even flag correctly spelled words as incorrect. WhileBsuch errors will not usually occur, proper nouns, highly technicalDwords, and abbreviations will probably be flagged erroneously unless7provided for in a private dictionary or the word file. D Two different spelling correction programs exist: the Dennison Cversion, and the Vassar version. If no explicit selection is made,tDthe SPELL command defaults to using the Dennison spelling corrector.ASelection of the which spelling correction program to use is doneEAby including either the /DENNISON or /VASSAR switch as the first !swithc on the SPELL command line.T%The simplest form of the command is:  $ SPELL/ textfileHwhere / is either /DENNISON or /VASSAR and where "textfile" is the$name of the text file to be checked. 2 DENNISON* The simplest form of the command is:  $ SPELL[/DENNISON] textfileEusing, in place of "textfile" the actual name given to the file whose Fspelling is to be checked. The simple form of the command lists thoseFwords that might be misspelled together with the number of the line in$the file in which the words appear. $The complete form of the command is:5$ SPELL[/DENNISON][/[NO]ECHO]/[NO]LISTING[=listfile]-o=  /[NO]CORRECT/[NO]RIGOR/[NO]STATISTICS/[NO]CHARACTERS-  textfile [wordfile]s9where the items enclosed in square brackets are optional.dKPrior to using the SPELL command it is necessary to add it as a DCL commandby using the following command% $ SET COMMAND SYS$VPWFILES:SPELL.CLDs 3 TEXTFILEF TEXTFILE refers to the actual file name of the file containing theCwords to be checked. The default file type is TXT; that is, in theg@absence of specifications to the contrary, the p rogram expects aGfile type of TXT appended to the first part of the file name. However, Fany correct file name (for example, MYFILE.WOW) can be used as long as4file types other than TXT are completely specified. 3 WORDFILEE WORDFILE refers to a file of words that would probably not appeare?in a dictionary, such as proper nouns, places, technical words, Dabbreviations, nonstandard spellings, etc. If this parameter is notDspecified then the program will assume a default file which contains3words that would be classified in these categories.h 4 CREATING= Creating a word file is relatively simple. First build atBdictionary file containing all of the words you wish to use. This)file must adhere to the following rules:  no lower case letters no special characters h one word per line no blank linest no spaces5The word file is created with the following commands: % $ SET COMMAND SYS$VPWFILES:WORDS.CLDm4 $ WORDS dictionaryfile[,dictionaryfile...] wordfileCWhen ible to link just to PLOT10.OLB. In this caseGprograms will only run on Tektronix 4014 terminals. Note also, that no:bug fixes or improvements are being applied to PLOT10.OLB.6The general commands to compile and link a program are $ FORTRAN/NOI4 FOO$ $ LINK FOO,SYS$LIBRARY:PLOT125/LIBLNote, that the Fortran routine is compiled /NOI4. All integer arguments for#PLOT10 calls, assume I*2 arguments.2 Character_Drawing_Subroutines=In addition to the PLOT10 routines (SCHAR, LCHAR, SLETS), the!following routine has been added:,SCHARS (STRING, XSCALE, YSCALE, ISLANT, ROT)where! STRING is character string.0 XSCALE is the character width (see SLETS). 1 YSCALE is the character height (see SLETS).0 ISLANT is the character slant (see SLETS).: ROT is the temporary rotation angle (0 = horizontal,; 90 = vertical bottom up). The original orientation is restored upon return.ww  multiple dictionary files are used (by separating the name ofaEeach one with a comma) they will be be merged properly. However, onlylBone word file may be specified. For dictionary files, the defaultBfile extension is DIC; for word files, it is WRD. Generally, oneEwould wish to include the words in the default word file in one's ownBword file. To do this, the dictionary file ENGL:DEFAULT is used. 3 LIMITATIONSt USER BEE WEAR!!!EA soft wear package witch checks spelling is no mower than a weigh toBverify. That the weird, as it appears inn the taxed is also in theAstored file. It can knot correct arrows in punctuation ore usage:tAand it will not fined words witch are mis-used butt spelled rite.rAFour example, this paragraph wood bee past by most such programs, ?even though it has mini flaws. Their fore, the message is thato@proof-reading is knot eliminated by using such a package, and isberry much reek wired. 3 Qualifiers>The Dennison version of the SPELL command takes the qualifiers 2 /DENNISON /[NO]CHARACTERS /[NO]CORRECT /[NO]ECHO ) /[NO]LISTING /[NO]RIGOR /[NO]STATISTICS n /DENNISONl /DENNISON (D) /VASSARLJ Selects which spelling correction program to use. This switch must beHthe first switch on the command line. If omitted, the Dennison spellingcorrector is used by default /CHARACTERSo /CHARACTERSm /NOCHARACTERS (D)E The character parameter allows the user to skip the processing oftKlines that begin with any one of a set of specified characters. By default -processing of special characters is disabled.dFor example, the command: $ SPELL/CHARACTERS=; MYFILE Fwould cause the file MYFILE.TXT to be examined, using the default word9file, and ignoring all lines beginning with a semicolon. p/ECHOi /ECHOw /NOECHO (D)nD This qualifier instructs the program to echo all of the lines inGthe text file to the listing. By default, all lines in the listing arelnot echoed to the li sting./LISTING[=file name] /LISTING[=file_name]n /NOLISTING (D)cF This qualifier directs the output of the command to a file insteadDof sending it directly to the terminal. If the LISTING qualifier isFused without specifying a file name, the name of the listing file willBthe same as that of the textfile except that its file type will beFchanged to LIS. If the LISTING qualifier is used with a file name butEwithout a specified file type, the file type will also be supplied byB Ethe program as LIS. By default, /LISTING is disabled and all outputtis directed to the terminal./CORRECT /CORRECTe /NOCORRECT (D) J This qualifier gives the user a chance to interactively correct words Jwhich are flagged by the spell program as incorrect. The corrections are Kmade by the user through the EDT editor, This option causes the other SPELLrGoptions to be set to their default values except the RIGOR option. TheeGcorrection option can be invoked only on a VT100 or VT52 terminal. By gIdefault, the /CORRECT qualifier is disabled and errors are flagged in the output listing./RIGOR /RIGORs /NORIGOR (D)aL This qualifier rigorously checks the spelling of the text. By default, it is disabled.u /STATISTICSo /STATISTICS (D) /NOSTATISTICSJ This qualifier prints the final statistical summary for the run of theLprogram. /NOSTATISTICS disables the display of the final statistics output summary.2 VASSARH SPELL is a p roofreader which makes use of a default 90,000 wordI dictionary and optionally a personal dictionary. SPELL asks for a eH file name that you wish to have checked. When a word is found that9 is not in any of the dictionaries, you will be asked if:tH o you believe the word is correct and should be inserted into the main dictionary.B o the word is incorrect and you want to correct it in your file.4 o you wish SPELL to try guessing what the word is.H o you wish to have the word inserted into a personal dictionary which* will reside in your default directory.1 o you wish the program to ignore your spelling./ P Format: $ SPELL/VASSAR filenameiF To enable the SPELL command, it must be added to the user's CLI table= by issuing the command $ SET COMMAND SYS$VPWFILES SPELL.CLD.l 3 ParametersI If no qualifiers other than /VASSAR are present on the SPELL command, 0D then the parameter is the name of a file to check. If the /CHECK I qualifier is used, then the parameter should be the word you are trying K to check. If any other qualifiers are used, SPELL ignores all parameters. H The file specified will be rewritten with any changes that you haveH requested during the SPELL session. No extension needs to be specifiedH if the file has one of the default extensions .RNO, .TEX, .MSS or .TXT.H The appropriate syntax will be used for checking files with theseH extensions so that embedded commands do not register as incorre ctH spellings. For this reason, it is important that you should use the= correct extension on any files which you are going to check.o3 Personal_DictionarylH PERSDICT.DAT is the personal dictionary file you create through SPELL.H It uses a tree-structure for its organization. As a result, the fileI cannot be edited or altered through normal means. List this file and H delete erroneous words by using the SPELL/PERSONAL command. Editing theA file will destroy its structure and you will have to delete it!i 3 Qualifiers/VASSARnF The SPELL command will use the Vassar program instead of the Dennison program.e/CHECKH The CHECK option allows you to check if a word is in one of the mainH dictionaries used by the spell program. You specify a command of the form:  $ spell/check word() to check if "word" is in the dictionary. /PERSONALeH The PERSONAL option is used to maintain your personal dictionary.H Since this is an indexed file, you should never try editing it usingH EDT or any other text editor. Instead, this SPELL option allows youF to list and optionally delete any words from your personal directory.H Within this mode, the List option operates circularly. After you haveH seen all the words in your personal dictionary, you will be taken backH to the beginning and successive List commands will display the whole dictionary again./LOGGINGH You can select this qualifier in addition to a file name if you want toH pro duce a list of the changes made during a run, in a file with an .ERRI extension. This qualifier is ignored if any other qualifiers are e present.T/UPDATEeI This mode is only available to system personnel, and is used to aH selectively add words indicated as correct by users to the mainH dictionary. It also contains an option which allows erroneous words* to be deleted from the main dictionaries.ww command will pause VAXNET if it was spawned.C o The SPAWN and "$" commands are used to spawn DCL commands. TheD SPAWN command copied DCL symbols and logical names while the "$"B command does not (for speed). If no DCL command is specified, a new process is created.C o The TYPEAHEAD command specifies the limit the remote typeaheadB buffer is allowed to reach before reading the characters. TheD value is currently set at 32 to allow XOFF/XON to work properly.C o The WATCH command is used to enable/disable watching file names% being copied (same as COPY /LOG).> o The retry limit is now enforced during file transmissoins.4 o Current settings are now displayed in questions.C o The log file name now has the default extension .LOG appended& if you don't specify an extension.C o Wildcards, command files, and multiple files are now supported, for the DUMP, SCRIPT, and SEND commands.C o An out-of-band AST is enabled during file transmissions whichC allows you to type the ESCAPE key to get a one line statusC report of the cuurent file. This was added mainly for hardcopy: terminals and for when the record display is disabled.C o The command line "REF logfile_name" is now spawned to reformatC the log file instead of "MCR REF ...". This means a DCL symbol1 must be setup to active the reformat program.$ New features in VAXNET Version 8.0:C o Multiple protocols are now supported. The PROTOCOL command is8 used to select either the VAXNET or XMODEM protocol.C o The number of data bits can be changed. The 7BIT/8BIT commandsD specify the number of data bits to use with the XMODEM protocol.C o The type of file to be used with XMODEM can be specified. The? FILE_TYPE command is used to select either ASCII or BINARY.? o Command files can be specified at the Vaxnet command level.C o The TIMEOUT command can be used to change the timeout count used by the protocol.C o The RETRY_LIMIT command can be used to change the number of" retrys on transmission errors.D o The SHOW command is used to display all or selective parameters.2 PAUSEC If VAXNET was started via the DCL SPAWN command, you can use thisC to pause VAXNET. Pausing VAXNET returns you to DCL level and putsC VAXNET into a hibernate state. You can then continue VAXNET by2 using the ATTACH "process_name" command from DCL.2 PHONE_NUMBER: The format of phone numbers for the auto-dial modems are:A DF03 - The DF03 does not allow spaces and/or dashs in the phone1 number. It must consist of all numbers. i.e.: 1234567A RIXON - The RIXON R212A allows spaces and/or dashs in the phoneA number to make it easier to read. The character "&" is@ tells the modem to wait for an intermediate dial tone. i.e.: 9&123-4567 2 PROTOCOLB This command is used to specify the type of protocol to use. TheB default protocol is VAXNET. Currently, only the VAXNET and XMODEM protocols are supported. Command format:( Vaxnet> PROTOCOL KERMIT/VAXNET/XMODEM2 REDIALC This command is used with auto-dial modems to redial a previouslyC entered phone number. This command is useful when the modem hasC been hungup for some reason (i.e., invalid login, etc.) or if you= want to redial the remote hoping to get a better phone line.2 REFC This command is used to enable or disable the reformatting of theC of the log file. By default, the log file is reformatted. YouC can also disable waiting for reformat to complete. If waiting isC disabled, the reformat program is spawned without waiting for itC to complete so another log file can be openned immediatly. Use the2 command NOREF to disable reformatting altogether. Command format:% Vaxnet> REF [WAIT/NOWAIT] or NOREF 2 REMOTE_PORTC The remote port is the terminal line used to communicate with theC remote computer (system). This line can be either connectedC directly to a in-house system using a null modem cable, orC connected using a modem (see "HELP MODEM" for getting modemC connection established). The logical name VAXNET$PORT can be+ defined to specify the remote port to use.B The remote port should be setup as follows by the system manager:= $ SET TERM TTcn:/NOTYPEAHEAD/PERM ! Disable typeahead toC $ SET TERM TTcn:/ALTYPEAHEAD/PERM ! enable alternate typeahead@ $ SET TERM TTcn:/TYPEAHEAD/PERM ! buffer which is larger.A $ SET TERM TTcn:/MODEM/PERM ! If connected to a modem.E $ SET TERM TTcn:/NOBROADCAST ! Disables broadcast messages.C All other terminal characteristics are automatically setup byC VAXNET. The above characteristics should be done in the site? specific startup command file because they require privileges. 2 RETRY_LIMITD This command is used to set the retry limit for file transmissions.C This is the number of times a record/block is retransmitted. The default is 10 retrys. Command format: Vaxnet> RETRY_LIMIT n2 RETURNC After typing the interrupt character to enter the VAXNET command; level, type the RETURN key to return to the remote system. Command format: Vaxnet> 2 SCRIPTC A script file is used to drive an interactive terminal session atC the remote system. It is normally used in conjunction with theC auto-login feature to drive the remote session from batch. TheC script file contains commands just as you would type them in fromC a terminal. Normally each command line is sent to the remote withC a carriage return appended to it. There are two exceptions. IfC the first character of a command line is an up arrow (^), then theC all ^char's on the line are converted to control charatcers andC sent to the remote without a carruage return. The second exceptionC is if the line begins with the script command .WAIT. This commandC is used to define a string to wait for (such as a prompt) beforeC sending the next command. Refer to the example script file# "SCRIPT.MAI" for more information. Command format:) Vaxnet> SCRIPT file1, file2, ... filen 2 SEND_FILEC This command is used to send (transmit) a file to the remoteC system. The remote system MUST be running the SNDRCV programC prior to issuing this command. If you don't specify the fileC names on the command line you are prompted for them. The VAX fileC name can contain wildcards (%, *, and ...) or you can specify aC command file. If you specify wildcards or a command file, you areC prompted for the remote directory to put the files in. While theC file transmission is in progress, you can type the ESCAPE key to2 get a one line status report of the current file. Command format:$ Vaxnet> SEND vax_file remote_file 3 VAX_FILEC The VAX file name can be any file specification including wildcardC characters. You can also specify a command file via "@cmd_file".C If you don't specify an extension for the command file, .COM isC the default. The command file must have one file specificationB per line (wildcards are permitted). Trailing spaces are ignored. 3 REMOTE_FILEC The REMOTE file name must be a valid file specification for theC system you are talking to. If wildcards or command file input is? not active, then typing the RETURN key uses the VAX file name.C If wildcards or command file input is active, you must specify theC remote directory. BEWARE of files with multiple version numbersC since the file version number is not sent as part of the remote file name. Your options are:. or * - Send the file name only.C [*], [*...], [*,*] - Send the [directory] and file name. AnythingB before the [*] is appended to the file name.? [directory...] - Replace top VAX directory with specified.G device:[directory] - Else append the file name to specified directory.2 SHOW5 This command is used to show a particular parameter. Command format: Vaxnet> SHOW parameter Where parameter is:, * or ALL - Show all parameters.5 BITS - Show the number of data bits.: DEBUG - Show debug flag/debug information.2 DECHO - Show the dump echo status.4 DISPLAY - Show the display parameters.1 ECHO - Show the local echo flag.+ FILE_TYPE - Show the file type.5 INTERRUPT - Show the interrupt character.* LOG_FILE - Show the log file., MODEM_TYPE - Show the modem type.2 PROTOCOL - Show the type of protocol.3 REFORMAT - Show the reformat settings.- REMOTE_PORT - Show the remote port.- RETRY_LIMIT - Show the retry limit.- SYSTEM_TYPE - Show the system type.. SPEED - Show the remote speed./  TIMEOUT - Show the timeout count.1 TYPEAHEAD - Show the typeahead limit.2 WATCH - Show the watch files flag.2 SNDRCVC SNDRCV is the program run on the remote system to communicateC with VAXNET during file transmission (either GET or SEND). SNDRCV- is started by one of the following commands:B o if you are communicating with another VAX system, SNDRCV is/ started by typing the command "MCR SNDRCV".B o if you are communicating with an RSX-11M system, then SNDRCV3 is started by typing the command "RUN $SNDRCV".E In either case, the following message is displayed after SNDRCV is started.C SNDRCV Version 2.1 started ... Type CTRL/X and RETURN to abort.C At this point you should type CTRL/Y to get the VAXNET commandC prompt. Be careful not to type any other characters since theyC will be accepted by SNDRCV and interpreted as commands fromC VAXNET. After you get the VAXNET command prompt, you should typeC either GET or SEND and the file name questions associated withC each command. After the questions are answered, the file transmission begins.C The status report on the terminal is updated after each recordC transmitted. If the status report stops updating momentarily, beC patient, there may have been a transmission failure. After aC timeout period (currently 10 seconds), transmission shouldC continue. If the transmission doesn't continue, you should type a) single CTRL/C to abort the transmission.C To abort the SNDRCV program, you must type CTRL/X followed by theC return key. If SNDRCV doesn't abort after the first attempt, try6 several times; the second try usually does it for me.2 SPAWNC There are two commands used to execute a DCL command. If you typeC "$ dcl_command", the command is executed without copying the DCLC symbols and logical names. If you type "SPAWN dcl_command", theC DCL symbols and logical names are copied. With either command, if: a DCL command is not specified, a new process is created.' For example, to get a directory, type: Vaxnet> SPAWN DIRECTORY 2 STARTUPC Before establishing the connection with the remote system either5 in-house or over a modem, you MUST do the following.B o after you are logged into the VAX, allocate the port to beB used for VAXNET. This is done so the operating system doesn'tB think someone is attempting to login to the system. AlthoughB VAXNET allocates the port internally, this is only stays inB effect while you are running VAXNET. When you exit fromB VAXNET, the port is automatically deallocated. Failure toB allocate the system could result in both systems getting hungB up looping character back and forth (initiating LOGIN) andB WILL prevent VAXNET from attaching the remote port since it isB already allocated. On RSX-11M, this will result in all the8 system buffers being used up and the system hanging.B o the second step is to start VAXNET and answer all theB questions. This is not really neccessary if the remote is aB DEC operating system (no timeout period) but is needed for anB IBM system. IBM (especially the GE Crossfile) has a limitedB amount of time to login to their system. If you aren't loggedB in within that period of time (how much time ???), IBM (TSO)B will hangup the modem on their end. You will still have to beB very fast for IBM if you're terminal is on a differnt floor than the modem.2 STATUSC This command is used to get a status report of how VAXNET isC currently setup. If DCL symbols are used to answer the questionsC at startup time, this command is executed automatically to displayC the current parameters. The modem type and phone number are only. displayed if you are using an autodial modem. Example: Vaxnet> STATUS Log file name: VAXNET.LOG Local logging: Enabled Remote port: _TTA4: Interrupt char: ^A System type: DEC Local echo: Disabled Remote speed: 1200 Modem type: RIXON Phone number: 705 2 SUMMARYC The following is a summary of the commands which can be issued atC the Vaxnet command level. Most commands can be shortened to 3B characters unless you are negating the command then 5 are needed.F AUTO_LOGIN BAUD_RATE CROSSFILE $ cmd [NO]DEBUGE [NO]DECHO DIAL [NO]DISPLAY DUMP_FILE [NO]ECHOA EXIT GET_FILE FILE_TYPE [NO]HANGUP HELPB INTERRUPT LOCAL [NO]LOG_FILE MODEM_TYPE PAUSEH PROTOCOL REDIAL [NO]REF REMOTE_PORT RETRY_LIMITC SCRIPT SEND_FILE SHOW SPAWN STATUSD SYSTEM_TYPE TIMEOUT TYPEAHEAD [NO]WATCH [NO]XON 7BIT 8BIT 2 SYMBOLSC DCL symbols can be defined to automatically answer the various$ VAXNET questions. The symbols are:6 $ VAXNET_INTRO :== "N" ! VAXNET Introduction.C $ VAXNET_LOG :== "Y" ! Output from remote to a log file.B $ LOG_LOCAL :== "N" ! Enable local output to log file.4 $ LOG_FILE :== "ROBIN.LOG" ! The log file name.5 $ REMOTE_PORT :== "TTA4:" ! Remote port to use.A $ REMOTE_SPEED :== "1200" ! Baud rate of the remote system.8 $ SYSTEM_TYPE :== "DEC" ! Type of remote system.A $ INTERRUPT_CHAR :== "^A" ! Character to get Vaxnet prompt.: $ MODEM_TYPE :== "RIXON" ! Type of auto-dial modem.7 $ PHONE_NUMBER :== "number" ! Phone number to dial.B $ VAXNET_CMD :== "SCRIPT TEST.COM" ! VAXNET command to execute.B For the interrupt character, the "^A" gets converted to a CTRL/A.> Also see AUTO_LOGIN for addition symbols for automatic login. 2 SYSTEM_TYPEC This command is used to specify the type of remote system you areC communicating with. This sets up various flags within VAXNET toC determine how to talk to the remote. For example, if you specifyC IBM, a local echo will be performed since IBM (TSO) doesn't echo4 characters sent to it. The valid system types are:@ APPLE, CROSSFILE, DATAIO, DEC, EASYLINK, IBM, UNIX, and XXDP. 2 TIMEOUTC This commands is used to set the timeout count in seconds for file+ transmissions. The default is 10 seconds. Command format: Vaxnet> TIMEOUT n 2 TYPEAHEADC This command is used to specify the limit the typeahead buffer isC allowed to fill to before the characters are read. It also limitsC the maximum number of characters which are read at one time. TheC default typeahead limit is set to 32. This small limit is requiredC to allow terminal generated XOFF/XON to work properly. This limit6 also appears to work with the VT100 in smooth scroll. Command format: Vaxnet> TYPEAHEAD n DCL symbol: $ TYPEAHEAD_LIMIT :== 322 WATCHC This command is used to enable or disable the display of the file? name at end of file. By default the file names are displayed. Command format: Vaxnet> WATCH or NOWATCH2 XONC This command informs VAXNET that the remote system responds to theC XON/XOFF protocol to control output to the terminal. If enabled,C VAXNET allows the typeahead buffer to fill to some limit beforeC reading the characters to reduce system overhead. The terminalC driver sends an XOFF when the typeahead buffer is nearly full.C This command isn't normally used since the system type question< sets up internal flags for the remote system you are using.C If disabled with the NOXON command, VAXNET doesn't wait for theC typeahead buffer to fill. Instead, it will read the number ofD characters in the typehead buffer or issue a single character read. Command format: Vaxnet> XON or NOXON2 7BITD This command is used to set the number of da ta bits used. This is% the default for the VAXNET protocol. Command format: Vaxnet> 7BIT2 8BITD This command is used to set the number of data bits used. This is0 the default for the KERMIT and XMODEM protocol. Command format: Vaxnet> 8BITww he SEND command will allow file wild card processing as isF found in VMS. If Kermit-32 is running in remote mode, the file willF be sent on the controlling terminal line after waiting the number ofF seconds specified by the SET DELAY command. This gives the user timeF to escape back to the other Kermit and issue a receive command. IfF Kermit-32 is running in local mode, the file will be sent immediately8 on the terminal line specified by the SET LINE command. The command format is: , Kermit-32>SEND file-specificationE Where "file-specification" is any normal VAX/VMS file specification.2 SERVERF This command will cause Kermit-32 to enter server mode. The otherF Kermit can then issue server commands to send and receive filesF without having to give SEND or RECEIVE commands to Kermit-32.F Kermit-32 may be put into SERVER mode while running as either aF remote Kermit (transmitting over the controlling terminal line), orF as a loca l Kermit (transmitting over a terminal specified by a SETF LINE command). Note that in order to correctly receive binary filesF while in SERVER mode, a SET FILE TYPE BINARY must be done first. AtF this time there is no way for Kermit-32 to determine whether an" incoming file is ASCII or binary. The format of the command is: Kermit-32>SERVER2 SET= The SET command is used to set various parameters in Kermit.3 BLOCK_CHECK_TYPEF The SET BLOCK_CHECK_TYPE comm and is used to determine the type ofF block check sequence which will be used during transmission. TheF block check sequence is used to detect transmission errors. ThereF are three types of block check available. These are the singleF character checksum (default), the two character checksum, and theF three character CRC (cyclic redundancy check). This command does notF ensure that the desired type of block check will be used, since bothF Kermit's involved in the transfer must agree on the block check type.F Kermit-32 will request that the type of block check set by thisF command be used for a transfer. If the other Kermit has also had theF same block check type requested, then the desired block check typeF will be used. Otherwise, the single character checksum will be used.3 (See Kermit protocol manual for more information.)1 Kermit-32>SET BLOCK_CHECK_TYPE keyword Where keyword is one of:3 1. 1_CHARACTER_CHECKSUM or ONE_CHARACTER_CHECKSUM3 2. 2_CHARACTER_CHECKSUM or TWO_CHARACTER_CHECKSUM7 3. 3_CHARACTER_CRC_CCITT or THREE_CHARACTER_CRC_CCITT 3 DEBUGGINGF The SET DEBUGGING command is used to set the debug type out on theF user's terminal. The command will accept either the keywords ON orF OFF. Kermit-32 can only do debugging type out when running as aF local Kermit (SET LINE command done). This is because the debuggingF type out would interfere with the file transfer if it were sent to. the controlling terminal line in remote mode.( Kermit-32>SET DEBUGGING state% Where state is either 'ON' or 'OFF'.3 DELAYF The DELAY parameter is the number of seconds to wait before sendingF data after a SEND command is given. This is used when Kermit-32 isF running in remote mode to allow the user time to escape back to the) other Kermit and give a RECEIVE command.0 Kermit-32>SET DELAY number-of-secondsF Where number of seconds is the (decimal) number of second to wait before sending data.3 ESCAPEF This command will set the escape character for the CONNECTF processing. The command will take the octal value of the characterF to use as the escape character. This is the character which is usedF to "escape" back to Kermit-32 after using the CONNECT command. ItF defaults to ] (octal 35). It is usually a good idea to set thisF character to something which is not used (or at least not used very< much) on the system being to which Kermit-32 is CONNECTing.5 Kermit-32>SET ESCAPE octal-character-valueF Where octal-character-value is the ASCII value of the character to( use as the escape character (in octal).3 FILEF The SET FILE command allows setting of parameters relating to the8 file format and file naming conventions used by Kermit.4 NAMINGF This command sets the type of processing Kermit should do on fileF names that are being sent and received. Kermit can either send theF complete file specification (including device, directories, fileF name, file type and version number) or only the file name and type.F When receiving a file specification, Kermit can either attempt to useF it as a VMS file specification as is, or first perform someF substitutions and truncations in order to force the received5 specification to be just a valid file name and type.) Kermit-32>SET FILE NAMING type5 FULLF This will cause Kermit to send complete file specifications and9 perform no translations on received file specifications. 5 NORMAL_FORMF This will cause Kermit to send only the file name and file type, andF perform translations on received file specifications to force them to$ be only a valid file name and type.5 UNTRANSLATEDF This will cause Kermit to send only the file name and file type, and9 perform no translations on received file specifications.4 TYPEF This command will set the file type that Kermit is receiving. A fileF type of ASCII should be used to receive text files which are to beF used as text files on the VMS system. The file type BINARY should beF used for binary files, such as CP/M .COM files, which need to be keptE in a format that allows the file to be returned without any changes.' Kermit-32>SET FILE TYPE type5 ASCII# File type ASCII is for text files.5 BINARYF File type BINARY is for non-text files. Note that binary files whichF are generated on a VMS system cannot be transferred to another VMSF system without losing file attributes. This means that (forF example), an .EXE file cannot be transmitted with Kermit-32. (This; problem should be resolved in a future verison of Kermit).5 FIXEDF The FIXED file type will cause Kermit to create a file with 512 byteF fixed length records, containing only the data received from theF other Kermit. This format can be used for transferring VMS .EXEF files or RSX-11/M (P/OS) .TSK files, or any other binary file which, is stored in 512 byte fixed length records. 3 IBM_MODEF The SET IBM_MODE command allows Kermit-32 to be put into a mode whichF will allow transfers to an IBM host. This causes Kermit-32 to waitF for the IBM turnaround character (XON, CTRL-Q) before sending anyF characters to the other Kermit. It also forces the parity type to be7 mark, and turns on local echo for the CONNECT command.) Kermit-32>SET IBM_MODE keyword# Where keyword is either ON or OFF.3 INCOMPLETE_FILE_DISPOSITIONF The SET INCOMPLETE_FILE_DISPOSITION allows the user to determine whatF is done with a file that is not completely received. If theF disposition is KEEP, all file received will be kept, even if only aF portion of the file is received. If the disposition is DISCARD (theA default), files which are not completely received are discarded.< Kermit-32>SET INCOMPLETE_FILE_DISPOSITION keyword) Where keyword is either DISCARD or KEEP.3 LINEF This will set the terminal line that you are using. The terminalF line must be one which is accessible to the users process. ThisF means that the applicable protection code for the terminal must haveF been set to allow your process to access it (done by the system manager).% Kermit-32>SET LINE device:, The device must be a terminal line (TTA0:). 3 LOCAL_ECHOF The SET LOCAL_ECHO command specifies whether characters should beF echoed locally when CONNECTing to another system. If LOCAL_ECHO isF set to ON, any character typed on the terminal will be echoedF immediately to the terminal, as well as being sent to the otherF system. If LOCAL_ECHO is set to OFF (the default), the charactersF typed on the terminal are only sent to the other system (which would% normally be echoing the characters).+ Kermit-32>SET LOCAL_ECHO keyword# Where keyword is either ON or OFF. 3 MESSAGEF This command sets the type of typeout Kermit-32 will do duringF transfers in local mode. Kermit-32 can type out the fileF specification being transferred, the packet numbers being sent anF received, both or neither. The default is to type file' specifications but not packet numbers.- Kermit-32>SET MESSAGE type keywordF Where type is either FILE or PACKET, and keyword is either ON or OFF.3 PARITYF This command determines the type of parity to use on the transmissionF line. Kermit normally uses characters which consist of eight dataF bits with no parity bit. For systems or transmission media whichF require a specific parity type, Kermit can send characters as seven data bits plus a parity bit.' Kermit-32>SET PARITY keyword Where keyword is one of:8 1. NONE (default) - eight data bits and no parity bit.; 2. MARK - seven data bits with the parity bit set to one.= 3. SPACE - seven data bits with the parity bit set to zero.F 4. EVEN - seven data bits with the parity bit set to make the overall parity even.F 5. ODD - seven data bits with the parity bit set to make the overall parity odd.3 PROMPTF This command sets the string to be used for the command prompt. If? no argument is given, the default prompt (Kermit-32>) is used./ Kermit-32>SET PROMPT new-prompt-text3 REPEAT_QUOTEF This command sets the character to be used as the lead-in characterF for a repeat sequence (a string of characters which represents someF number of characters which are repeated in the data). Both Kermit'sF must support repeat compression for this to be in effect. TheF character set by this command must be in the range 41 ("1") to 76F (">") or 140 ("`") to 176 ("~"). The character will only be used onF file which are being transmitted by Kermit-32. The REPEAT_QUOTEF character used for incoming files is decided on by the other Kermit.F The default value is 176 ("~"). A value of 40 (a space) will disable repeat compression.) Kermit-32>SET REPEAT_QUOTE nnnF Where nnn is the ASCII value for the repeat quoting character (in octal).3 RETRYF This command sets the maximum number of times Kermit-32 should try toF send specific packet. There are two retry maximums, one for theF initial connection packet (the "SEND-INIT"), the other for all otherF p ackets. The default value for initial connections is 5. The+ default value for all other packets is 16.( Kermit-32>SET RETRY keyword nF Where keyword is either INITIAL_CONNECTION (for initial connectionF packet) or PACKET (for all other packets), and n is the decimal number of retries to attempt. 3 RECEIVEF It is possible to set various parameters associated with theF receiving of the data from the remote Kermit. SET RECEIVE will2 enable yo!u to set the various receive parameters.4 PACKET_LENGTHF This will set the receive packet length. The value for thisF parameter must be between 10 and 96. Packet lengths outside of this- range are illegal. The default value is 80.1 Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE PACKET_LENGTH 60 4 PADDINGF This command will set the number of padding characters that will be3 sent to the other Kermit. The default value is 0.* Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE PADDING n< Where n i"s the decimal number of padding characters to use. 4 PADCHARF This parameter is the padding character that is sent to the remoteF Kermit. The parameter must be an octal number in the range of 0 toF 37 or 177. All other values are illegal. The default value is 0 (an ASCII NUL)., Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE PADCHAR nnnF Where nnn is the ASCII value of the character to be used as a pad character (in octal).4 START_OF_PACKETF This command will set the start of packet# character for Kermit. TheF start of packet character must be in the range of 0 to 36 octal. TheF default value is 1 (ASCII SOH, CTRL-A). This value should only beF changed if absolutely necessary. It must be set the same in both Kermit's.2 Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE START_OF_PACKET 3 4 TIMEOUTF This will set the number of seconds before Kermit-32 will time outF the attempt to receive a message. This time out is used to handleF transmission errors which totally l$ose a message. The default value is 15 seconds.* Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE TIMEOUT nE Where n is the number of seconds to wait for a message (in decimal). 4 END_OF_LINEF This will set the end of line character the Kermit-32 expects toF receive from the remote Kermit. This is the character whichB terminates a packet. The default value is 15 (ASCII CR, CTRL-M).0 Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE END_OF_LINE nnnF Where n is the ASCII value of the character to %use for the end of line character (in octal).4 QUOTEF This will set the quoting character that Kermit-32 will expect onF incoming messages. This is the character used to quote control2 characters. The default value is 43 (ASCII " ").* Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE QUOTE nnnB Where nnn is the ASCII value of the quoting character (in octal).4 EIGHT_BIT_QUOTEF This command sets the character to be used (when necessary) to quoteF characters which have the eigth& bit (parity bit) set. This is usedF to transfer eight-bit bytes on a transmission medium which onlyF supports seven data bits. The default value is 46 (ASCII "").E _F Eigth-bit quoting will only be used if both Kermit's can handle it,F and the tranmission medium does not transmit 8 data bits (as& indicated by the SET PARITY command).4 Kermit-32>SET RECEIVE EIGHT_BIT_QUOTE nnnF Where nnn' is the ASCII value of the character (in octal) to use for1 quoting characters which have the eigth bit set.3 SENDF It is possible to set various parameters associated with theF receiving of the data from the remote Kermit. SET SEND will enableF you to set the various SEND parameters. These parameters should notF normally be set, since as part of the transfer initialization processF the two Kermit's exchange their RECEIVE parameters. The capabilityF of setting these p(arameters is provided so that the transferF initialization can be completed even if the default parameters are not correct.4 PACKET_LENGTHF This will set the SEND packet length. The value for this parameterF must be between 10 and 96. Packet lengths outside of this range are# illegal. The default value is 80.. Kermit-32>SET SEND PACKET_LENGTH 60 4 PADDINGF This command will set the number of padding characters that will be3 sent to the other Kermit. Th)e default value is 0.' Kermit-32>SET SEND PADDING n< Where n is the decimal number of padding characters to use. 4 PADCHARF This parameter is the padding character that is sent to the remoteF Kermit. The parameter must be an octal number in the range of 0 toF 37 or 177. All other values are illegal. The default value is 0 (an ASCII NUL).) Kermit-32>SET SEND PADCHAR nnnF Where nnn is the ASCII value of the character to be used as a pad character* (in octal).4 START_OF_PACKETF This command will set the start of packet character for Kermit. TheF start of packet character must be in the range of 0 to 36 octal. TheF default value is 1 (ASCII SOH, CTRL-A). This value should only beF changed if absolutely necessary. It must be set the same in both Kermit's./ Kermit-32>SET SEND START_OF_PACKET 3 4 TIMEOUTF This will set the number of seconds before Kermit-32 will time out aF message it has sent to the oth+er Kermit. message. This time out isF used to handle transmission errors which totally lose a message. The default value is 15 seconds.' Kermit-32>SET SEND TIMEOUT nE Where n is the number of seconds to wait for a message (in decimal). 4 END_OF_LINEF This will set the end of line character the Kermit-32 will send toF the remote Kermit. This is the character which terminates a packet., The default value is 15 (ASCII CR, CTRL-M).- Kermit-32>SET SEND END_,OF_LINE nnnF Where n is the ASCII value of the character to use for the end of line character (in octal).4 QUOTEF This will set the quoting character that Kermit-32 will expect onF incoming messages. This is the character used to quote control2 characters. The default value is 43 (ASCII " ").' Kermit-32>SET SEND QUOTE nnnB Where nnn is the ASCII value of the quoting character (in octal).2 SHOWF The SHOW command will allow you to show the various pa-rameters that are set with the SET command.3 ALLD The SHOW ALL command will cause all of the parameters to be listed.3 BLOCK_CHECK_TYPEF This command will type out what type of block check is being requested.3 COMMUNICATIONSF This command will type out the communcations line related parameters.B This includes the terminal line being used, the parity type, etc. 3 DEBUGGINGF The SHOW DEBUGGING command will print the state of the debugging flag.3 DELAYF T.his will display the number of seconds delay that Kermit will use- before attempting to send or receive a file.3 ESCAPEF This will display the current escape character for the CONNECT processing.3 FILE_PARAMETERSF This will display the parameters related to files being used. This< includes the file type and the incomplete file disposition. 3 FILE_TYPEF This will display the current file type that is used in sending the2 file to or receiving the from the micro compu/ter.3 INCOMPLETE_FILE_DISPOSITIONB This will display the disposition of incompletely received files. 3 LOCAL_ECHO5 This will display the status of the local echo flag.3 PACKETF This will display the current settings of the send and receive packet parameters.3 PARITY. This will display the current parity setting.3 SENDE All of the send parameters will be displayed on the user's terminal. 3 RECEIVEF The current values of the RECEIVE parameters will be displayed on theF0 user's terminal. Only the parmeters that can be set will be displayed.3 RETRYF This command will show the maximum retry attempts that Kermit will& attempt to send a message the remote.2 STATUSF The current status of Kermit-32 will be displayed. This includes theF number of characters that have been sent and received from the remoteF Kermit. Also included is an estimate of the effective baud rate ofF the transfer. This number is not intended to be exact, but only 2an: indication of what range of throughput has been provided.ww?plicit filename is entered, TEKGRAPH assumes you?want to do something special with the file and then asks you if"9you want to create a graph control file. If you do not,@it displays the editing option menu. However, if you choose to,CTEKGRAPH then proceds to prompt with a large number of questions G(axis type, data limits, point type, line type, comments, etc.) which Git then uses to display the graph. This mode can be used for producing+a polished graph from an existing data set.3O1 TABH The Tektronix Graphic Tablet is attached to a 4014 terminal.H It may only be used by programs running from that terminal. BeforeH using it, verify that the power light on the graphics tabletH control box is on. The graphics tablet data is entered via aH cursor (push the button) control. The red LED marked 'DATA' willH light if data is transmitted and the 'PEN' LED will remain on forH as long as the cursor butto4n is being depressed. The 'READY' LEDH will only light up if the graphics tablet is 'armed' by theH computer to send data. It will not send data until the 'READY' LED is on.H The cursor is referred to as being 'In Presence' on the tabletH if it is close enough to the tablet surface to send data. However,H it does send data as the cursor is moved in and out of presence.H Only the central area of the tablet is 'In Presence'. A half inchH 5 band around the outside of the white tablet area and the top 1-2H inches are 'dead'. If the cursor is moved into that area data will9 be sent even if the cursor button was not depressed.H It is good practice to center the graph, or waveform to beH digitized near the center of the graphics tablet and then place theH cursor on top of the tablet. Since a cursor entering presence canH sometimes transmit spurious data, its still a good idea to have theH 6 cursor on the surface before typing "TAB". Only at this point should TAB be invoked. 2 Using_TABH TAB is invoked as a VMS Foreign command or be accessed fromH the VPW Graph Master Menu. To user TAB as a Foreign command, one may either type1 $UTL TAB [File_Specifier] or define. $TAB:=$SYS$UTILITY:TAB and type- $TAB [File_Specifier]H at a 4014 terminal and TAB st7arts to run at that terminal. If TABH is to successfully start up TEKGRAPH, TEKGRAPH also must be defined as a VMS Foreign Command,8 $TEKGRAPH:=$SYS$UTILITY:TEKGRAPHH The data file created by TAB is either named GRAPH.DAT orH File_Specifier depending on the command given to start up TAB. IfH just the command TAB is entered, the data file created is namedH GRAPH.DAT. If, however, the command TAB File_Specifier is given,H 8 the data file created is named File_Specifier. If the latter formG is used it is important to supply TAB with a legal file specifier.H When TAB starts up, it will remind you to place the cursor onH the tablet surface, and select the type of plot for digitizingH (ie X-Y, LOGX-Y, X-LOGY, LOGX-LOGY). Answers to these questionsH must be one of the allowable numerical choices. A CTRL-Z or a $ will cause the program to exit.H Next TAB ask9s if it is to be discrete or continuous dataH entry. In all cases so far, this answer must be 'DISCRETE'H (a '1'). In the continuous mode, the graphic tablet clocks outH data at its own rate for as long as the button is depressed. NextH the user is asked to define a unit square (XMIN,XMAX,YMIN,YMAX) soH that the software will be able to convert the digitizer gridH coordinates (1024-X by 1024-Y) to physical coordinates. TheseH coord:inates should correspond to the coordinates of the axis points7 to be entered with the digitizer in the next step.H The final step in the calibration of the digitizer from gridH coordinates to physical coordinates is to enter the axis originH (XMIN,YMIN), the x-maximum (XMAX,YMIN), and the Y-maximumH coordinates (XMIN,YMAX) with the graphic cursor. This step is alsoH used to provide a rotational transform which is required to makeH physica;l axis of the graph to be digitized correspond to the) physical axis of the digitizer grid.H Once this data is entered, the user is told to enter data. DoH not try and exit from tablet data entry by a CTRL-Z since doing mayH leave GRAPH.DAT locked. Note, if the first point doesn't enter,H press the 'RETURN' key and reenter the point. Sometimes thisH solves the problem. If it doesn't, exit from TAB and start it up) again with the cursor o<n the tablet.H Each time data is entered, the red LED's will blink. As dataH is digitized a mini-graph will be displayed on the terminal to showH where the points were entered on the tablet. To exit from dataH entry type 'X' or 'S'. Note, that the TTY LOCK button on the 4014H terminal must be depressed so that the terminal is sending upperH case characters. If the button is not depressed, lower caseH characters will be sent and TAB will no=t exit. If 'X' is typed theH program will exit and not start up TEKGRAPH, whereas if 'S' isH typed, TAB will transfer control to TEKGRAPH. Note, that if youH wish to start up GRAPH after running TAB that you must use the TABH command without specifying a file specifier. GRAPH is expecting aD file with the name GRAPH.DAT to contain the data to be graphed. To summarize,& 1. Be sure TTY LOCK is depressed 2. Select axis type3 3. > Select DISCRETE/CONTINUOUS digitizing mode 4. Define a unit square. 5. Define unit square positions on graph 6. Enter dataH 7. Exit via a 'S' (STOP and transfer to GRAPH) or via a 'X' (exit and close all files).H 8. Establish a new vertical/horizontal point to be the axis originH via A 'D' . The next point entered via the cursor, becomes) the location of X and Y offsets.2 Data_File_Format D 1. Inull, 70 BYTE FIELD (I*2, Byte*70 for comment)C 2. Iheader,IX,IY (Integer*2,Real*4,Real*4)C 3. Iheader,IX,IY (Integer*2,Real*4,Real*4) 4. " " " " " " N " " " ww @CTEKGRAPH is designed to be used in a subroutine-like fashion from aFmain calling program. The main program can spawn commands to TEKGRAPHFin two ways. First, the main program can create a graph control file,Emy_file.CTL, containing the appropriate Advanced-Graphics commands. FThen the main program can spawn the command $TEKGRAPH my_file.CTL, andDthe graph will be plotted. If the user does not wish to be botheredFwith prompting for a data file name, one can set the symbol GRAPH_FILE@to A be the name of the data file and then spawn off the command, C$TEKGRAPH, with no control file name on the command line. In thisFevent, TEKGRAPH will not prompt for a file name but it will prompt for.whether or not a control file should be used. EWhen run on a VT125 (also VT240) terminal, TEKGRAPH has the abilityDto move its cursor (when displayed) via the arrow keys. The movementFproduced by the arrow keys is rate sensitive. The faster you move the@keys, the larger steps the cursor mo Bves. If the interval betweenDhitting an arrow key is faster than .3 seconds, each time a key isFhit, the interval the cursor moves increases by 2 (up to 25). If the Finterval is longer, each time the interval decreases by 5 (down to 1).DThis allows for fast and accurate positioning of the cursor with the arrow keys. EIf TEKGRAPH does not know what type of terminal it is on, it will Dprompt for the terminal type. At this time it only knows about 4014Eand VT125 terminals. However, thiCs feature can be used from withinEan indirect command procedure (or batch) to have TEKGRAPH output dataCin either 4014 or ReGIS mode to a text file which can be displayedBlater. At present, TEKGRAPH does not know about VT100's which canEemulate a Tektronix 4014. TEKGRAPH knows what terminal device it mustEoutput the graph to, by using the information about terminal type setFvia the SET TERM/DEVICE=XYZ command. Current graphic devices are theEVT125 or FT1 (Foreign terminal 1, for DTektronix 4014 terminals). 2 Restrictions?The HDCOPY command can not work on a VT125/VT200 terminal?unless a printer is attached to the printer port. Hardcopies?may be made using the 8-V MUX and the video hard copy printer.?If a command of the form $TEKGRAPH Ctrl_File is issued for a?VT125/VT2xx terminal, TEKGRAPH will display the graph and wait?for a return to be hit, thus allowing time for a user to signal)the 8-V Mux to make a copy of the screen.?When aborted w Eith a CTRL/Y, TEKGRAPH erases the screen before$returning the user to the DCL level.=To insure that a VT125/VT2xx terminal is useable for entering8commands, the terminal must always be switched back from;graphic format to non-graphic format when a graphic program>exits (no matter how). Consequently, when TEKGRAPH exits on a@ReGIS terminal, it erases the screen, whereas when it exits on aBTektronix 4014 terminal, it does not erase the screen. To insure8adequate viewing time for the gr Faph on a ReGIS terminal,>TEKGRAPH waits for the user to hit RETURN before it exits (and=erases the screen) when creating a graph from a control file.?TEKGRAPH has command line switches /WAIT and /NOWAIT which setApresent) whether TEKGRAPH waits for a return to be hit plotting aAgraph in command line mode before exiting. switches override theFdefault, terminal-dependent Their function is identical to the controlfile WAIT and NOWAIT. 2 UseC TEKGRAPH can be used in three ways; Gto graph data sets basedCon commands in a graph control file, to create graph control files,Cand to interactively edit and merge graphic data files. TEKGRAPHCcan either be invoked transparently from the Graph Master Menu (theBVPW Graphics workstation), or independently by defining the symbol1 $ TEKGRAPH:=$SYS$UTILITY:TEKGRAPHC TEKGRAPH has two primary modes, command line mode, andCinteractive mode. The interactive mode is started up if the:TEKGHRAPH command line is empty, ie it is invoked by typing $ TEKGRAPH However, one may also type' $ TEKGRAPH Control_File or. $ TEKGRAPH/WAIT Control_File. $ TEKGRAPH/NOWAIT Control_FileCIf there is no explicit extension on the Control_File name, theCextenstion .CTL will be assumed. If the file exists, TEKGRAPH willCopen it up and read its commands from it. At this time the wait>control switches I are the only command line switches supported.C When TEKGRAPH is first invoked, it requests VMS to tell itCwhat type of terminal it is running on. At this time eitherCVT125's or Tektronix 4014 terminals (FT1 type) are known toCTEKGRAPH (PLOT125 subroutines). If the terminal is any other typeC(or inadvertently set to the wrong type), the following message will appear.: Warning -- Terminal type does not support graphics5 Graphics protocol to sJimulate (ReGIS/Plot10):CAt this point either the user should enter either a R for ReGIS5(VT-125/VT2xx) or P for Plot10 (Tektronix 4010,4014). 3 InteractiveC If there is no command file on the command line invokingCTEKGRAPH, TEKGRAPH will erase the screen and prompt for a data fileto plot.8 Plot file name ( => GRAPH.DAT, ^Z => Exit):CIf ^Z is entered, TEKGRAPH erases the screen and exits. If aCcarriage return is hit, TEKGRAPH assumes you do notK want to createCa control file for plotting the data, and immediately drops intoCthe Graphics Editing Menu. At this point, simply typing a return,Cwill tells TEKGRAPH to prompt for format to display the data (lineCor point) and to then to produce a basic display of your data.CAfter each graph is displayed, the graphics cursor will display onCthe screen. Hitting RETURN will return you to the Graphics EditingCMenu. Additional graphics editing capabilities will be discussed Llater.C However, if a file name is entered, TEKGRAPH assumes you may.want to design a plot control file and prompts& Specify the GRAPH plot format [Y/N]: CIf the first letter of the answer is not "Y", TEKGRAPH drops intoCthe Graphics Editing Menu and behaves as discussed above. However,Cif the answer is "Y", TEKGRAPH checks to see if a control fileCalready exists. It tests for the existance of a control file byCstripping the extension off of the data file specifi Med and adding aC.CTL extension. If a control file with that name already existsTEKGRAPH prompts3 Use the existing graph control file [Y/N]:CIf the answer is "Y", TEKGRAPH plots the data using the existingCcontrol file, waits for you to hit RETURN, erases the screen andCexits. If no control file existed initially, or if one does notCchoose to use the existing control file, TEKGRAPH will display theCcurrent data file name and the name of the control file it N willCcreate and then procede to ask a series of questions as to theCformat in which one wishes to plot the data. When these questionsCare completed, the data will be plotted using that format, TEKGRAPHAwill wait for a RETURN to be hit, and then will erase the screen.2 Data File FormatC TEKGRAPH requires a data file to have a certain format. DataCfiles for TEKGRAPH can be created by a program or interactivelyCcreated and edited using the graphics data file editor acc Oessed byCthe Graph Master Menu (see memo JGMD139). The data files areCunformatted, sequential access files. For users who plan to createCdata files as output from their own VAX programs, the followingdata file format is required.C Variable TotalC type Bytes@record 1 Inull,Ctitle I*2 + C*70 = 72@record 2 Isequence,Real_Xval,Real_Yval I* P2 + R*4 + R*4 = 10@.... ....... , ........ , ....... I*2 + R*4 + R*4 = 10@record n Isequence,Real_Xval,Real_Yval I*2 + R*4 + R*4 = 10 where* Inull INTEGER*2 0A Ctitle CHARACTER*70 Optional title for graphG Isequence INTEGER*2 Sequence number of data pair, 1 1...600: Real_Xval REAL*4 Real X coordinate: Real_Yval REAL*4 Q Real Y coordinateCAt this time, only 600 pairs of (X,Y) data points are allowed, andCthe above is the only data file format that is allowed. At someCfuture time, additional data file formats providing for additionalCcapabilities may be added. However, to allow for additional file)formats, the value of Inull must be zero.>If using Fortran, the data file should be created in theCfollowing way. The graphics file title is written to the data fileCafter the file has been Ropened then the data is written. TheCfollowing is an example of how to open the file and write the titleand data from Fortran :P REAL*4 Xval,Yval ! Required data file format7 C ! P INTEGER*2 INULL ! This is the first 2 bytesE C ! in the title.P INTEGER*2 Isequence ! Required data S file format6 C !L CHARACTER*70 CTITLE ! Remaining 70 bytes inS ! the title (total 72 bytes).6 C !J DATA INULL /0/ ! Load INULL with a 06 C !C OPEN( Unit = LUNF, ! Open up our A - T Name = 'file_name', ! data fileG - Status = 'NEW', ! so we can write> - Form = 'UNFORMATTED') ! to it.6 C !J WRITE(LUNF,200)INULL,CTITLE ! Write title to file6 C !L C ! Now we write the dataL WRITE(LUN)Isequence,Xval,Yval U ! Note. no format stmtL WRITE(LUN)Isequence,Xval,Yval ! Note. no format stmtL WRITE(LUN)Isequence,Xval,Yval ! Note. no format stmtL WRITE(LUN)Isequence,Xval,Yval ! Note. no format stmtL C ! Write till we are out@ C ! of data.wwcґ1 Control_FileC A TEKGRAPH control or command file consists of a V sequentialCASCII formatted text file with one command per line. Commands areCexecuted sequentially one after the other until the end of the fileCat which point TEKGRAPH waits for the user to press RETURN and thenCexits. A control file can input data from multiple data files andCplot that data with any axis type, line style, or symbol type atCany location of the screen. TEKGRAPH can produce basic controlCfiles which can plot a single data set. More elaborite control9fiWles can be created by combining control files together.C Each line of the control file consists of a command followedCby one or more options. The syntax and naming conventions areCalmost identical with the TCS/Advanced-Graphics subroutine calling:conventions. If one had a subroutine XYZ and the call was CALL XYZ(A,B,C) the control file line would read XYZ A,B,C4 At a minimum, each control file must consist of8 X BINITT ! Initialize TCS9 DATAI input_file ! Input data file& < additional Commands># ..............& < additional Commands>> CHECK ! check and scale data: DISPLY ! Display the dataCPlease note, comment lines (a "!" followed by text) are not allowedCin control files and are included above only for clarification.CSince TEKGRAPH can Y be used to generate a prototype control file, itCcan be used as a starting point for generating your own specialized control file. 2 CommandsC TEKGRAPH can create basic plot control files. However,Celaborate control files can be created for plotting many data filesCon a single plot in a wide variety of ways. For creating a controlCfile and understanding the commands, you will need to get a copy ofCthe TCS manual, and the Advanced Graphics manual. In the appendixCof Zthis document is a complete comment list from the suboutineCGRAPH in TEKGRAPH and a very brief description of the variouscalls.3 BINITTC BINITT must be the first command in each control file. ItCinitializes the Advanced Graphics common blocks and finds out whichCgraphics protocol ot use when called the first time. BINITT may beCcalled at any time to reset the table values back to the defaultvalues. Command file format: BINITT3 [CHECK>Prior to displaying data, CHECK is used to scale the data toCthe graph window and also calculates the width and position of theClabels based of the room available plus calculating the grid parameters. Command file format: CHECK 3 DISPLAY>After the CHECK command the DSPLAY command is issued to plotCthe data, axis, etc. DSPLAY sets up the window, plots the curve,7draws the grid, and labels each set of major tic marks.Command file\ format: DSPLAYA** NOTE ** CHECK and DSPLAY should be called only once per plot.3 CPLOTD CPLOT plots a curve using the data window location valuesCcurrently in COMMON. It does not draw the grid or labels or alterCscale factors that determine which data is plotted. For multipleCcurves on the same graph the user should call DSPLAY for the firstCcurve and CPLOT for all additional curves. If the data vlauesCexceed the window boundaries as defined] in the COMMON Table, thecurve will be clipped. Command file format: CPLOT3 FRAMEC FRAME will cause a frame around the window. Normally, ifCshort tic marks have been specified (without grid lines), the sidesCof the data window opposite the axes will not be framed. In this)case, calling FRAME will add these lines. Command file format: FRAME3 DINITC DINITX and DINITY are used if one has multiple curve^s withCmultiple scales which must occur on the same graph. For example,CDINITX will reinitialize the labels on the X axis. This will allow+a new curve (with a new scale to be drawn). Command file format: DINITX DINITY3 DLIM>DLIMX and DLIMY are used to set the minimum and maximum X andCY values to use in plotting the data. It can be used to set theCdisplay window or to clip data outside the minimum and maximumrange. Comman_d file format: DLIMX RXmin,RXmax DLIMY RYmin,RYmax where: RXmin,RXmax = Minimum X, Maximum X values: RYmin,RYmax = Minimum Y, Maximum Y values3 SLIMF SLIMX and SLIMY set the screen limits for Xmin, Xmax and Ymin, Ymax. Command file format: SLIMX IXmin,IXmax SLIMY IYmin,IYmax whereA IXmin,IXmax = Minimum X, Maximum X screen valuesA IYmin,IYmax =` Minimum Y, Maximum Y screen values3 PLACEC This routine sets the values of the screen minimums andCmaximums in COMMON to place the screen window at a predefinedlocation on the display area.Command file format: PLACE (LIT) where? LIT = is a literal string of three characters? specifying the window location desired.- (See following table)B Location Value Ivala Screen CoordinatesD (literal) I*4 XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAXD ----------------------------C Standard (STD) 1 ! 150 900 150 700C Upper Half (UPH) 2 ! 150 850 525 700C Lower Half (LOH) 3 ! 150 850 150 325C Upper Left 1/4 (UL4) 4 ! 150 450 525 700C Upper Right 1/4 (UR4) 5 ! 650 950 b 525 700C Lower Left 1/4 (LL4) 6 ! 150 450 150 325C Lower Right 1/4 (LR4) 7 ! 650 950 150 325C Upper Left 1/6 (UL6) 8 ! 150 325 525 700C Upper Center 1/6 (UC6) 9 ! 475 650 525 700C Upper Right 1/6 (UR6) 10 ! 800 975 525 700C Lower Left 1/6 (LL6) 11 ! 150 325 150 325C Lower Center 1/6 (LC6) 12 ! 475 650 150 325C c Lower Right 1/6 (LR6) 13 ! 800 975 150 325C If preferred, the user may enter the number of the location as'represented by Ival in the table above.3 HBARST" See HELP information under VBARST3 VBARSTC Bar charts may be specified using one of two routines, HBARSTCfor horizontal bars or VBARST for vertical bars. The same resultsCcould be obtained by using LINE to specify bar chare, XFRM or YFRMCto suppress the grid lines parallel to the bars, SYMdBL to specifyCthe type of shading lines in the bar, SIZEL to specify the width ofCthe bar, and Sizes to specify the distance between the shading%lines. The format of the command is; Command file format:$ HBARST Ishade,Iwbar,Idbar$ VBARST Ishade,Iwbar,Idbar where/ Ishade = Shading type (0 - 15)? Iwbar = The width of the bar in raster units.; The width must be greater than 1,B e but 0 will result in a default width of * 40 raster units.D Idbar = The distance between the shading lines in E raster units. The distance must be greaterC than 2, however, if a zero is entered, a C default width of 20 raster units results.3 SIZELC The SIZEL command sets the width of the bar used for barcharts. Command file format:f SIZEL value whereI Value = real number designating the width in raster units.3 HLABELC HLABEL can be used to print a label string on the screenCstarting at the current position. The format for the HLABEL command is Command file format: HLABEL Lstring whereK Lstring = Literal ASCII text string of up to 66 charactersC An example of using HLABEL would be to position the cursor to ?(200,200) gand write the label "I AM A TITLE". To do this the !following commands would be used. MOVABS 200,200 HLABEL I AM A TITLE3 VLABELC VLABEL can be used to print a label string on the screenCstarting at the current position. While the HLABEL string isCprinted out horizontally, the VLABEL string is printed outCvertically from top to bottom. The format for the VLABEL commandis Command file format: VLABEL Lstring h whereE Lstring = Literal ASCII text string of up to 66 charactersC An example of using VLABEL would be to position the cursor to @(50,500) and write the label "VERTICAL LABEL". To do this the !following commands would be used. MOVABS 50,500% VLABEL VERTICAL_TITLE3 NOTATEC Notate will position the cursor to point IX,IY and place andCalphanumeric label there. The label may be up to 54 charactersClong. In any event, a labiel of 54 characters is always plotted<(although it may be blank/null filled). The command form is Command file format: NOTATE Ix,Iy,Lstring where= Ix = Screen X location to start writing= Iy = Screen Y location to start writingK Lstring = Literal ASCII text string of up to 66 characters?**NOTE** If this routine does not seem to work, try the  following calls instead:C MjOVABS Ix,Iy Move to screen coord. Ix,Iy2 HLABEL Text Write text3 LINEC Specifies the line type to use in drawing a curve. The formatof the command is Command file format: LINE Iline_Type where. Iline_Type = 11+ Software DashE 9 Alternate moves/draws between points/ 4 Dot,dot,dot...6 3 Dot,dash,dot,dash....1 k 2 Dash,dash,......8 1 Long dash,long dash....& 0 Solid( -1 No line- -2 Vertical Bar/ -3 Horizontal Bar+ -4 Point plot* -11 User Line3 SYMBOLE SYMBL is used to select the symbol type for plotting line graphsCor the symbol type for plotting bar charts. The clommand format is; Command file format: SYMBL Isymb where" Isymb = 1 Circle! 2 Cross$ 3 Triangle" 4 Square 5 Star# 6 Diamond( 7 Vertical Bar% 8 Plus sign$ 9 Up Arrow& 10 Down Arrow, 11 Reverse Triamngle3 SIZESC The command sizes sets the size of the data point symbol if a-symbol has been specified with command SYMBL. Command file format: SIZES Rsize where= Rsize = the multiplicative factor specifying ; the size of the data point symbols,? or the distance in raster units between8 the bar chart and shading lines.3 STEPLC STEPL is used to set the incremennt between data points whichwill be connected with a line. Command file format: STEPL Ivalue whereJ Ivalue = 1 Desiginates lines between every data pointK 2 Desiginates lines between every other pointI 3 Desiginates lines between every 3rd point ...I N Desiginates lines between every Nth point3 STEPS@ STEPS determines othe interval between data symbols plotted. Command file format: STEPS Ivalue whereG Ivalue = 1 Desiginates symbols on every data pointH 2 Desiginates symbols on every other pointF 3 Desiginates symbols on every 3rd point ...F N Desiginates symbols on every Nth point3 XFRM See help for YFRM3 YFRM@ XFRM and YFRM sets the pformat for the major tic marks. Thecommand format is Command file format: XFRM Iform YFRM Iform where1 Iform = 1 No tic marks drawn5 = 2 Tic on outside of axis4 = 3 Tic on inside of axis9 = 4 Tic inside/outside of axis; = 5 Arrow from outside to inside6 = 6 Arrow on inside of axis3 XLEN Seeq command for YFRM3 YFRMC XLEN and YLEN are used to set the size of the major x-axis and!y-axis tic marks. The format is; Command file format: XLEN Ilength YLEN Ilength where; Ilength = designates the distance in screen7 units that the tic marks will6 extend outward from the axis3 not including grid lines.3 XLAB  See command for YLAB3 YLABrC XLAB and YLAB are used to set the label format on the x-axis and y-axis. Command file format:+ XLAB Iform XLAB Iform+ YLAB Iform YLAB Iform where& Iform = 0 No label9 = 1 Matches transformation type* = 2 Logarithemic" = 3 Days# = 4 Weeks% = 5 Periods$ = s 6 Months& = 7 Quarters# = 8 Years3 XLOC See command fr YLOC3 YLOCC XLOC and YLOC are used to set the location of the X and Y axis>complete with labels and tic marks in relation to the left and@lower edges of the screen window. The value to offset the axes,CILOC, may be positive or negative. If positive, the axis is moved@inward from the window. If negative, it is moved outward. Thecommand format is; Command tfile format: XLOC Iloc YLOC Iloc whereD Iloc = the integer number of raster units the axesE will be offset from the lower edge of the % data window.3 XTYPE See command for YTYPE3 YTYPEC XTYPE and YTYPE is used to define to the Advanced Graphic@system the type of data that is represented in the X or Y array. Command file format: XTYPE Itype uYTYPE Itype where+ Itype = 1 Linear (Default)& 2 Logarithmic 3 Days 4 Weeks" 5 Periods! 6 Months# 7 Quarters 8 Years 2 TCS_Options3 ERASEC ERASE erases the screen of the graphics output device. TheCamount of delay following the erase varies with the type ofterminval being used. Command file format: ERASE3 HDCOPY> HDCOPY will make a copy of a 4014 screen on the graphics:hardcopy device. At this time, HDCOPY does not work withEVT125/VT240 terminals. However, those terminals can use the 8V-Mux.Command file format: HDCOPY3 DRAWAC DRAWA is used to draw a line (in user's units) from the.current position to the specified coordinates. Command file format: DRAWA Rxval,Ryvawl whereE Rxval = Xvalue line is drawn to (users coordinates)E Ryval = Yvalue line is drawn to (users coordinates)3 DRAWRC DRAWR is used to draw a line from current position a$displacement (in users coordinates). Command file format: DRAWR Rxval,Ryval whereC Rxval = Xvalue length of line (users coordinates)C Ryval = Yvalue length of line (users coordinates)3 DRWAxBSB DRWABS is used to draw a line between the current position onCthe screen to the location (in screen units) specified by thecommand. Command file format: DRWABS Ixval,Iyval whereF Ixval = Xvalue line is drawn to (screen coordinates)F Iyval = Yvalue line is drawn to (screen coordinates)3 DRWRELC DRWREL is used to draw a line a displacement (in screen units)(from the current position on the screen. Commyand file format:  DRWABS Ixval,Iyval whereF Ixval = Xvalue line is drawn to (screen coordinates)F Iyval = Yvalue line is drawn to (screen coordinates)3 MOVEAB MOVEA is used to move (in user's units) from the currentCposition to the specified coordinates. The coordinates used willCbe appropriately converted to screen units depending on thescalling factors set. Command file format: MOVEA Rxval,zRyval where? Rxval = Xvalue to move to (users coordinates)? Ryval = Yvalue to move to (users coordinates)3 MOVERC MOVER is used to move from current position a displacement (inusers coordinates). Command file format: MOVER Rxval,Ryval whereC Rxval = Xvalue length to move (users coordinates)C Ryval = Yvalue length to move (users coordinates)3 MOVABSC MOVABS is used to{ move the current position on the screen to8the location (in screen units) specified by the command. Command file format: MOVABS Ixval,Iyval where@ Ixval = Xvalue to move to (screen coordinates)@ Iyval = Yvalue to move to (screen coordinates)3 MOVRELB MOVREL is used to move a displacement (in screen units) from#the current position on the screen. Command file format: MOVABS Ixval,Iyval whereD | Ixval = Xvalue length to move (screen coordinates)D Iyval = Yvalue length to move (screen coordinates)3 SCURSRC SCURSOR will display the cursor Inum times. Each time RETURNCis hit it will write the cursor coordinates (in Screen units) toCthe open output file. If an "S" followed by a RETURN is typed, itCwill stop displaying the cursor prior to entering all Inum times.CFor the filing to work, the data file must be opened with a DATAOcomman}d. Command file format: SCURSR Inum where/ Inum = Number of points desired3 VCURSRC VCURSOR will display the cursor Inum times. Each time RETURNCis hit it will write the cursor coordinates (in Screen units) toCthe open output file. If an "S" followed by a RETURN is typed, itCwill stop displaying the cursor prior to entering all Inum times.CFor the filing to work, the data file must be opened with a DATAOcommand. Comman~d file format: VCURSR Inum where/ Inum = Number of points desired2 Command_File_Options3 BOXC The BOX command places the terminal in graphic input mode.CThe cursor is then positioned and return struck to select the firstCcorner of a "BOX". The cursor is then positioned and return struckCto select the opposite corner of the "BOX". A frame is drawnCaround the box described by thes two corners and the X,Y internal6limits are set to correspond to the box's coordinates.Command file format: BOX3 CLOSEC CLOSE is used to close open DATAI and DATAO files so that anew file can be used.Command file format: CLOSE3 DATAI:DATAI is used to specify an input data file specification. Command file format: DATAI file_name where . file_name = an ASCII text string3 DATAOC DATAO is used to open an output datat file for filing selecteddata. Command file format: DATAO file_name where 2 file_name = an ASCII text string3 ERRBARC The ERRBAR command is used to plot data with error bars. IfCthe SYMBL command is used to set the symbol type, the ERRBARCcommand must follow it if error bars are to be drawn. The ERRBARCcommand assumes that the data to be ploted has a fixed fractionalCuncertainty for both X and Y data. This uncertainty is specifiedwith the ERRBAR command; Command file format: ERRBAR Xerror,Yerror where 4 Xerror = Fractional uncertainty in X4 Yerror = Fractional uncertainty in YC If a symbol type is already set (SYMBL command) the error barsCwill be plotted on top of the symbols. If the SYMBL command isCused after the ERRBAR command it will cancel the command to plotthe error bar symbol.3 PRINTC PRINT will cause the cursor to  be displayed. AfterCpositioning the cursor, hit return or space bar and the coordinatesCof the cursor (in user coordinates) will be displayed. Type 'S' tostop. Command file format: PRINT*The format for the data values printed is:3 (1PE11.4,1PE11.4) or (1.2345E67 ,1.2345E67)3 PRTABSC PRTABS will cause the cursor to be displayed. AfterCpositioning the cursor, hit return or space bar and the coordinatesCfor the cursor (in screen coordinates) will be displayed. Type 'S'to stop. Command file format: PRTABS2 The format for the data values printed is:" [I4,I4] or [1234,1234]3 TITLEC TITLE is used to print the title of the data file (as definedCin the first record in the data file) on the top of the graph at-screen coord. [145,740] (64 characters max). Command file format: TITLE3 TITABSC TITABS is used to print the title of data file (as defined inCthe first record in the data file) at current location on graph.(64 characters max). Command file format: TITABS3 XLIMIT See help for YLIMIT3 YLIMITC XLIMIT and YLIMIT are used to write the cursor defined limitsCto the output file. When XLIMIT/YLIMIT command is encountered, theCcursor is displayed and when return is hit, either the x or y valueCbecomes the limit value for filing. If the command is XLIMIT, aCline is drawn between the coordinates (Xlim,Ymin) and (Llim,Ymax)Cand these points are written out to the data file (must be openedCwith DATAO). Likewise, if the command is YLIMIT, a line is drawnCbetween (Xmin,Ylim) and (Xmax,Ylim) and the points written out tothe data file. Command file format: XLIMIT YLIMIT3 WAIT (NOWAIT)C The WAIT and NOWAIT commands determine whether TEKGRAPH willCwait or not for the user to press RETURN before exiting. ByCdefault, TEKGRAPH waits for the user to press RETURN if it is aCReGIS terminal and does not wait if it is not a ReGIS terminal (iea Tektronix 4014). Command file format: WAIT NOWAIT2 Control_File_ExampleC The following is an example of a complicated control file. ItCis used to plot three seperate data files on the screen. TheCcommands are commented (ie any text following the "!"). However,Cplease note that a normal TEKGRAPH control file does not allow oraccept in line comments.? ! Screen erasesD BINITT ! Init common blocksA DATAI DRA1:[MARKB.TAB]NEAR.TMP;1 ! Input data fileC SLIMX 75,450 ! Set X plot windowC SLIMY 100,400 ! Set Y plot windowB XLEN 20 ! Set X tic lengthB YLEN 15  ! Set Y tic lengthC XFRM 2 ! Tics outside axisC YFRM 2 ! Tics outside axis@ LINE 0 ! Use Solid lineB CHECK ! Check/scale data< DSPLAY ! Draw graphA MOVABS 0,350 ! Move to (0,350)I VLABEL MDS UNITS -CM- ! Insert a vertical labelB  MOVABS 180,50 ! Move to (180,50)B HLABEL CENTIMETERS [SCAN] ! Horizontal labelA FRAME ! Frame the graphF BINITT ! Re-initialize commonG DATAI DRA1:[MARKB.TAB]OFFSET.TMP ! Input a new data fileI SLIMX 575,975 ! Set new graphics windowH SLIMY 100,400 ! above the first graphF XL EN 10 ! Set tic mark lengths1 YLEN 10 !> XFRM 2 ! and location1 YFRM 2 != CHECK ! Check/scale; DSPLAY ! Plot dataF MOVABS 500,325 ! Move to proper placeH VLABEL LINEARIZED ! and add vertical/horizF  MOVABS 690,50 ! labels as necessary1 HLABEL CENTIMETERS [SCAN] !> FRAME ! draw a frameJ DATAI DRA1:[MARKB.TAB]AVEO.TMP ! Input another data file?= CHECK ! Check/scaleC CPLOT ! Plot on same axisC DATAI DRA1:[MARKB.TAB]AVE1.TMP ! Input yet onother@ LINE 1  ! Long dash line= CHECK ! Check/scaleC CPLOT ! Plot on same axisH DATAI DRA1:[MARKB.TAB]PLTINT.TMP ! Input yet another fileG LINE 2 ! Draw with dashed lineB CHECK ! Check/scale dataC CPLOT ! Plot on same axisJ BINITT ! Re-init tcs common blockD DATAI DRA1:[MARKB.TAB]INTGRL.TMP ! Input another fileA SLIMX 575,975 ! set data limits1 SLIMY 475,775 !A XLEN 10 ! Tic mark length2 YLEN 10 ! > XFRM 2 ! and position1 YFRM 2 !< LINE 0 ! Solid line=  CHECK ! Check/scale? DSPLAY ! display graphD MOVABS 500,740 ! Move to label area= VLABEL RELATIVE ENERGY ! write labelC MOVABS 690,425 ! move to new placeC HLABEL CENTIMETERS [SCAN] ! write horiz labelB FRAME ! Frame the graph.2 Command_List4 Brief list of command file options%BINITT AG-2 initialization:BOX File 2 coordinate sets and enclose frame-CHECK Set tables wrt present data-CLOSE Close datai and datao files CPLOT Curve plotting&DATAI L1 Input data file spec(DATAO L1 Output data file spec.;DINITX Multiple curves with differrent scales(x))DLIMX R1,R2 Set data min and max(x)*DLIMY R1,R2 Set data mina and max(y))DRAWA  R1,R2 Draw line (users units)7DRAWR R1,R2 Draw line a displacement (user units)*DRWABS I1,I2 Draw line (screen units)9DRWREL I1,I2 Draw line a displacement (screen units)DSPLAY Display graphERASE Erase screen7ERRBAR dX,dY Create a basic error bar scatter plot*FRAME Draw frame around window,HBARST I1,I2,I3 Horizionta bar chart spec."HDCOPY Hard copy screen%HLABEL L1 Horizontal labelingLINE I1  Set line type3MOVABS I1,I2 Move screen cursor (screen units)1MOVEA R1,R2 Move screen cursor (user units)>MOVER R1,R2 Move screen cursor displacement (user units):MOVREL I1,I2 Move screen cursor displacement (screen)%NOTATE I1,I2,L1 Horizontal labeling<NOWAIT Don't wait till is hit before exiting=PLACE LIT Set screen min and max to predefined values=PRINT Display cursor data vals (user coordinates)>PRTABS Display cu rsor data val (screen coordinates)8SCURSR I1 File cursor coordinates (screen units)*SIZEL R1 Set bar chart line widthSIZES R1 Symbol size&SLIMX I1,I2 Set screen limits(x)&SLIMY I1,I2 Set screen limits(y)6STEPL I1 Set increment between plotted points/STEPS I1 Set increment between symbols*SYMBL I1 Designate plotted symbol=TITABS Display DATA TITLE at current loc. (64 Max)=TITLE Display DATA TITLE @ [14 5,740] (Scrn coor.)&TSEND Dump graphics buffer/VBARST I1,I2,I3 Vertical bar chart parameters6VCURSR I1 File cursor coordinates (user units)%VLABEL L1 Vertical labeling 6WAIT Wait till is hit before exiting)XFRM I1 Major tick mark form(x)0XLAB I1 Major tick mark label types(x))XLEN I1 Major tick mark size(x),XLIMIT File cursor defined limits"XLOC I1 Axis LOCATION(X)%XTYPE I1 Data transform type)YFRM I1 Major tick mark form(y)0YLAB I1 Major tick mark label types(y))YLEN I1 Major tick mark size(y),YLIMIT File cursor defined limits"YLOC I1 Axis location(y)%YTYPE I1 Data transform typeww 8_# 1 TapecheckETAPECHECK is a program designed to quickly and inexpensively test theDdata reliability of a magnetic tape. It does this by writing blocksFof data on the entire tape, rewinding the tape, and reading the entire?tape back in. Data blocks which do not match the original data@pattern or block length are announced along with the approximateposition on the tape. @THIS PROGRAM OVERWRITES ALL THE DATA ON THE TAPE. Please do not=attempt to check a tape that has valuable information on it. BThe check performed by this program is not as good as is available?from any hardware tape evaluator. The errors that this programCreports might conceivably be caused by the tape drive or some otherfactor. 2 RestrictionsDIf the tape drive does not run at 800, 1600 or 6250 BPI, the programEwill complain and quit. If the density you run at does not match theBdensity the system thinks you are at, the program may run but willquote lengths incorrectly. F This program writes on about 95% of the tape surface, the rest goes to>interrecord gaps. Obviously the gaps are not checked for dataFreliability. It is difficult to do much better than that on a standard tape drive. 2 UseF Normally this program is used within the context of the CHECKTAPEFprocedure which handles the mounting, and the checking for tape errors@and is designed to submit the tape to be checked as a batch job.& To use the program interactively:Ca) Mount the tape /FOREIGN at the desired density with logical namee SCRATCH. " $ MOUNT SCRTCH/FOR SCRATCHD If the tape has been previously used at another density, the tapeE drive may set the density for you. If this is a problem, INIT theb' tape first at the required density. Cb) Run the program. $ RUN SYS$UTILITY:TAPECHECK or UTL TAPECHECK.e Sample Output:n Checking tape at 1600 BPI! The tape is about 2332 feet longw) A Tape error occurred at about 2301 feet) A tape erro r occurred at about 2302 feetl$ 2 tape errors occurred in 2332 feetc) Dismount the tape.n2 Source_Location EThe sources for TapeCheck are on KMS$SYSUTLUSR1:[FILETOOLS]. There iseFreasonable documentation within the source file for finding out how itFworks if anyone is interested. The original program has been modifiedCto output error messages via a Fortran subroutine so that it can berErun from within a Batch procedure. The tape check has also been madekEmore stringent in that retries are inhibited both for writing and for 6reading. The audit trail JGD1 documents these changes.Original Version: [DECUS.VAX82B.SEARLE] Jim Lellman G. D. Searle & Co. Research Computing Services 4901 Searle Parkway Skokie Il, 60077 October 14, 1982Modified: James G. Downward KMS Fusion, Inc. P.O. Box 1567 Ann Arbor, Mich 48106 07-Oct-1984ww<C,1 SWAP; SWAP is a quick way to make your process look like anothernAuser's process without actually logging into their account. OnlysCusers with SYSPRV and CMKRNL privileges can use SWAP. To use it ton#emulate a user with USERNAME, type D $ UTL SWAP Usernameaor  $ SWAP:=$SYS$UTILITY:SWAPo $ SWAP Usernamen!To return to being yourself enteri $ UTL SWAP Your_Own_NameCNote, there are some things swap does not touch. It does not alterkDquotas, and it does not invoke the particular user's LOGIN.COM file.FIt does, however, make your current privileges look like those of the user. 2 Source_LocationiDSources to rebuild SWAP are on SYS$SYSUSER1:[SYSUTL.SWAP]. SWAP was(taken from [DECUS.VAX82B.MELBUNIV.SWAP].wwtape drive does not run at 800, 1600 or 6250 BPI, the programEwill complain and quit. If the density you run at does not match theBdensity the system thinks you are at, the program may run but willquote lengths incorrectly. Fe< 1 CNVDCALXY%JCNVDCALXY is a program which will convert a tabular X-Y DECalc dump formatKfile into a KMS-canonical binary graphics X-Y data file. The format of the input file must be xxx,yyy xxx,yyy xxx,yyyJwhere the X and Y values are separated with commas. The values of X and YDmust be such that an E12.0 format can read them in. The output file=will be an unformated, binary sequential file with the format  Iblank,Ctitle Real,Real Real,Real  Real,Real Real,Real Real,RealDwhere Iblank is an I*2 zero value and Ctitle is a 70 character title=which would appear on the graph if the data set were plotted. wwmay set the density for you. If this is a problem, INIT the' tape first at the required density. Cb) Run the program. $ RUN SYS$UTILITY:TAPECHECK or UTL TAPECHECK. Sample Output: Checking tape at 1600 BPI! The tape is about 2332 feet long) A Tape error occurred at about 2301 feet) A tape erro UP]1 VAXNET!/! VAXNET.HLP by Robin Miller on April 12, 1984.O!rG VAXNET is a program which allows communcations between two computersiG using an asynchronous terminal port. The systems can be connectedlG either directly using a null modem cable or via a dialup modem.oG Communications with the remote system is accomplished using a secondt port on the local system.G After the initial dialogue, you simply login to the remote system asUG an interactive user. If a log file was specified, all output from the G remote system is written to the log file. Thus, if you want to copy G a file from the remote system to the local system, simply display theoG file at the terminal using the TYPE command. If you want to send arG file to the remote system, open a file using the CREATE command, then< use the VAXNET DUMP command to send the file to the remote.G An alternate method of transferring files requires a program calledG SNDRCV on the remote system. This program allows transmission of-G ASCII files with error checking. A program called MISH can be used to G convert any type of file into printable ASCII for file transmission.kG Refer to the MISH and SNDRCV help sections for details on using thesea programs. 2 AUTO_LOGINC This command is used to automatically login to the remote system C when you are using an auto-dial modem. To use this command,TC several DCL symbols described below must be defined to describee the login sequence:= $ LOGIN_START :== "^M" ! To start VMS login.tA "HEL^M" ! To start RSX-11M login.T= "^C" ! To start MIT login.tB This symbol defines the character(s) to send the remote to getB the login started. All characters preceeded by the up-arrow areB converted to control characters. Thus, the ^M above is convertedB to a carriage return. These character(s) are sent in one secondB intervals until the remote system responds. For systems whichB display its' login prompt automatically, this symbol doesn't need to be defined (i.e., EASYLINK).= $ LOGIN_PROMPT :== "Username:" ! Prompt for VAX/VMS.b= "Account or name:" ! Prompt for RSX-11M.? "U#" ! Prompt for Crossfile.> "ID?" ! Prompt for EASYLINK.B This symbol defines the characters the remote system sends forB its' login prompt. The login command will not be sent until this$ prompt is received from the remote. $ LOGIN_CMD :== "ROBIN/NOCOM"aB This symbol defines the characters to send in response to the login prompt. $ PASS_PROMPT :== "Password:"eB This symbol defines the password prompt displayed by the remoteB system. If specified, VAXNET waits for this string before sending the password string.b $ PASSWORD :== "your_password"B This symbol defines the characters to send in response to theB password prompt. For systems which specify the password on the7 login command line, this symbol should not be defined..0 $ LOGIN_ERROR :== "User authorization failure"C This symbol defines the login error displayed by the remote systemC if the login is invalid. If this message is detected, the login) is retried up to three times by default.iB The following symbols can be defined for a secondary login. They4 perform the same function as those described above.. $ LOGIN_PROMPT2 :== "secondary login prompt"/ $ LOGIN_CMD2 :== "secondary login command"e1 $ PASS_PROMPT2 :== "secondary password prompt"e* $ PASSWORD2 :== "secondary password"5 $ LOGIN_ERROR2 :== "secondary login error message" 2 BAUD_RATEuC This command is used specify the baud rate of the remote computer.tD VAXNET automatically sets the remote port to the speed you specify.C If you are communicating with the remote system using a dialupo6 modem, the baud rate will bH F_DeallocateGETQUOTAyHELP JNLBACKUPLN03MISC03MISC03MISCMISCMISCMISC03MISCMISCary file to be converted from IBM 6 to VAX format. Types 'BEG', 'END' are used to mark5 the begining and end of a group of data types that0 repeat.5 The count for the group is given after 'BEG', the 2 count after 'END' must be 0. See sample format file. Output files: Disk file name Content -------------- ------- (VMS version of D.General name / from tape) ascii data or converted binary data7 from each disk file selected for loading by the user2 UseA ̟ɌK 1 AUTOLOGEAUTOLOG is a program used to logoff (time-out) terminal users who areEidle. An idle user is one who uses none of the following three systemBparameters: CPU_TIME, BUFFERED_IO, and DIRECT_IO. If all of theseCparameters remain constant over a period of 30 minutes (IDLE_TIME),Ethen the user's process is logged out (DELPRC). Prior to logging theEuser off, warning messages are given at 15, 20, 25, and 26 minutes of idle time. B To make AUTOLOG work, it shou ld be run as a DETACHed process fromOSYSTARTUP. The process also requires WORLD and OPER privledges. The command to$create it as a detached process is: 7 RUN/UIC=[1,4]/PRIV=(WORLD,OPER)/PROCESS_NAME=AUTOLOG - SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]AUTOLOGD Provisions are made in the program to allow special users not to beJtimed out. The OPERATOR or SYSTEM account are not timed out if running onOPA0:.= AUTOLOG runs under VMS 3.x. AUTOLOG takes care of users whoFhave attached themselves to subp rocesses using the SPAWN command. If aCprocess has any active subprocesses, then the main process does notFget the axe, even if it is idle. If a subprocess is idle for IDLE-TIME?minutes and it's parent process is a terminal process, then theDsubprocess gets the axe. Control is then sent to the parent process.FThis parent process then has IDLE-TIME minutes to become active, or itthen also gets the axe. > The unmodified program (V1.4) is on [VAX83A.ASDU.AUTOLOG] andwas written by:  Stev e Moores# Aurora Software Developement Unit C.F.B Greenwood Greenwood, N.S., Canada, B0P 1N0 (902) 765-3391 ext 864> The KMS Version was modified by J. Downward (V1.5 - V1.9) forFadditional levels of warning messages, to extend the idle timeout from K 1 AUTOLOGEAUTOLOG is a program used to logoff (time-out) terminal users who areEidle. An idle user is one who uses none of the following three systemBparameters: CPU_TIME, BUFFERED_IO, and DIRECT_IO. If all of theseCparameters remain constant over a period of 30 minutes (IDLE_TIME),Ethen the user's process is logged out (DELPRC). Prior to logging theEuser off, warning messages are given at 15, 20, 25, and 26 minutes of idle time. B To make AUTOLOG work, it shou ld be run as a DETACHed process fromOSYSTARTUP. The process also requires WORLD and OPER privledges. The command to$create it as a detached process is: 7 RUN/UIC=[1,4]/PRIV=(WORLD,OPER)/PROCESS_NAME=AUTOLOG - SYS$SYSDEVICE:[SYSUTL]AUTOLOGD Provisions are made in the program to allow special users not to beJtimed out. The OPERATOR or SYSTEM account are not timed out if running onOPA0:.= AUTOLOG runs under VMS 3.x. AUTOLOG takes care of users whoFhave attached themselves to subp rocesses using the SPAWN command. If aCprocess has any active subprocesses, then the main process does notFget the axe, even if it is idle. If a subprocess is idle for IDLE-TIME?minutes and it's parent process is a terminal process, then theDsubprocess gets the axe. Control is then sent to the parent process.FThis parent process then has IDLE-TIME minutes to become active, or itthen also gets the axe. > The unmodified program (V1.4) is on [VAX83A.ASDU.AUTOLOG] andwas written by:  Stev e Moores# Aurora Software Developement Unit C.F.B Greenwood Greenwood, N.S., Canada, B0P 1N0 (902) 765-3391 ext 864> The KMS Version was modified by J. Downward (V1.5 - V1.9) forHadditional levels of warning messages, to extend the idle timeout from 5@minutes to 26 minutes, and to not log out the OPERATOR or systemEmanager if they are on OPA0:. The KMS Sources for the current version+of autolog are on KMS$SYSUTLUSR1:[AUTOLOG].wwTo invoke DGTAPE first mount the tape with the following command. $MOUNT MSA0:/FOR DUMMY TAPE:EDUMMY may be any valid tape name of six characters or less. It is notCused and the name does not matter. Then invoke DGTAPE by issuing a $UTL DGTAPEor $RUN $SYS$UTILITY:DGTAPEAcommand. DGTAPE will then start up the following dialog with you(1)<Tape format?(1=AOS, 2=RDOS, 3=RDOS-SAO, 4=RDOS-SAO):6 Enter number of your choice. Typically, 2 for most normal DG RDOS tapes.(2)(Tape must have been mounted by command =&MOUNT/FOR/DEN=density device DUM TAPE:7If error message, do MOUNT command and restart program.0Current tape position (0 or last file read + 1):1 If you don't know, enter 0; otherwise enter a 1 file postion. The 1st file on tape is file 0.(3)Tape file = some#3Tape file to load (0=1st file on tape, ^Z to exit):1 Enter file number. Each Tape has 'n' container* files containing a number of sub files.(4)Load all disk files [Y/N]:! Enter selection. If "Y" then:*Enter names (one per line, . or ^Z to end,)name can be: -.EXT, NAME.-, or NAME.EXT):/ If you enter just a "." the directory of the$ container file will be displayed.  . . . . . . BProgram will read tape and list each disk file name on SYS$OUTPUT.=If a file was selected, file is copied to disk. After reading$the end-of-file, program asks again:Tape file = some#5Tape file to load?(0=1st file on tape, -1 to exit) 2 Errors(a) Parity errors while reading the tape.Bb) "Line too long" - usually caused by loading a binary file which! is not listed in file CONVERT.<c) "Tape block type = .. but state = .. so bad block type.": - usually caused by selecting RDOS instead of RDOS-SAO.Ed) Tape runs out to end of reel - tape file to load does not exist on the tape. 2 Source_File( Sources are on KMS$SYSUTLUSR1:[DGTAPE]. Program obtained from Claire Russell Columbia University$ Columbia Astrophysics Laboratory 538 West 120th Street New York, New York 10027 (212) 280-8140 or 280-2819wwe either 300 or 1200 baud. The valid baud rates are:4 50, 75, 110, 134, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800,5 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, or 19200.2 CABLEC A null modem cable is required to communicate directly between twoC computers without using modems. A straight through cable isB normally used with modems. This cable is constructed as follows:. WIRING DIAGRAM FOR NULL MODEM CABLE1 TD 2 ..................... 3 RD1 RD 3 ..................... 2 TD2 GND 7 ..................... 7 GND2 DSR 6 ..................... 20 DTR2 DTR 20 .................... 6 DSR2 COMMAND_FILEC A command file can be specified at the Vaxnet command prompt toC allow you change many parameters or to execute many commands. IfC you don't specify an extension, it defaults to .COM. If any errorsC occur while executing these commands, the command file is closedC immediatly. The symbol VAXNET_CMD can be defined with the name ofC the command file to automatically change parameters at startupC time. The command lines can be in either upper or lowercase sinceA the command line is converted to all uppercase after being read. Command format: Vaxnet> @VCMD Contents of file VCMD.COM: protocol xmodem file_type binary status 2 CROSSFILEC This command is used with the GE Crossfile System. After the modemC is online, the character "H" is sent in one second intervals untilC the login prompt "U#:" is received. This command is automatically< executed at startup time when the system type is CROSSFILE.2 DCLC There are two commands used to execute a DCL command. If you typeC "$ dcl_command", the command is executed without copying the DCLC symbols and logical names. If you type "SPAWN dcl_command", theC DCL symbols and logical names are copied. With either command, if: a DCL command is not specified, a new process is created.' For example, to get a directory, type: Vaxnet> $ DIRECTORY2 DEBUGC This command is used to display addition information in fileC transfer mode (GET or SEND). It also displays several additionalC lines in the STATUS report. To disable debug mode, use the NODEBUG command.2 DECHOC This command is used to enable or disable the display of the echoC from the remote system when dumping a file. By default the echoC is enabled. If local echo is enabled, VAXNET simulates the remoteC echo by displaying the last line dumped to the remote. Use the* command NODECHO to disable the dump echo.2 DIALC This command is used to specify the phone number for the auto-dialC modem to dial. The modem is automatically hungup before attempting to dial the new phone number. 2 DISPLAYC This command is used to enable or disable the display used duringC file transmissions. If the local terminal is a scope, a one lineC status report is displayed every 25 records (by default) to letC you know its working. If your terminal is a hardcopy or if runningC in batch, this display is disabled. The DCL symbol DISPLAY_RECORDC can be defined to change the frequency of the record display. IfC you specify zero, the display is disabled. The status report canC be obtained at any time during the transmission by typing the escape key. Command format:# Vaxnet> DISPLAY [n] or NODISPLAY DCL symbol: $ DISPLAY_RECORD :== 100 2 DUMP_FILEC This command is used to dump a file to the remote system. It isC usually used if the remote system doesn't have the SNDRCV program.C When using this command, there must be a program running on theC remote system to accept the characters being dumped to it. UsingC the "CREATE file_name" command works very nice. When the end ofC file is detected, you can optionally have a dump terminator sentC by specifying the symbol DUMP_TERM. The default dump read timeout@ is three seconds if the remote echoes, zero if it doesn't echo. Command format:' Vaxnet> DUMP file1, file2, ... filen DCL symbols:? $ DUMP_TIMEOUT :== 1 ! The dump read timeout in seconds.@ $ DUMP_DELAY :== "00.25" ! Delay between dumping each record.= $ DUMP_ECHO :== N ! Disable echo of dumped records.9 $ DUMP_TERM :== "^Z" ! Send CTRL/Z at end of file. 2 EASYLINKC Western Union's EASYLINK service is an advanced electronic mailC service offering a broad range of value-added communicationC features designed to meet today's business needs. EASYLINK canC satisfy user's needs for simple, convenient, quick and low-cost message communications.C A subscriber to EASYLINK can send and receive messages between andC among other EASYLINK subscribers. A subscriber can also sendC messages to destinations served by TELEX I, TELEX II (TWX),C INTERNATIONAL TELEX, INFOCOM, and as MAILGRAMS, TELEGRAMS, and INTERNATIONAL CABLEGRAMS.C Subscribers can prepare and send messages using most existing dataC terminals, word processors and personal computers equipped withC dial telephone communications capability. Subscribers can chooseC between two message delivery methods. One choice is to have theC messages delivered directly to any of the above devices equippedC with automatic answer capability. The other choice is to haveC messages delivered to and held in an electronic mailbox, for later. retrieval by a subscriber at his convenience.9 The rest of the EASLINK documentation was removed9 since it is quit lengthy. It can be recreated by9 using a VAXNET logfile and typing /HELP commands, to EASYLINK after getting logged in.2 ECHOC This command is used to enable or disable local echo. For systemsC which don't echo characters sent to it, VAXNET does a local echo.C This command isn't normally used since VAXNET automaticallyC enables or disables echoing based on the remote system type. The. command NOECHO is used to disable local echo.2 EXITC This command is used to exit from VAXNET. You can also exit byC typing a CTRL/Z. The log file (if open) is closed, and the modemC is automatically hungup if you were using a modem. If a log fileC is being closed, the command "REF log_file_name" is executed when0 exiting to automatically reformat the log file. 2 FILE_TYPEC This command sets up the type of file to be tranferred when usingC the KERMIT or XMODEM protocol (VAXNET protocol is ASCII only). The default file type is ASCII. Command format:$ Vaxnet> FILE_TYPE ASCII or BINARY 2 GET_FILEC This command is used to GET (receive) a file from a remote system.C The remote system MUST be running the SNDRCV program beforeC issuing this command. If you don't specify the file names on theC command line, you are prompted for the names. If you type theC RETURN key for the VAX file name, the REMOTE file name is used.C At the present time, only one file at a time can be tranferredC from the remote system (no wildcards). While the file transmissionC is in progress, you can type the ESCAPE key to get a one line# status report of the current file. Command format:# Vaxnet> GET remote_file vax_file 3 REMOTE_FILEC The REMOTE file name must be a legal file specification for theC system you are talking to. At the current time, only one file at time can be transferred. 3 VAX_FILEC The VAX file name can be any VAX file specification. If you typeD the return key, the remote file name is used on the VAX. The C remote file name is taken exactly as is. This includes theC directory name (i.e., [1,24] or [ROBIN]). If you don't have theC specified directory on the VAX, you will have to specify the VAX file name.2 HANGUPC This command is used to hangup the modem. The modem is hungupC automatically when you exit VAXNET and also before an auto-dialC is attempted. If you are using a modem, insure the remote port is+ setup as modem with the following command:! $ SET TERMINAL TTcn:/MODEM/PERMC If the remote port is not setup as modem, all auto-dial questionsC (and/or symbols) are bypassed, and the modem is not hungup whenC VAXNET exits. If you don't want the modem hungup when you exit,- issue the "NOHANGUP" command before exiting.2 HELP7 Help can be obtained on a particular topic by typing :* HELP topic subtopic subsubtopic ...* A topic can have the following format :D 1) an alphanumeric string (e.g. a command name, option, etc...) 2) the match-all symbol "*"@ 3) any of the above followed by "..." (on first topic only) Examples: HELP GET HELP SEND...7 Abbreviations result in all matches being displayed. 2 INTERRUPTC This command is used to specify the interrupt character. TheC interrupt character is the character you type to get to commandC level (the Vaxnet> prompt). Any character except for carriageC return, escape, question mark, or exclaimation point can be used.C All characters except the interrupt character are sent to the# remote system in interactive mode.2 INTROC VAXNET is a program which allows communcations between twoC computers using an asynchronous terminal port. The systems can beC connected either directly using a null modem cable or via a dialupC modem. Communications with the remote system is accomplished) using a second port on the local system.C When VAXNET is prompting you for a question, you have the following options:; o typing the escape key or typing "?" will give you help,B o typing an exclaimation point (!) followed by the return key& backs up to the previous question.B o typing the return key selects the default answer if there is? one. Default answers are shown in parenthesis; i.e., (DEC)* o typing a CTRL/Z will exit from VAXNET.C If you are communicating with the remote system, and you want toC exit, you must first type the interrupt character to get to4 command level, and then type either CTRL/Z or EXIT. 2 LOG_FILEC This command allows you to specify the name of a log file to writeC the output from the remote system. If you don't specify a fileC extension, .LOG is appended automatically. The output from theC remote system and questions asked by VAXNET (unless disabled) areC written to both the log file and the terminal. Use the NOLOG_FILE' command to close the current log file. 3 REFORMATC After exiting from VAXNET, the log file must be reformatted. TheD log file is created with 512 byte records with no carriage control.D A program called "REF" is used to reformat the log file to generateC an file with implied carriage control. After reformatting, the; file is in a format which can then be edited (if desired).C If a log file is being closed when VAXNET exits, then command lineC "REF log_file_name" is automatically executed to reformat the logC file. You must have a symbol setup to start the reformat program.D Additional help is available from within REF by typing "REF /HELP". For example: $ REF :== $SYS$SYSTEM:REF 4 REF_HELPC REFormat is a program used to convert input files into variableC length output files with implied carriage control. During thisC conversion, the control characters NULL, XON, XOFF, and DELETE areC stripped. The program will also optionally do ASCII to EBCDIC andC EBCDIC to ASCII conversions. This program is generally used to( reformat the RSXNET & VAXNET log files. Command line format:. input_file/switches output_file/switches Where switches are:8 /ASCII - Convert input file from ASCII to EBCDIC.8 /EBCDIC - Convert input file from EBCDIC to ASCII.; /VFU - Input file contains line printer VFC bytes.C /TOTAL - Display number of records and bytes in output file.< /BACK (D) - Remove delete sequences from the input file.E /ESC (D) - Break output records on cursor positioning sequences.? /NAME (D) - Output the name of the reformatted output file.D Switches can be negated by prefixing the switch with a '-' or 'NO'.3 OPEN_LOG_FILEC If a log file is already open, you have the option of either usingC the current log file, or you can close the current log file and specify a new log file name.2 LOCALC This command is used to enable or disable writing local output toC the log file. Local output includes questions and all statusC reports output by the program. If you only want remote output/ in the log file, answer "No" to this question. 2 MISHC MISH is a program used to compress and convert input files intoC printable ASCII files. These files can be submitted on HASPC reader streams and can be transmitted using VAXNET/RSXNET. AfterC the file is received at the remote system, MISH is then used toC decompress the files back into their original file format. AllC file attributes are restored using the header record from the compressed file.  Command line format: - input_file/switches output_file/switches  Where switches are: H /ANALYZE - Used to analyze the header record and/or data of a fileD which has been compressed. Additional sub-switches@ that can be used are /DATA, /OCTAL, & /REVERSE.C /COMPRESS - Used to compress files. This is the default mode.J /DECOMPRESS - Used to decompress files into their original file format. 2 MODEM_TYPE9 VAXNET supports the following types of auto-dial modems:A DF03 - for the DEC DF03 auto-dial modem. The DF03 only works2 with rotary (pulse) dialing telephones.C DF112 - for the DEC DF112 auto-dial modem. The DF112 works withE both rotary (pulse) and Touch Tone telephones. By defaultD VAXNET uses touch tone dialing. To force pulse dialing, ) preceed the number with a 'P'. @ RIXON - for the RIXON R212A auto-dial modem. The R212A works@ with both rotary (pulse) and tone dialing telephones.C If you are not using an auto-dial modem, typing the RETURN key2 bypasses the remaining auto-dial modem questions.C If the remote port is not setup as /MODEM, all auto-dial questionsC (and/or symbols) are bypassed, and the modem is not hungup when VAXNET exits. 2 MODEM_USAGEC Once the port being used is patched in properly (see "HELPC REMOTE_PORT"), the modem connection can be established. The phoneC call to the remote system MUST be made from the phone being usedC for the modem. You CAN NOT transfer the call to the modem as you: can with synchronous modems; you'll loose the connection.? Use the following procedure to manually orginate a phone call:? o the voice/data switch must be in the data position to placeK the call using the DF112 modem. Make sure the Data Terminal Ready (TR)I lamp is lite. If you are intending to use 1200 baud, be sure the HS  switch is in. @ o Once in the data position, you should see to following LEDs:E VADIC: Data Set Ready (DSR), Clear To Send (CTS), Carrier (CXR), and High Speed (HS).< RIXON: Data Set Ready (MR), Carrier (MC lamp goes out), and High Speed (HS).E DF03: Data Set Ready (DSR), Carrier (CAR), and High Speed (HS).E DF112: Data Set Ready (DSR), Carrier (CAR), and High Speed (HS).@ Note: The High Speed (HS) LED is only lite if at 1200 baud.2 NEW_FEATURESC This section describes problems fixed and new features available with VAXNET Version 7.0:; o VAXNET no longer gets hung in an MWAIT/HIBERNATE state.3 o Running in batch mode is now detected properly.C o Terminal generated XOFF/XON is now handled properly. The VT100C can now be used in smooth scroll and the NO SCROLL key now works properly.C o The help module previously written in BLISS has been rewitten9 in FORTRAN. All of VAXNET is now written in FORTRAN.@ o Additional DCL symbols used in dump file. See DUMP section.D o The logical name VAXNET$PORT can be defined for the remote port.D o The DISPLAY command is used to enable/disable or alter how often? the record statistics are output during file transmissions.D o The REF command is used to enable/disable automatic reformatting of the log file.: o The PAUSE command will pause VAXNET if it was spawned.C o The SPAWN and "$" commands are used to spawn DCL commands. TheD SPAWN command copied DCL symbols and logical names while the "$"B command does not (for speed). If no DCL command is specified, a new process is created.C o The TYPEAHEAD command specifies the limit the remote typeaheadB buffer is allowed to reach before reading the characters. TheD value is currently set at 32 to allow XOFF/XON to work properly.C o The WATCH command is used to enable/disable watching file names% being copied (same as COPY /LOG).> o The retry limit is now enforced during file transmissoins.4 o Current settings are now displayed in questions.C o The log file name now has the default extension .LOG appended& if you don't specify an extension.C o Wildcards, command files, and multiple files are now supported, for the DUMP, SCRIPT, and SEND commands.C o An out-of-band AST is enabled during file transmissions whichC allows you to type the ESCAPE key to get a one line statusC report of the cuurent file. This was added mainly for hardcopy: terminals and for when the record display is disabled.C o The command line "REF logfile_name" is now spawned to reformatC the log file instead of "MCR REF ...". This means a DCL symbol1 must be setup to active the reformat program.$ New features in VAXNET Version 8.0:C o Multiple protocols are now supported. The PROTOCOL command is8 used to select either the VAXNET or XMODEM protocol.C o The number of data bits can be changed. The 7BIT/8BIT commandsD specify the number of data bits to use with the XMODEM protocol.C o The type of file to be used with XMODEM can be specified. The? FILE_TYPE command is used to select either ASCII or BINARY.? o Command files can be specified at the Vaxnet command level.C o The TIMEOUT command can be used to change the timeout count used by the protocol.C o The RETRY_LIMIT command can be used to change the number of" retrys on transmission errors.D o The SHOW command is used to display all or selective parameters.2 PAUSEC If VAXNET was started via the DCL SPAWN command, you can use thisC to pause VAXNET. Pausing VAXNET returns you to DCL level and putsC VAXNET into a hibernate state. You can then continue VAXNET by2 using the ATTACH "process_name" command from DCL.2 PHONE_NUMBER: The format of phone numbers for the auto-dial modems are:A DF03 - The DF03 does not allow spaces and/or dashs in the phone1 number. It must consist of all numbers. i.e.: 1234567A RIXON - The RIXON R212A allows spaces and/or dashs in the phoneA number to make it easier to read. The character "&" is@ tells the modem to wait for an intermediate dial tone. i.e.: 9&123-4567 2 PROTOCOLB This command is used to specify the type of protocol to use. TheB default protocol is VAXNET. Currently, only the VAXNET and XMODEM protocols are supported. Command format:( Vaxnet> PROTOCOL KERMIT/VAXNET/XMODEM2 REDIALC This command is used with auto-dial modems to redial a previouslyC entered phone number. This command is useful when the modem hasC been hungup for some reason (i.e., invalid login, etc.) or if you= want to redial the remote hoping to get a better phone line.2 REFC This command is used to enable or disable the reformatting of theC of the log file. By default, the log file is reformatted. YouC can also disable waiting for reformat to complete. If waiting isC disabled, the reformat program is spawned without waiting for itC to complete so another log file can be openned immediatly. Use the2 command NOREF to disable reformatting altogether. Command format:% Vaxnet> REF [WAIT/NOWAIT] or NOREF 2 REMOTE_PORTC The remote port is the terminal line used to communicate with theC remote computer (system). This line can be either connectedC directly to a in-house system using a null modem cable, orC connected using a modem (see "HELP MODEM" for getting modemC connection established). The logical name VAXNET$PORT can be+ defined to specify the remote port to use.B The remote port should be setup as follows by the system manager:= $ SET TERM TTcn:/NOTYPEAHEAD/PERM ! Disable typeahead toC $ SET TERM TTcn:/ALTYPEAHEAD/PERM ! enable alternate typeahead@ $ SET TERM TTcn:/TYPEAHEAD/PERM ! buffer which is larger.A $ SET TERM TTcn:/MODEM/PERM ! If connected to a modem.E $ SET TERM TTcn:/NOBROADCAST ! Disables broadcast messages.C All other terminal characteristics are automatically setup byC VAXNET. The above characteristics should be done in the site? specific startup command file because they require privileges. 2 RETRY_LIMITD This command is used to set the retry limit for file transmissions.C This is the number of times a record/block is retransmitted. The default is 10 retrys. Command format: Vaxnet> RETRY_LIMIT n2 RETURNC After typing the interrupt character to enter the VAXNET command; level, type the RETURN key to return to the remote system. Command format: Vaxnet> 2 SCRIPTC A script file is used to drive an interactive terminal session atC the remote system. It is normally used in conjunction with theC auto-login feature to drive the remote session from batch. TheC script file contains commands just as you would type them in fromC a terminal. Normally each command line is sent to the remote withC a carriage return appended to it. There are two exceptions. IfC the first character of a command line is an up arrow (^), then theC all ^char's on the line are converted to control charatcers andC sent to the remote without a carruage return. The second exceptionC is if the line begins with the script command .WAIT. This commandC is used to define a string to wait for (such as a prompt) beforeC sending the next command. Refer to the example script file# "SCRIPT.MAI" for more information. Command format:) Vaxnet> SCRIPT file1, file2, ... filen 2 SEND_FILEC This command is used to send (transmit) a file to the remoteC system. The remote system MUST be running the SNDRCV programC prior to issuing this command. If you don't specify the fileC names on the command line you are prompted for them. The VAX fileC name can contain wildcards (%, *, and ...) or you can specify aC command file. If you specify wildcards or a command file, you areC prompted for the remote directory to put the files in. While theC file transmission is in progress, you can type the ESCAPE key to2 get a one line status report of the current file. Command format:$ Vaxnet> SEND vax_file remote_file 3 VAX_FILEC The VAX file name can be any file specification including wildcardC characters. You can also specify a command file via "@cmd_file".C If you don't specify an extension for the command file, .COM isC the default. The command file must have one file specificationB per line (wildcards are permitted). Trailing spaces are ignored. 3 REMOTE_FILEC The REMOTE file name must be a valid file specification for theC system you are talking to. If wildcards or command file input is? not active, then typing the RETURN key uses the VAX file name.C If wildcards or command file input is active, you must specify theC remote directory. BEWARE of files with multiple version numbersC since the file version number is not sent as part of the remote file name. Your options are:. <CR> or * - Send the file name only.C [*], [*...], [*,*] - Send the [directory] and file name. AnythingB before the [*] is appended to the file name.? [directory...] - Replace top VAX directory with specified.G device:[directory] - Else append the file name to specified directory.2 SHOW5 This command is used to show a particular parameter. Command format: Vaxnet> SHOW parameter Where parameter is:, * or ALL - Show all parameters.5 BITS - Show the number of data bits.: DEBUG - Show debug flag/debug information.2 DECHO - Show the dump echo status.4 DISPLAY - Show the display parameters.1 ECHO - Show the local echo flag.+ FILE_TYPE - Show the file type.5 INTERRUPT - Show the interrupt character.* LOG_FILE - Show the log file., MODEM_TYPE - Show the modem type.2 PROTOCOL - Show the type of protocol.3 REFORMAT - Show the reformat settings.- REMOTE_PORT - Show the remote port.- RETRY_LIMIT - Show the retry limit.- SYSTEM_TYPE - Show the system type.. SPEED - Show the remote speed./ TIMEOUT - Show the timeout count.1 TYPEAHEAD - Show the typeahead limit.2 WATCH - Show the watch files flag.2 SNDRCVC SNDRCV is the program run on the remote system to communicateC with VAXNET during file transmission (either GET or SEND). SNDRCV- is started by one of the following commands:B o if you are communicating with another VAX system, SNDRCV is/ started by typing the command "MCR SNDRCV".B o if you are communicating with an RSX-11M system, then SNDRCV3 is started by typing the command "RUN $SNDRCV".E In either case, the following message is displayed after SNDRCV is started.C SNDRCV Version 2.1 started ... Type CTRL/X and RETURN to abort.C At this point you should type CTRL/Y to get the VAXNET commandC prompt. Be careful not to type any other characters since theyC will be accepted by SNDRCV and interpreted as commands fromC VAXNET. After you get the VAXNET command prompt, you should typeC either GET or SEND and the file name questions associated withC each command. After the questions are answered, the file transmission begins.C The status report on the terminal is updated after each recordC transmitted. If the status report stops updating momentarily, beC patient, there may have been a transmission failure. After aC timeout period (currently 10 seconds), transmission shouldC continue. If the transmission doesn't continue, you should type a) single CTRL/C to abort the transmission.C To abort the SNDRCV program, you must type CTRL/X followed by theC return key. If SNDRCV doesn't abort after the first attempt, try6 several times; the second try usually does it for me.2 SPAWNC There are two commands used to execute a DCL command. If you typeC "$ dcl_command", the command is executed without copying the DCLC symbols and logical names. If you type "SPAWN dcl_command", theC DCL symbols and logical names are copied. With either command, if: a DCL command is not specified, a new process is created.' For example, to get a directory, type: Vaxnet> SPAWN DIRECTORY 2 STARTUPC Before establishing the connection with the remote system either5 in-house or over a modem, you MUST do the following.B o after you are logged into the VAX, allocate the port to beB used for VAXNET. This is done so the operating system doesn'tB think someone is attempting to login to the system. AlthoughB VAXNET allocates the port internally, this is only stays inB effect while you are running VAXNET. When you exit fromB VAXNET, the port is automatically deallocated. Failure toB allocate the system could result in both systems getting hungB up looping character back and forth (initiating LOGIN) andB WILL prevent VAXNET from attaching the remote port since it isB already allocated. On RSX-11M, this will result in all the8 system buffers being used up and the system hanging.B o the second step is to start VAXNET and answer all theB questions. This is not really neccessary if the remote is aB DEC operating system (no timeout period) but is needed for anB IBM system. IBM (especially the GE Crossfile) has a limitedB amount of time to login to their system. If you aren't loggedB in within that period of time (how much time ???), IBM (TSO)B will hangup the modem on their end. You will still have to beB very fast for IBM if you're terminal is on a differnt floor than the modem.2 STATUSC This command is used to get a status report of how VAXNET isC currently setup. If DCL symbols are used to answer the questionsC at startup time, this command is executed automatically to displayC the current parameters. The modem type and phone number are only. displayed if you are using an autodial modem. Example: Vaxnet> STATUS Log file name: VAXNET.LOG Local logging: Enabled Remote port: _TTA4: Interrupt char: ^A System type: DEC Local echo: Disabled Remote speed: 1200 Modem type: RIXON Phone number: 705 2 SUMMARYC The following is a summary of the commands which can be issued atC the Vaxnet command level. Most commands can be shortened to 3B characters unless you are negating the command then 5 are needed.F AUTO_LOGIN BAUD_RATE CROSSFILE $ cmd [NO]DEBUGE [NO]DECHO DIAL [NO]DISPLAY DUMP_FILE [NO]ECHOA EXIT GET_FILE FILE_TYPE [NO]HANGUP HELPB INTERRUPT LOCAL [NO]LOG_FILE MODEM_TYPE PAUSEH PROTOCOL REDIAL [NO]REF REMOTE_PORT RETRY_LIMITC SCRIPT SEND_FILE SHOW SPAWN STATUSD SYSTEM_TYPE TIMEOUT TYPEAHEAD [NO]WATCH [NO]XON 7BIT 8BIT 2 SYMBOLSC DCL symbols can be defined to automatically answer the various$ VAXNET questions. The symbols are:6 $ VAXNET_INTRO :== "N" ! VAXNET Introduction.C $ VAXNET_LOG :== "Y" ! Output from remote to a log file.B $ LOG_LOCAL :== "N" ! Enable local output to log file.4 $ LOG_FILE :== "ROBIN.LOG" ! The log file name.5 $ REMOTE_PORT :== "TTA4:" ! Remote port to use.A $ REMOTE_SPEED :== "1200" ! Baud rate of the remote system.8 $ SYSTEM_TYPE :== "DEC" ! Type of remote system.A $ INTERRUPT_CHAR :== "^A" ! Character to get Vaxnet prompt.: $ MODEM_TYPE :== "RIXON" ! Type of auto-dial modem.7 $ PHONE_NUMBER :== "number" ! Phone number to dial.B $ VAXNET_CMD :== "SCRIPT TEST.COM" ! VAXNET command to execute.B For the interrupt character, the "^A" gets converted to a CTRL/A.> Also see AUTO_LOGIN for addition symbols for automatic login. 2 SYSTEM_TYPEC This command is used to specify the type of remote system you areC communicating with. This sets up various flags within VAXNET toC determine how to talk to the remote. For example, if you specifyC IBM, a local echo will be performed since IBM (TSO) doesn't echo4 characters sent to it. The valid system types are:@ APPLE, CROSSFILE, DATAIO, DEC, EASYLINK, IBM, UNIX, and XXDP. 2 TIMEOUTC This commands is used to set the timeout count in seconds for file+ transmissions. The default is 10 seconds. Command format: Vaxnet> TIMEOUT n 2 TYPEAHEADC This command is used to specify the limit the typeahead buffer isC allowed to fill to before the characters are read. It also limitsC the maximum number of characters which are read at one time. TheC default typeahead limit is set to 32. This small limit is requiredC to allow terminal generated XOFF/XON to work properly. This limit6 also appears to work with the VT100 in smooth scroll. Command format: Vaxnet> TYPEAHEAD n DCL symbol: $ TYPEAHEAD_LIMIT :== 322 WATCHC This command is used to enable or disable the display of the file? name at end of file. By default the file names are displayed. Command format: Vaxnet> WATCH or NOWATCH2 XONC This command informs VAXNET that the remote system responds to theC XON/XOFF protocol to control output to the terminal. If enabled,C VAXNET allows the typeahead buffer to fill to some limit beforeC reading the characters to reduce system overhead. The terminalC driver sends an XOFF when the typeahead buffer is nearly full.C This command isn't normally used since the system type question< sets up internal flags for the remote system you are using.C If disabled with the NOXON command, VAXNET doesn't wait for theC typeahead buffer to fill. Instead, it will read the number ofD characters in the typehead buffer or issue a single character read. Command format: Vaxnet> XON or NOXON2 7BITD This command is used to set the number of data bits used. This is% the default for the VAXNET protocol. Command format: Vaxnet> 7BIT2 8BITD This command is used to set the number of data bits used. This is0 the default for the KERMIT and XMODEM protocol. Command format: Vaxnet> 8BITww